JP7015885B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Patent Document 1, in recent years, the player can provide information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. There is a known gaming machine that informs against. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a notification lamp for notifying when a player wins a favorable state such as a bonus. From the player's point of view, it is possible to know that the notification lamp is on / off to determine that the player is in an advantageous state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In this respect, since AT is in an advantageous state for the player as well as the bonus, it is required to devise a method of notifying the player of the result of the lottery for transition to AT.

However, with a lamp that simply turns on / off, although the presence or absence of a win can be immediately known, the player feels that the lamp only needs to be turned on, which makes it interesting, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device. There was a risk that the game would become monotonous due to the loss of interest in other productions such as.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not impair the interest of gaming with respect to AT notification.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that plays a game using a gaming value, and has a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and start conditions. When the winning combination is determined based on the establishment of the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol of the plurality of variable display units and the establishment of the start condition. The first role (for example, "for example") that allows stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a first symbol combination (for example, a combination of bell symbols) or a second symbol combination (for example, a combination of bell spilled symbols). F_3 choice bell "), and a plurality of symbol combinations including a third symbol combination (for example, a combination of the first symbol) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, a miss) when determined as a winning combination. A combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a second combination (for example, "F_3 alternative 1-card combination") that allows stop display, and the above. It is provided corresponding to a plurality of variable display units, and is determined by a stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each variable display unit, and the combination determining means. The stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the fluctuation of the symbol are based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. In the game value giving means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of giving the game value according to the symbol combination displayed when stopped, and the first symbol combination, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. It is a symbol combination in which the first quantity of game value (for example, nine medals) is given when it is displayed at the time, and the second symbol combination is displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The third symbol combination is at least one of a symbol combination to which a second quantity of game value smaller than the first quantity is given or a symbol combination to which no game value is given. It is a symbol combination in which a third quantity of gaming value (for example, one medal) equal to or less than the gaming value used for the game is given when the symbol is displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The symbol combination of 4 is a symbol combination or a symbol to which no gaming value is given, which is a fourth quantity less than the third quantity when displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. At least one of the combinations As the game state in which the game is performed, there is a predetermined game state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and a specific game state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player cannot be notified. As a predetermined gaming state, a first notification game state for notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player when the first combination is determined as a winning combination, and a first notification gaming state when the first combination is determined as a winning combination. It has a second notification game state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified when the second combination is determined as the winning combination without notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. Further, a right-giving means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of granting the right to shift the gaming state to the first notified gaming state, and when the right is granted, a predetermined number of precursor games have elapsed. Later, a first notification game control means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the first notification game state, and a second notification game control means that starts the second notification game state according to a predetermined condition (for example, the main control board 71). For example, the main control board 71), that the current gaming state is the first notified gaming state, that the current gaming state is the second notified gaming state, and that the precursor game is all. A notification means (for example, a state display 147b) for notifying in the same manner is further provided, and the second notification game control means is a game controlled to the first notification game state of the predetermined game states. It is characterized in that a game other than the above is controlled as the second notification game state .

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled when the AT is notified by the notification means.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is an overall front view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a schematic layout drawing inside the housing of the pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the said pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the said pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting state of a mirror mechanism. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the right side plate of the screen housing is removed. It is a perspective view of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of the display screen displayed on the sub-display device of the pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the auxiliary control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviation of the winning combination in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode-up lottery table in CZ1 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the point-up lottery table in CZ2 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in a normal ART in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table in ART stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in a normal ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table during CT stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of sets in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of ART games in the bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table at the end of a bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during non-ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in the pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal middle start processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of CZ of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ3 middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of a normal ART of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of CT of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of BB of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART end processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the history management process of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the display screen of the sub display device of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the CT precursor in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in normal ART stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT meter promotion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 end lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lock lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the CT precursor in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the notification during the MB flag in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in a pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the lock state and notification in the pachislot machine of a modification. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in the pachislot machine of the modified example. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification performed on the sub side in the pachislot machine of the modification example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ratio display of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information display of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the pattern example of the lighting timing of the state indicator in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the notification method of the presence or absence of the winning of the transition lottery to a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the basic game flow of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of each gaming state which the pachislot machine has. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table and the transition lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the realization method of CZ when the transition lottery to the ART game state is performed with the probability that is uniquely determined. It is a figure which shows the counting method of the limit game number in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the limit processing of the specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the navigation guarantee processing at the end of a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the pattern example of the signal output timing to an external device in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the navigation securing method in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the method of saving the number of times of navigation when the specific section of the number of times of navigation is executed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the production example in the case of managing the lip navigator and the bell navigator individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection method of CZ with a different end period in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the control at the time of setting change in the said pachislot machine.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. In addition, it is not limited to gaming machines that pay out gaming media, but is applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose game media such as game balls and give benefits as electronic data such as points earned when predetermined grant conditions are met. It is also possible to do. Further, in the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and a function in which the replay probability is higher than usual during a specific number of plays. A pachi-slot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which the RT is operated at the same time will be described.

[Functional flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 6 is operated, the pachi-slot machine 1 has one value (for example, 0 to 65535) from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Hereafter, a random number value) is extracted.

The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 31 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means has a predetermined winning probability from among a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game for the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 30) (the establishment of the predetermined start condition). To determine the internal winning role.

By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed by the player, the reel stop control means (main CPU 31, described later, motor drive circuit described later). 39, the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R described later) control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. conduct.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed. .. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number thereof is equivalent to four symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

When the reel stop control means has determined an internal winning combination that permits the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning, the combination of the symbols is the winning line (hereinafter, "effective line") using the above-mentioned specified time. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible along the above).

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they will not be displayed along the effective line using the above specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of the symbols displayed along the valid line is related to the winning. Judge whether or not.

That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means.

When it is determined that the prize is related to the prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachi-slot machine 1.

In this embodiment, the first stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating is the first stop operation and the first. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the series of flows described above, various effects can be produced by using the light (video) output performed by the display unit 100, the sound output performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. It will be done.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for production is extracted, the production content determining means determines by lottery what to be executed this time from a plurality of types of production content associated with the internal winning combination. The sub-control board, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. do. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is played by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
This concludes the description of the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The housing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet 61, and a lower front surface of the cabinet 61. It has a lower door 62b arranged in. The cabinet 61 accommodates equipment used for games (eg, reels, etc.). The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so that the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed, and the lower door 62b is provided so that the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed.
Since the cabinet 61 is a member for fixing the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b may be referred to as a front door.

The upper door 62a has a display unit 100 in the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as described later.

A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the upper part of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, which will be described later. In the display window 4, a cross-up line diagonally to the upper right, a top line in the upper row, a center line in the middle row, a bottom line in the lower row, and a cross-down line diagonally downward to the right are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 pattern. The five lines from the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3 × 3 symbols displayed by the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the center line out of these five lines is an effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for determining the winning.

The effective line (center line) is activated by operating the MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the term "number of inserted medals" includes both the number of BETs inserted by operating the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

A plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row in the cabinet 61. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on which a symbol string as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The design drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner.

A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. A medal insertion slot 22 is provided on the right side of the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1-bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 30) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided.

By pressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (3 medals) used for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button is pressed once. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals used for the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1-bet button, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22 (the operation of inserting a medal to play a game) are referred to as "insertion operation".

An information display 14 is provided at substantially the center of the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as the number of inserted medals). Further, the information display 14 has information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits), and the like. Is provided with a digital display (not shown) that digitally displays the information to the player.

Further, the information display 14 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the combination of symbols according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and by lighting or blinking in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, the player is notified of the information of the necessary stop operation. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a "pushing order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operations (pushing order) are different. The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, "1" is displayed when the push order "1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L)" is notified. , "2nd" is displayed when notifying the push order "2nd (the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3C in the middle)", and the push order "3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R)" is displayed. (To do) ”is displayed as“ 3 ”. The details of the notification of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 30 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub control board 72 may be used to notify the information of the stop operation, for example. Information on the stop operation may be notified on the display unit 100 described above.

In this case, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means may be different. That is, in the instruction monitor, the information of the stop operation to be notified may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays "1" uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) displays the first stop operation on the left. It may be possible to directly notify what is to be done to the reel 3L of the above.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the ART gaming state (see FIG. 33) described later without notifying the stop operation information in the general gaming state (non-ART) described later.

Further, on the left side of the front portion of the pedestal portion 10, a settlement button 13 for switching the credit / payout of the medal acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation is provided. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 15 at the lower part of the front surface, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 is specified as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's tilting operation to start variable display of a symbol in the display window 4. It is mounted so that it can be tilted within the range of the angle of.

Stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10 as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's pressing operation. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6 and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

A first sub-display device 201 and a second sub-display device 202 are provided on the front surface of the upper part of the lower door 62b. The first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are liquid crystal displays and organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) displays, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are lateral to the front surface of the lower door 62b, which stands substantially perpendicular to the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The first sub display device 201 is provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side), and the second sub display device 202 is provided on the right side (medal insertion slot 22 side).

At least one of the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202, in the present embodiment, the touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub-display device 201, and the touch sensor 201a is provided via the touch sensor 201a. The display can be switched according to the operation of the accepted player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub-display device 201 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 31) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

Speakers 9L and 9R that produce sounds such as sound effects and voices are provided on the left and right in front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout outlet 15 for paying out medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. At the lowermost part of the lower door 62b, a medal receiving portion 16 for storing the paid out medals is provided.

In addition, on the front surface of the lower part of the lower door 62b, which is sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25 with a design corresponding to the motif of the model is displayed. It is attached. The lumbar panel 25 is illuminated by a lumbar panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind it.

[Display unit structure]
Subsequently, the structure of the display unit 100 included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 28.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet 61 on the rear side of the upper door 62a. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. ..

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) with respect to an accessory which is a screen described later. By projecting an image according to the production information, which is generated based on the shape and the like, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful production.

(Display unit 100: Irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward and the projector mechanism B2, and the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 is arranged diagonally downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: Irradiation light device B: Projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at the rear part in the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

Further, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating air and a fan for sending out air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when generating the irradiation light is forcibly rearward. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, the ventilation holes 21a of the cabinet 61 are arranged in the flow direction of the air in the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with the air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation holes 21a.

(Display unit 100: Irradiation light device B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. is doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape on the front surface. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed in each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed in the front surface centering on the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

Further, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331, B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are partially formed so as to overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 abut on both sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313 in the left-right direction, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. , The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front center portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjusting holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is widened. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is formed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. Thereby, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311 and 331 and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjusting holes B311 and 331 and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is sandwiched between. Then, a screw inserted from the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit 100: Irradiation light device B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 protrudes forward from the cabinet 61 in FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form that protrudes forward in the central portion of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in a space portion formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. ..

Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding in the horizontal direction from the lower end portion. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is set to a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Has been done. On the other hand, the second protruding portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, each of the side wall portions B13 and B13 is formed so that the width of the second protruding portion B131b is wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 61.

A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed so as to be substantially evenly dispersed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be visually recognized from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper portion B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent diagonally downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front portion of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the upper portion B15a and cover the front portion of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the inclined portion B15b and the lower portion B15c from the middle portion to the rear portion. There is. As shown in FIG. 10, a front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

Although the details will be described later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position arranged on the upper side, which is a standby posture for prohibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower side, which is an exposure posture for allowing the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is tilted so as to be substantially parallel to the tilted portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are formed. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and improve the cooling efficiency.

Further, by providing the perforated plate B15 so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the position of the player's line of sight located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if it exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line of sight, the inside of the irradiation light device B is not visually observed by the perforated plate B15.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. As a result, the display unit 100 can unite the irradiation light device B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 has a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper surface side where the irradiation light device B is located are connected. An open box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen housing C10 are independently formed into predetermined shapes, and predetermined functional parts such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been made. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized as a whole, the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 can be standardized for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central mounting portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction about the central mounting portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 position the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively, by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion thereof is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, the front side portion C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301 when the display unit 100 is mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61 and is incorporated into the cabinet 61. It makes it possible to perform rearward positioning. Then, the display unit 100 can be screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14 to perform the installation work and the installation work of the display unit 100 from the front side of the cabinet 61. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the side of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal directions coincide with each other in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operating openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

As a result, when manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position after incorporating the display unit 100 into the cabinet 61, first, the display unit 100 is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 in which the upper door 62a is opened. Specifically, a worker located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screws of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61 and removes the screws. Then, the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61 by reaching into the cabinet 61 and grasping the operating openings C21 and C31 of the display unit 100 with both hands. After that, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, reaching into the screen device C from one of the operating openings C21 of the removed display unit 100, and rotating the crank gear E21 that can be seen in the horizontal direction from the operating opening C21. Thereby, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

With the upper door 62a open, reach out from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and reach from the operation opening C21. By operating the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit 100 from the outside of the cabinet 61.

Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor accommodating portion C22 accommodates the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a relay board CK is provided on the back surface. The relay board CK makes it possible to collect a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 and perform wiring to the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so as to be arranged in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay board CK is arranged in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 303 of the intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is arranged below the relay board CK, and the signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

As a result, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, which facilitates the wiring work and eliminates the need to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is expanded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is incorporated in the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. After that, by reaching into the screen device C from the operation opening C41 and rotating the intermediate gear E23 that can be seen horizontally from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen position relationship)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between the front exposed position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposed position and the fixed exposed position is set so that the reel exposed position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposed position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing in the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing in the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other in the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 so as to minimize the overlap of the operating regions due to rotation. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. As a result, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is present in the standby position. This prevents interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 during rotation.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection unit D1, a right surface reflection unit D2, a left surface reflection unit D3, and a bottom surface reflection unit D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a plurality of reflecting surfaces having different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it may be provided with a reflecting portion of a curved or arcuate reflecting surface in which the center point of curvature is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

In the front reflecting portion D1, the reflecting surface is arranged to face the player on the front side, and most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the front upper part of the fixed screen mechanism D is reflected forward. It is set to do. The right side reflecting portion D2 and the left side reflecting portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflecting portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflecting portion D1. The right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 make it easier for the direction of reflection of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface to be toward the front reflecting portion D1. It is designed to reflect in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Further, as for the bottom surface reflecting portion D4, the direction of reflection of the irradiation light on the reflecting surface is easily directed toward the front reflecting portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is directed toward the front reflecting portion D1 while the image of the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the above-mentioned fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set to be lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation light on the reflecting surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D is prevented from blurring due to the mixing of light due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light by the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflecting portion D1.

As the brightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) and the L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, it can be defined in any way as long as white can be used as a reference and other colors can be represented by relative values.

The brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are such that the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color may be blacker than the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint to be applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint to be applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A paint to which a black pigment is added to the paint to be applied to the base material may be used.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes. Both white and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is (for example, 5 to 25% (or, for example)) in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%)). As the paint to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known screen paints can be appropriately adopted, and can be adjusted according to the screen type (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

Instead of including the black pigment in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is also desirable to reduce the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, for the peripheral wall, it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen, so if the brightness is low. The lower the better. That is, the closer the color of the surrounding wall is to black, the more desirable it is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin plate-shaped flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has the projection surface E11a formed flat so that an image without distortion appears when irradiated with the irradiation light.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of depth, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral edge portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly to both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is in contact with and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral portion and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, it is prevented that the deformation of the front screen support base E12 in the deep portion deforms the front screen member E11 and causes distortion in the projection surface E11a.

Further, the front screen support base E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a part of a region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposed position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to the production of a game is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrally formed by being separately formed and then bonded with an adhesive. As a result, even if a sink mark may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when the front screen mechanism E1 forms a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12, the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of distortion due to the sink marks of the projection surface E11a on the front screen member E11.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to the bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As the material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately adopted. can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 has a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 15 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 makes the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) rotatable about the intermediate position E22a as the rotation center.

The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the upper end side of the crank member E22) in the upper region is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) in the lower region is set so that the lower side is inclined to the front side rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed so that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shaped side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width (distance between the two straight portions) of the slide groove E22b is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 comes into contact with the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 in FIG. 24. In the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a and the slide member in the crank member E22. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is in the direction of applying all the components of this force. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure having a zero-degree-of-freedom three-node link with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as the fixed end and the slide member E26 as the free end is formed. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is capable of transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts to rotate.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so that the crank member E22 A two-node link with one degree of freedom is formed in which the intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end that can be moved along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, gradually increases, and the intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (FIG. 27). After reaching the maximum speed in, the vehicle gradually decelerates, and when the exposed posture and the standby posture are reached, the stopped state becomes 0. As a result, the rotation of the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via the shaft member E3, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. It has a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the screen.

The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape close to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, the surface of the reel screen portion F11 has a pattern formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is used as a projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, an image can appear by irradiation with irradiation light.

One ends of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other ends of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protruding portion (not shown). The protruding portion is projected horizontally to the outside of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Directing by the screen device)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed by using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a flat image display and a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) are obtained. It is possible to perform an effect using a certain image display and an effect using a curved image display.

For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, the image is caused to appear on the flat projection surface E11a, which causes distortion during irradiation of the irradiation light. It is possible to make an image without light appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this flat image.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, the plurality of reflecting portions of the fixed screen mechanism D provide a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect). It is possible to make an image with a certain appearance appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this image with a sense of depth.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, the image is caused to appear on the reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate. A curved image can be made to appear, and an effect using this curved image can be executed.

[Display example of the first sub display device]
Subsequently, the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a part of the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201. As shown in FIG. 29, the first sub-display device 201 displays a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and game information screens 213, 214, 215. These plurality of display screens are switched according to the operation of the player received via the touch sensor 201a.

The top screen 211 is an initial screen among the display screens displayed on the first sub display device 201, and displays the menu button 211a and the outline game history 211b. The menu button 211a is an operation button that calls the menu screen 212 when operated (tapped) by the player. The summary game history 211b displays a part of the game history (summary game history) of the game history in the pachi-slot machine 1. In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachi-slot machine 1 are displayed as the outline game history.

The menu screen 212 is a display screen menu displayed on the first sub-display device 201, and includes a back button 212a, a registration button 212b, an explanation button 212c, an array payout button 212d, a reach button 212e, and a WEB. The site button 212f and the volume button 212g are displayed. The back button 212a is an operation button that calls the top screen 211 by being operated by the player. Further, the registration button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons for calling the corresponding display screen by being operated by the player.

For example, when the registration button 212b is operated by a player, a registration screen (not shown) for registering the player being played is called. In recent pachislot machines, a service is widely provided in which a player is registered for each model and various information such as the achievement status of a predetermined mission is managed from the player's past game history. .. The registration screen called by the registration button 212b is a display screen for registering a player when receiving the provision of this service.

Further, when the explanation button 212c is operated by the player, the explanation screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The contents to be explained on the explanation screen include, for example, an explanation about the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 such as a bonus winning probability and an ART winning probability for each set value, and an introduction of characters appearing in the production of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, when the array payout button 212d is operated by the player, the array payout screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, the correspondence relationship (dividend table) between the combination of the symbols judged to be winning in the pachislot machine 1 and the privilege when it is judged to be winning, and the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Columns (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

Further, when the reach button 212e is operated by the player, the reach screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the reach screen, the reach of the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. The reach stitch is a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the effective line, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach stitch is shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. The combination of symbols is applicable. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of the symbols of the reach eyes is displayed along the effective line, the player is subsequently in an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, a normal ART or CT (FIG. 33). See))) is to be confirmed.

Further, when the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, the WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) indicating the URL of an arbitrary WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each model of the pachislot machine 1 or a WEB site of the manufacturer of the pachislot machine 1). Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

Further, when the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

Here, since the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, it can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and the effect is executed during the game (that is, the display unit 100 performs the effect). Even in the middle), the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched. For the player, for example, he / she may want to know the character appearing in the production in the display unit 100. In such a case, the explanation button 212c is operated to call the explanation screen to check the relationship between the characters. It can be grasped during the game. Also, from the player's point of view, when the so-called rare role is won, it may be desired to grasp the symbol that should be used as a guide in order to win the rare role during reel rotation. In such a case, the array payout button 212d The reel arrangement can be grasped by calling the arrangement payout screen by operating.

The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens for displaying detailed game history including an outline game history to be displayed on the top screen of the game history of the pachi-slot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a back button 213a, a menu button 213b, a front button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The back button 213a and the menu button 213b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen by being operated by the player, and when the front button 213c is operated, the game information screen is displayed from the game information screen 213. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. Further, the game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1.

The game information screen 214 displays a back button 214a, a menu button 214b, a front button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The back button 214a and the menu button 214b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. Further, the game history 214e displays the number of times the CZ (chance zone) has entered and the number of times the success has occurred in the pachi-slot machine 1. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, since CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are provided as CZs, the number of intrusions and the number of successes of CZ1 to 3 are displayed in the game history 214e.

The game information screen 215 displays a back button 215a, a menu button 215b, a front button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The back button 215a and the menu button 215b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. Further, the game history 215e displays the number of winnings and the winning probability (a fraction of one numerator) of the so-called small winning combination in the pachi-slot machine 1.

The display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on the operation buttons displayed on each display screen, or may be switched based on a swipe operation on the display screen. May be.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machine]
This concludes the description of the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, an external centralized terminal board 73 electrically connected to these, and a peripheral device (actuator).

<Main control board>
FIG. 30 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 has a microcomputer 30 installed on the circuit board as a main component. The microcomputer 30 is composed of a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

(Random number generator, etc.)
A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse.

The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the intended use.

(Peripheral devices and circuits)
Peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 30 include stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. Further, the input / output ports of the microcomputer 30 include a motor drive circuit 39 for controlling the operation of each peripheral device, a hopper drive circuit 41, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external centralized terminal board 73, and the like. Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes a symbol changing means and controls the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition.

The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit according to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation.

The stepping motors 49L, 49C, and 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate at a constant angle.

The main CPU 31 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).

Next, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 50.

That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the number of medals paid out from the hopper 40 has reached the number of medals to be paid out. ..

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 73 is input with signals such as the number of medals inserted / paid out from the main control board 71, the number of games played, and information on whether or not the bonus is operated, and displays the signals such as the number of games played and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or the host computer of the amusement park. The external display is installed above, for example, the pachi-slot machine 1, updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, and notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal insertion, and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal payout or the replay, and is output at the time of the medal payout (including credit storage) or at the time of the replay operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons, switches, and information display 14. Further, the door relay board 74 is connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected so that information can be transmitted only to the sub-relay board 75, and the information is not transmitted from the sub-relay board 75. As a result, information can be transmitted between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 only from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 in one-way communication.

A start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1-bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S are connected to the door relay board 74.

The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal accepted by the medal slot 22 has passed through the selector. Further, the MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 is pressed by the player. Further, the 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button is pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 activates the effective line based on the detection results of the medal sensor 42S, the MAX bet switch 11S, and the 1-bet switch. Further, the settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 is pressed by the player.

Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, 107R for displaying the acceptance status thereof, and the number of medals and the advantageous stop operation are unique. Is connected to the information display 14 (instruction monitor) that notifies the user.

<Sub-control board>
FIG. 31 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control board 71.

The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub-CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub-RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the rom cartridge board 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control board 71. The ROM cartridge board 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, a random value for effect extraction to determine the effect content (effect data), and the effect data. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling the output of sound by 9R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and sound data related to BGM and sound effects. It includes various storage areas such as a storage area for storing the lamp data and a storage area for storing lamp data related to the pattern of turning on and off the light.

The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are connected to the sub-control board 72 via a predetermined relay board. For example, in the sub-control board 72, an accessory relay board (not shown) is connected to the display unit 100, and the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device are connected via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). Connected to 202. The display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub-control board 72.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, a sub-relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, and relays the wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. .. For example, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 with various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown), and is a sub-control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). The 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Transition flow of playing state of pachislot machine]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

<Transition flow of basic game state>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the winning / non-operation of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 distinguishes between a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on whether or not the bonus (F_BB1, 2) is won / activated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not operating, and the inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus is winning and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state. Is the state in which the bonus is activated.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not the bonus is activated is determined by the game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with six types of states, from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is the gaming state in which the winning combination related to the replay is the internal winning combination. It is a gaming state in which the probability determined as is a medium probability. Further, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

These RT0 gaming states to RT5 gaming states are managed based on the data stored in the gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 has five flags from the RT1 game state flag to the RT5 game state flag, and the RT game state is managed by managing the on / off of these flags in the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the on RT gaming state flag as the current RT gaming state. When all the RT game state flags are off, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT game state is the RT1 game state.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the main control board 71, when (1) the combination related to the bonus (F_BB1, 2) is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state, the game changes from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state. Transition the state. Then, when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in (2) the inter-flag state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Further, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (216) is paid out in the (3) bonus state, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state after (4) 20 games have elapsed, and (5) a bell spilled eye is displayed before 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) bell spilled eyes are displayed.

Further, when the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) displays the RT4 transition lip in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, when (8) a bell spill or an RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly, the bell in the RT4 gaming state. When the spilled eye or the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

Here, the bell spillage is determined for each type of push order bell when the push order bell (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. Further, in the RT2 transition lip, when the maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order determined for each type of maintenance lip is not specified. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, the RT3 transition lip is a push order determined for each type of RT3 lip when the RT3 lip (F_RT3 lip_1st, F_RT3 lip_213, F_RT3 lip_231, F_RT3 lip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, the RT4 transition rip is a push order determined for each type of RT4 rip when the RT4 rip (F_RT4 rip_123, F_RT4 rip_132, F_RT4 rip_2nd, F_RT4 rip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Transition flow of game state regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 manages the game state based on the winning / non-operation of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof, while notifying the player of the advantageous stop operation. The game status is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 distinguishes between a general gaming state and an ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The general gaming state is basically a gaming state (non-ART) that does not notify the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. On the contrary, the ART gaming state is a gaming state for notifying a stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and is a gaming state which is advantageous for the player. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays the game so as to shift from the general gaming state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART gaming state which is advantageous to the player. ..

The general gaming state is a gaming state in which ART is not won among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the general gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal game state and the CZ are game states in which the game states of the transition destinations are different from each other. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal game state is changed to the CZ, and the CZ is changed to the ART game state. Is done.

The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachi-slot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state to CZ. Specifically, the transition lottery to the CZ is performed in the normal gaming state, and (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ.

The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high degree of expectation for shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility that the CZ will shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, the CZ performs a transition lottery to ART, and (B) when the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal gaming state, and (C) this. When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) via the preparation for ART.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 32, the RT4 gaming state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 gaming states via the RT3 gaming state, so that the ART gaming state does not start immediately even after winning the ART. do not have. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, ART preparation is in progress until the transition to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART, and during this ART preparation, the stop operation necessary for transitioning to the RT4 gaming state is notified.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. The normal ART and the CT are gaming states in which the playability is different from each other, and the normal ART is for displaying a stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, a combination of symbols having a large number of medals to be paid out) during a predetermined number of games. It is a gaming state that notifies the stop operation of the player and the stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT4 gaming state), and the CT notifies the player of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player and adds the duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, the game is usually performed without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the CT or general gaming state. Specifically, in normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed, and (D) When the lottery for transition is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from normal ART to CT. Further, the continuation period of the normal ART is managed, and (E) when the continuation period ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Normally, the method of managing the duration of ART is arbitrary, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the duration is managed by the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals paid out during normal ART and the difference number, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation). The duration may be managed by the number of times).

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CT to the normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CT is managed by the duration of 8 games per set, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 63).

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, (2) when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 is in the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

In the bonus state, a lottery for shifting to ART is performed. (G) If the lottery for shifting is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) has transitioned to the bonus state, the main control board 71 will change from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) even if the transition lottery is not won. ) To shift the game state). Further, (H) When the transition lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state ends, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when the game state shifts from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is preparing for ART. The gaming state is transferred to the ART gaming state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 74.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol position "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "White 7", "Blue 7", "Chile Top 1", "Chile Top 2", "Chile Bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", and "Cactus 2". And "Cactus 3" are included.

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34, the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0" when the reel index is detected, and the reel 3L is assigned. A correspondence relationship is defined in which symbol positions "0" to "19" are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation directions of 3, 3C and 3R.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 34, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 34 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to this embodiment are "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", and "hat" as described above. , "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3".

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). "00000011" is assigned as data to the "Chile top 1" symbol (symbol code 3).

Similarly, for each symbol (symbol code 4 to 10) of "Chile top 2", "Chile bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3". , "00000100" to "000001010" are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. In the symbol combination table, a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and a combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the privilege (the number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined to be a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the replay, and operating the bonus game (continuous operation device for the character). If the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which the data of the combination of the corresponding symbols is stored and the "data (bits corresponding to the combination of the symbols in the 1-byte data) stored in the storage area". Data for specifying) ”is specified. In the present embodiment, 22 1-byte storage areas are used to determine the combination of each symbol. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 35 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of the storage area 0.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

Further, the number of payouts specified in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 37, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table shows the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 35, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the valid line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 32). ).

Further, the combination names "R_RT transition eye A_01" to "R_RT transition eye B_02" are bell spilled eyes. When the bell spilled eye is displayed along the valid line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

Further, the combination names "C_maintenance lip A_01" to "C_maintenance lip G_01" are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines of the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the valid line, the replay is activated.

Further, the combination names "C_RT2 rip A_01" and "C_RT2 rip A_02" are RT2 transition rips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the cross-up line displayed on the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the regame operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

The combination name "C_RT3 rip_01" is an RT3 transition rip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

Further, the combination names "C_RT4 rip A_01" to "C_RT4 rip D_02" are RT4 transition rips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the regame operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

Further, the combination names "C_chililip A_01" to "C_1 certain chililip D_01" are chililip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the symbol "upper chili 1" and the symbol "lower chili" are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chilean symbol is a name when the symbol "Chile top 1" and the symbol "Chile bottom" are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the valid line, the re-game is activated.

Of the chili lip, the combination name "C_chili lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes called "single reel lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip B_01" and "C_chili lip C_01" are a combination of symbols whose chili symbols are displayed on two reels of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, in the following, it may be called "double chili lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are a combination of symbols whose chili symbols are displayed on all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or the corresponding one). This is a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols fails (so-called a mistake in pressing a button), and may be referred to as a "triple reel" below.

Further, the combination names "C_reach eye lip A_01" to "C_reach eye lip P_02" are reach eye rips. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a special combination of symbols is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name "C_reach eye lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed along the top line. When the reach eye lip is displayed along the valid line, the re-game is activated.

In addition, the combination names "C_RB role A_01" to "C_RB role G_02" are the 9th in the BB. When the 9th BB roll is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals are paid out. Of the 9th cards in the BB, the combinations of symbols other than the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" are 7 symbols (designs) in any of the 5 lines displayed on the display window 4. It is a combination of symbols in which three "white 7" or symbols "blue 7") are displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols fails). In the following, it may be referred to as "7 sets in BB". On the other hand, the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" are a combination of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines. I may call it.

Further, the combination names "C_9 sheets A_01" to "C_9 sheets H_04" are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "hat-hat-hat" is displayed in any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the valid line, nine medals will be paid out.

In addition, the combination names "C_1st_A_01" to "C_2nd_B_04" are the first cards. When the first roll is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names "C_SP1_01" and "C_SP2_01" are definite rolls. When a confirmed roll is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out.

Further, the combination names "C_3 sheets A_01" to "C_3 sheets F_01" are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the valid line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names "C_weak 2 sheets A_01" to "C_weak 2 sheets B_03" are weak cherries, and the combination names "C_strong 2 sheets A_01" to "C_strong 2 sheets C_09" are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the valid line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 39 is an internal lottery table referenced in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 40 is an internal lottery table referenced in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random random values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 39, it can be seen that the types and winning probabilities of the replays determined as the internal winning combinations in each gaming state are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is not determined as a combination, but is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are determined as internal winning combinations during the RT4 gaming state, specific control (described later). (Flag conversion) is performed, but this specific control will be described later.

Even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, "F_reach eye lip A to D" may be determined as an internal winning combination together with "F_BB1, 2" (No. 3 to 6, No.). (Refer to .15-18), "F_reach eye lip AD" is not determined as an internal winning combination by itself. Therefore, when "F_reach eye lip A to D" is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state (from the player's point of view, the combination of symbols according to the "F_reach eye lip A to D" is (When displayed), the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.

Further, in the RT5 gaming state, which is a state between flags, the combination related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination as described above. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 40, the winning combination related to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIGS. 41 to 46 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The circles in each correspondence table indicate the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 has different stop controls depending on the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 42 to 48 are shown. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that the combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence table shown in FIGS. 42 to 48, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed, but the circles correspond to the combinations. Even if it is a combination of symbols marked with, it may not be displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially pulled in) is made different according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current gaming state. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, FIGS. 47 and 48 show the correspondence between the type of combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination during the non-flag and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (some combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a "push order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of stop operations (push order) are different. The combination of symbols associated with the "correct answer in push order" in FIG. 47 is a combination of symbols that is advantageous for the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to the "incorrect answer in push order". The attached symbol combination is a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, the correct push order is notified, and as a result, the combination of symbols associated with the "push order correct answer" is displayed. Even in the ART gaming state, the push order that is an incorrect answer may be notified, but the details will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order combination indicates the push order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the end "1st" of the name of the combination means that the correct push order is that the first stop operation is for the reel 3L on the left, and the end "2nd" of the name of the combination is. The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the reel 3C in the middle, and the last "3rd" in the name of the combination means that the correct push order is the reel whose first stop operation is on the right. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end "123" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left, middle, right", and the end "132" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left". , Right, middle ", and the ending" 213 "of the role name means that the correct push order is" middle, left, right ", and the ending" 231 "of the role name. Means that the correct push order is "left, right, middle".

As shown in FIG. 47, the combination “F_chililip” is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 41 of the chili lip (see FIG. 35). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 46 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the replays (see FIG. 35) are shown in FIGS. 41 to 46. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown will be displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 41 to 46, the combination "F_chili lip" cannot display the triple chili lip ("C_ chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01"), and the single chili lip or the double chili lip ("C_ chili lip") cannot be displayed. It can be seen that only "A_01", "C_chililip B_01", and "C_chililip C_01") can be displayed. That is, the role "F_chili lip" is a role in which the triple chili lip cannot be displayed.

Further, the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the chili lip (see FIG. 35) is used. If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, FIGS. 41 to 35 of the replay (see FIG. 35) are shown. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 46 is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 41 to 46, it can be seen that the combinations “F_certain chili lip” and “F_1 certain chili lip” can display triple chili lip. That is, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are roles that can display triple chili lip.

Further, the combinations "F_reach eye rip A" to "F_reach eye rip D" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach eye rip (reach eye rip () If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of FIGS. 35 and 36 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, a replay (FIG. 35) is performed. 35), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the valid line.

In addition, the order of pressing the correct answers in the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip" and the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be arbitrary, but this implementation is carried out. In the embodiment, the push order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is set as the correct push order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination "F_reach eye lip A" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach eye lip is displayed. Will be done.

Further, for the combination "F_maintenance lip A" and "F_maintenance lip B", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replays (see FIG. 35) is an effective line regardless of the pressing order. It is displayed along with. Further, the combinations "F_maintenance rip_1st" to "F_maintenance rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the replay (see FIG. 35). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 35) is displayed. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the valid line.

Further, the combinations "F_RT3 rip_1st" to "F_RT3 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition rip (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the valid line. It is displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_RT4 rip_123" to "F_RT4 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition rip (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the valid line. It is displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 37). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a bell spill (see FIG. 35) or a first roll (see FIGS. 37 and 38) is displayed.

Further, for the combination "F_common bell", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the bells (see FIG. 37) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the combination "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2", any combination of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the cacti (see FIG. 38) is along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Is displayed.

Further, for the combination "weak chili", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the weak cherries (see FIG. 38) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the roles "F_strong chili 1" and "F_strong chili 2", any combination of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the strong cherries (see FIG. 38) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination between the flags and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped (some combinations are omitted), and in particular, BB (“C_BB1”) during the inter-flag state. "C_BB2") is indicated. In "whether or not BB is established" in FIG. 48, "◯" indicates that BB can be displayed, and "x" indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

If the BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination will be displayed. The combination of symbols displayed according to the combination other than the combination related to this bonus is as shown in FIG. 47. For example, in the combination "F_BB1 + F_chililip", the BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_chililip" in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is correct may be displayed, or only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed. You may do it.

For example, since the BB cannot be displayed in the combination "F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st", the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" in FIG. 47 is displayed. It is possible to display only the bell displayed when the push order is correct, and to make it impossible to display the bell spilled stitch or the first roll displayed when the push order is incorrect. Further, in the case of the combination "F_BB1 + F_RT3 rip_1st", only the replay displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition rip displayed when the push order is correct may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, when the combination related to the bonus and one of "missing", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation for the winning role>
In the above, the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped has been described. Next, a data table used when performing various lottery in a general gaming state or an ART gaming state will be described. However, in the following, the winning combination used when referring to the data table is represented by an abbreviation, so that the data table Before the explanation of, the abbreviation of the winning role will be explained. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an abbreviation for the winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the following, the roles "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are called the role "BB", and the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are called the role "push order bell". The role "F_common bell" is called the role "common bell", the roles "F_cactus 1" and "F_cactus 2" are called the role "cactus", the role "F_weak chili" is called the role "weak cherry", and the role "F_strong". "Chilli 1" and "F_strong chili 2" are called the role "strong cherry".

Further, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are called the combination "triple chili lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won, and are called "replay" when the flag conversion lottery is not won. Similarly, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are called the role "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won, and are called "replay" when the flag conversion lottery is not won.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (B). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the roles "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" is independently used as an internal winning role during the RT4 game state. Once determined, a flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

As shown in FIG. 47, for the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "triple chili lip", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip". (For example, push forward to aim at the Chilean pattern). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "replay", and information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is notified (for example). , Notifies the push order other than forward push).

Similarly, for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "reach eye lip", and the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is used. Notify the information to be displayed (for example, push forward to aim at the symbol "white 7"). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "replay", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay". Is notified.

By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed, and a special privilege is given. From the pachislot machine 1, special benefits are given according to the winning of the flag conversion lottery, but from the player's point of view, the special privilege is displayed because the combination of the "triple chili lip" symbols is displayed. You will feel that you have been granted.

In order to enhance the playability of the pachi-slot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state rather than being constant. Since the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) differs depending on the type of internal winning combination, the winning probability of the winning combination is different as a method of changing the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given according to the state. A method is also conceivable (in the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be different depending on whether or not the bonus is activated and the RT gaming state. Therefore, for example, only the RT4 gaming state is used as the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. Instead, a method of providing other gaming states such as RT6 gaming state and RT7 gaming state is also conceivable). However, since the opportunity to make the winning probability of the winning different (the opportunity to shift to the RT gaming state) is limited, this method lacks flexibility.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, the flag conversion lottery and the notification based on the lottery result are performed without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of the combination of the given symbols can be flexibly changed according to the state. That is, in the state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the frequency of appearance of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased, and conversely, in the state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased. Can reduce the frequency of appearance of.

In the following, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" will be referred to as "three consecutive" to win the flag conversion lottery when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination. It may be referred to as "converting to" chili lip "(or simply converting to" triple chili lip "), and when the roles" F_reach eye lip A "to" F_reach eye lip D "are determined as internal winning roles. Winning the flag conversion lottery is called converting the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" to "reach eye lip" (or simply converting to "reach eye lip"). There is.

[Flow of the game during the general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 50, the flow of the game during the general game state will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 shifts from the normal gaming state of the general gaming state to the CZ of the general gaming state, and then shifts from the CZ of the general gaming state to the ART gaming state, thereby changing from the general gaming state (non-ART) to the ART gaming state. (See FIG. 33). FIG. 50A is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the normal game state of the general game state to the CZ of the general game state.

As shown in FIG. 50 (A), the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as a lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states in which the expectation of winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state is different, the low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state wins the CZ lottery. It is easy to do. If the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is won, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ (see FIG. 33).

The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different expectations for winning an ART lottery performed during CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone for always winning an ART lottery, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ that shifts from the normal game state is drawn from these CZ1 to CZ3.

Subsequently, FIG. 50B is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the general gaming state CZ1 and CZ2 to the ART gaming state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half portion and a second half portion. The first half is a period for promoting ranks having different expectations for winning ART lottery during CZ, and the second half is a period for notifying the lottery result of ART lottery based on the rank by battle production.

During CZ1, 6 levels of modes are used as ranks, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ1, the first number of games (for example, 12 games at the maximum) is continued, and the mode promotion lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

In addition, during CZ2, points of 10 levels are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ2, the second number of games (for example, up to 15 games) is continued, and points are promoted by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character A play against each other is performed, and in the latter half of CZ2, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character B play against each other is performed. This battle production continues for the third number of games (for example, up to 4 games), and the victory or defeat is managed based on the result of the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and is not won. If so, the enemy character wins. Further, in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination in each game, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when the so-called rare role is determined as the internal winning role during the battle production, the ART lottery is performed and the result of the battle production is rewritten based on the result.

In CZ1 and CZ2, if the ART is not won, the player is defeated in the battle effect in the latter half, and basically, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state after that. On the other hand, in CZ1 and CZ2, when the ART is won, the battle effect in the latter half is won, and then the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for the ART. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur, and in this case, the gaming state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via during ART preparation).

Subsequently, FIG. 50 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ3 in the general gaming state to the ART gaming state. The CZ3 continues the fourth number of games (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and each game performs an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination. The CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and from the next game, the game state shifts to the CT (additional chance zone) via the ART preparation. Further, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and even in this case, the game state shifts from the next game to CT (additional chance zone) via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the number of the fourth games has elapsed without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for ART. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during general game state]
Subsequently, the data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56.

<Normal medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 51 is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used for the transition lottery of the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is changed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of CZ is also changed at the end of the bonus and the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 51 (A) is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal game state. Further, FIG. 51B is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ at the end of the bonus, and is referred to at the time of setting change, the end of the bonus, or the end of CZ, ART.

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and the winning combination.

In the various data tables shown below, the lottery value information is conceptually shown. In the figure, "0" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0%" is specified, and "extremely low" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0% to less than 1%" is specified. It means that it is specified, "extremely low" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "1% to less than 10%" is specified, and "low" means a lottery probability "10%". It means that the lottery value corresponding to "less than 30%" is specified, and "medium" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "30% to less than 60%" is specified. "High" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "60% to less than 80%" is specified, and "extremely high" means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability "80% to less than 99%". It means that the value is specified, "extremely high" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "99% to less than 100%" is specified, and "confirmed" means the lottery probability " It means that the lottery value corresponding to "100%" is specified.

Then, in the various data tables shown below, the values are extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). The random number value for lottery is sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery value, and the internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Will be.

With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. .. In addition, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it can be seen that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry as the internal winning combination. ..

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery state of the CZ after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 52 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery, and FIG. 52 (A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery based on an internal winning combination during a normal game state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery as to whether or not to pull back the CZ at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A) defines information on lottery values related to winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state is in the high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than in the case of the low probability.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B) defines information on lottery values related to winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won) or at the end of the ART gaming state, the CZ pull-back lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B).

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 53 is a CZ1 medium mode-up lottery table used for the mode-up lottery of CZ1 in the first half of CZ1. The mode-up lottery table in CZ1 defines information on the lottery value for the result of the mode-up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (A) described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the mode increases, and when the mode increases to 6, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result "mode 1 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the lottery result "mode 2 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, if the current mode is "2" and the "mode 2 UP" is won, the mode of CZ1 will increase from "2" to "4". Further, when the lottery result "mode 6UP_freeze occurrence" is won, a freeze occurs, the ART lottery is won, and CT is given.

<CZ2 middle point lottery table>
FIG. 54 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for the CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of the CZ2. The CZ2 middle point lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current points and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (B) described later, in CZ2, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the points increase, and when the points increase to 10, the ART lottery is always won. In addition, "point 2UP" of the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2, for example, in the situation where the current point is "2", if "point 2UP" is won, the point of CZ2 is "2UP". It will go up from "2" to "4". Further, when the lottery result "Point 10UP_freeze occurrence" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
55 and 56 are CZ medium ART lottery tables used for CZ medium ART lottery, and FIG. 55 (A) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. FIG. 55 (B) is an ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ used in the first game of the latter half of CZ2, and FIG. 55 (C) is a CZ used in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2. It is a medium ART lottery table (for CZ1 and CZ2 common latter half battle), and FIG. 55 (D) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

The ART lottery table (for CZ1) in CZ shown in FIG. 55 (A) defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the current mode. Further, the ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ shown in FIG. 55B defines information on the lottery value as to whether or not the ART lottery has been won in association with the current points. With reference to the CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ1) and the CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ2), it can be seen that in CZ1 and CZ2, the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle) shown in FIG. 55 (C) defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. With reference to the CZ medium ART lottery table (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), when the rare role (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning role in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, it is determined. It can be seen that there is a probability of winning the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table (for CZ3) in CZ shown in FIG. 56 (D) defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ3), you can see that if you win the ART lottery during CZ3, you will always win the CT.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 57, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 usually has an ART and a CT as an ART gaming state (see FIG. 33), and the inside of the CT is used as an additional chance zone. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the game is normally performed with the aim of shifting to CT during ART. FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the transition lottery to CT during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lottery normally performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages from level 1 to level 4, and is mainly controlled based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. Then, the ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and ultra-high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during normal ART. Then, the CT lottery state affects the CT lottery performed during the normal ART and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Flag conversion during normal ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the roles "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye" are used during the RT4 gaming state (that is, during the ART gaming state). When any one of "Rip D" is independently determined as an internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, an addition of the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 57B is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the pachi-slot machine 1 normally performs a flag conversion lottery by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state during ART. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given, and a notification for displaying the combination of the "triple chili lip" symbol and the "reach eye lip" symbol (for example, in order). Notification to aim at a predetermined pattern by pressing) is performed. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" (for example, the notification of the push order other than the forward push) is performed. When the player performs the stop operation according to this notification, the combination of symbols according to the notification content, that is, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" and the design of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. The combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed when the flag conversion lottery is not won.

[Data table normally used during ART]
Subsequently, the data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 62.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 58 is an ART flag conversion lottery table that is normally used for the flag conversion lottery during ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, first, the first stage flag conversion lottery is performed, and when the first stage flag conversion lottery is won, After that, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, when the second stage flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are converted into "triple chili lip", and the first stage flag conversion lottery or the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. If it is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as "replay" without being converted into "triple chili lip".

FIG. 58 (A) is an ART medium flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 58 (B) is an ART medium flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery. be. The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 58 (A) defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery of the first stage in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", and for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D". Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 58B defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the second stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. In addition, until the CT is won once in the normal ART, the "first time (until the CT is won once)" column of the item "ART level" is referred to.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), in each of the ART medium flag conversion lottery tables, the random values (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used in the first and second stages. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-step flag conversion lottery can be imitated as a lottery performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) related to ball ejection, which was conventionally performed on the sub side, on the main side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a demand for a mechanism that enables lottery without impairing playability while suppressing the capacity.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, the probability denominator 256 can be drawn in two stages by performing the probability denominator 256, so that the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state for the second stage lottery, it is possible to perform a flag conversion lottery according to the current state as well as the internal winning combination, so that various playability can be achieved. You can do a lottery to convert the flags you have.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 59 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of winning the ART when the transition to the ART gaming state is decided, and during the normal ART. FIG. 59 (A) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level at the time of winning the ART, and FIG. 59 (B) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59 (A) defines information on the lottery value for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 53 or the like), the ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59B defines information on the lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59B defines information on a lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART at the time of CT entry. .. That is, during normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuous games, and the ART level shifts even at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 60 is a normal ART medium-high probability lottery table for drawing a CT lottery state during normal ART. Normally, the ART medium-high probability lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the CT lottery state of the migration destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the normal ART medium and high probability lottery table, you can see the role "Triple Chili Lip" (the role "F_Probability Chilip" and "F_1 Probability Chilip" to win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) "and the role" Reach Eye Lip (role "F_Reach Eye Lip"). In "A" to "F_reach eye lip D", it can be seen that the CT lottery state is likely to shift (fall) to "low probability" in the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning). In the above explanation, if the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it seems that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, which is contrary to the above explanation, but FIG. 61. As will be described later, the roles "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" are always won in the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, the special privilege of CT winning is still given.

<CT lottery table during ART>
FIG. 61 is an ART-based CT lottery table that is normally used for the ART-based CT lottery. The CT lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, if "cactus", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", and "BB" are determined as internal winning roles, the range of probability denominator 256 CT lottery is performed using random values. On the other hand, when other combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as the internal winning combination, CT lottery is performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has "normal CT" and "high-accuracy CT" as CT. The expectation of the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone) differs between "normal CT" and "high accuracy CT", and "high accuracy CT" has a larger number of ART games than "normal CT". Is easy to add (see FIG. 66).

<Normal ART middle lottery table>
FIG. 62 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for an extra lottery to add the number of ART games during the normal ART. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 63. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, CT is performed by playing eight times in one set. During the CT, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the number of games is not subtracted when the additional lottery is won, and the number of games is subtracted only when the additional lottery is not won. Will be done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game in which the number of ART games is not added is played eight times in the same set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B), when the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT (that is, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is won, the flag conversion lottery is won. ), 8 games per set are reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played 7 times in the same set, and if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played once more, the CT will end, but the role "3 consecutive chili lip" If you win, the CT will be reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played eight times. Therefore, the CT becomes easier to continue as the role "triple chili lip" is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 63 (C) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During CT, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the role "triple chili lip". As described above, if the role "triple chili lip" is won during CT, the CT will be reset. Therefore, if the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning role, the CT will be reset. It will be set.

On the other hand, for the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), Table 0 has the lowest probability of being converted into a "reach-eye lip", Table 1 has the next lowest probability of being converted into a "reach-eye lip", and Table 2 has a low probability of being converted into a "reach-eye lip". Is most likely to be converted to a "reach eye lip". If the role "reach eye lip" is won during CT, CT is newly assigned as shown in FIG. 67 described later.

As shown in FIG. 63 (C), in normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in high-probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67.

<Table during CT lottery table>
FIG. 64 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table to be used for the flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The table during CT lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the table used for the flag conversion lottery in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed from now on. The table during CT lottery table is referred to at the start of CT when it is decided to win the CT lottery and shift to CT, and determines the table to be used for the flag conversion lottery during CT.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 65 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CT mid-flag conversion lottery table, it can be seen that during CT, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the combination "triple chili lip".

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 66 is a CT medium addition lottery table used for an additional lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The extra lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that the winning combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 66 is not won in the additional lottery during CT.

In addition, in the additional lottery during normal CT, the number of additional games varies depending on the number of times the winning combination "Triple Chili Lip" is won. Specifically, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won in the same CT is "1 to 8 times", it is easy to determine "10 games" as the number of additional games, and it is easy to determine "10 games" in the same CT. When the number of times the role "3 consecutive chili lip" is won is "9 to 16 times", it is easy to determine "20 games" as the number of additional games, and the number of times the role "3 consecutive chili lip" is won during the same CT. When is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and when the number of times the winning role "3 consecutive chili lip" is won in the same CT is "25 times or more". , It is easy to determine "50 games" as the number of additional games.

More specifically, in the additional lottery table during CT, if the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", the role "triple chili lip" in the figure is used. The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" is "10 games", and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely low" is "20 games". Then, when the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT becomes "9 times or more", the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure becomes " Promote to "20 games". Furthermore, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "17 times or more", it corresponds to the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure. The number of additional games is promoted to "30 games". Similarly, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won "25 times or more" during the same CT, the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure are supported. The number of additional games to be added is promoted to "50 games".

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added to each game is increased according to the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during CT. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the role "triple chili lip" is won, the CT will be reset, so from the player's point of view, the CT It is possible to expect that the amount of addition per time will increase as the number of times continues, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, the number of times that triggers an increase in the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), so that an excessive profit is given to the player. It can be prevented from giving, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Additional lottery table for the number of sets during CT>
FIG. 67 is a lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT, which is used for the lottery for adding the number of sets in which a new CT is given during CT. The lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the lottery for adding the number of sets in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 67, when the role "reach eye lip" is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is given due to the lottery with the number of sets added, the new CT is started again at the timing when the executed CT is completed.

It should be noted that the number of times the above-mentioned combination "triple chili lip" is won is counted only during the same CT, but this "during the same CT" is when the number of sets added during the CT is added to the lottery. The new CT given to the may be included or may not be included.

[Flow of games during bonus state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 68, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described. FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the game shifts to the bonus state during the general gaming state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 68 (B) shows the case where the bonus state shifts to during the normal ART. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game, and FIG. 68 (C) is a figure which shows the flow of the game when it shifts to the bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (C), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type at the time of transition to the bonus state. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after the end of the bonus state, the process shifts to CT via the preparation for ART. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow will be different depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 68 (A), when the game transitions from the general gaming state to the normal BB, an ART lottery is performed during the normal BB based on the internal winning combination. If you win this ART lottery, after the bonus state ends, you will be transferred to the normal ART via the preparation for ART. After winning the ART lottery, the number of ART games will be added to the lottery during the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 68 (B), when the normal ART is changed to the normal BB, a CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery has a 50% chance of winning, and if it wins, it will shift to CT via ART preparation after the bonus state ends, and if it does not win, it will shift to normal ART via ART preparation after the bonus state ends. do. In addition, during the bonus state of transition from normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

With reference to FIG. 68 (C), when the CT shifts to the normal BB or the special BB, the transition to the CT is performed via the preparation for ART after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state of transition from normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus status]
Subsequently, the data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 69 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines the lottery value information for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Additional lottery table for the number of ART games during the bonus>
FIG. 70 is a lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the bonus used for the ART lottery and the lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the bonus state. The lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the bonus defines information on the lottery result of the ART lottery and the lottery value for the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

The lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus will be used for the ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (until the normal BB transitioned from the general gaming state wins the ART lottery). That is, if the number of additional games is determined to be 1 or more (actually, at least 50 games) in the ART non-winning state, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after winning the ART, the lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus is used for the lottery for adding the number of ART games.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 71 is a bonus end CT lottery table used for a CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The CT lottery table at the end of the bonus defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the game state before shifting to the bonus state. With reference to the bonus end CT lottery table shown in FIG. 71, it can be seen that, for example, if a normal BB is performed during a normal ART, there is a 50% chance of winning the CT at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 72, an exceptional game flow during the general game state will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 basically shifts from the normal gaming state to the CZ during the general gaming state, and wins the ART lottery in the CZ to aim for the ART gaming state. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is realized by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 72, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of the displayed symbols. is doing. As shown in FIG. 47, the combination of symbols for shifting the RT gaming state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation of the player, so that even if the notification is not performed. , It may accidentally shift to the RT4 gaming state.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the roles "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" may be determined as the internal winning combination, so that even during the general gaming state (non-ART), It is possible to display the reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state during the general gaming state (non-ART), the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" can be displayed. In such a state, it is possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

More specifically, when the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations during the general gaming state and the RT4 gaming state, a flag conversion lottery is performed and this is performed. When the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is given to display the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip", and the right of ART is granted. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "replay" is performed, and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is controlled so as not to be displayed.

<Non-ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 73 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the general game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by control on the main side]
In the pachislot machine, conventionally, the information of the stop operation (pushing order, etc.) is notified in the ART machine under the control of the sub (sub control board 72) side, but the presence or absence of the notification is the benefit of the player ( In recent years, it has been required to perform notification on the main (main control board 71) side that manages the interests of the player, in order to affect the so-called payout). Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the stop operation information, and the stop operation information is notified under the control of the main side. It is supposed to be.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values of "1" to "11" uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and "1" to "3" indicate the type of the reel that performs the first stop operation, respectively. "1" means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "2" means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and "3". Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

Further, "4" to "9" indicate the push order to be notified, "4" means that the push order is "left, middle, right", and "5" means that the push order is "". "Left, right, middle" means "6" means that the push order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the push order is "middle, right, left". That means that "8" means that the push order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the push order is "right, middle, left".

Further, "10" and "11" are for notifying the role related to the bonus, and "10" means a combination of symbols "C_BB1" consisting of "white 7-white 7-white 7", and "11". Means "C_BB2", which is a combination of symbols consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7".

Here, although the numerical values of "1" to "11" notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, not all players can clearly grasp the contents of the notification. do not have. That is, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be grasped by the player just by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the content of the stop operation is notified on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 controlled by the sub-control board 72, and is notified of stop operation information under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is to be performed on the left reel 3L, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed on the sub side on the left reel 3L of the display unit 100. "1" is displayed above to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the push order "middle, left, right", "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. , "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pushing order is "middle, left, right". When "F_BB1" is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 74 (A), during the preparation for ART, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi" and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. The "bell navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "bell" for the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". Further, the "maintenance lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" for the roles "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd". Further, the "RT3 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_1st" to "F_RT3 transition lip_3rd". Further, the "RT4 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT4 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT4 transition lip_123" to "F_RT4 transition lip_3rd".

The timing of the notification on the main side may be at least during one game in which the notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the start operation is accepted, or the main side may be notified at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the above is received. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side at the timing when the start operation is accepted or when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts. As a result, before the player performs the stop operation, the stop operation information is notified on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display unit 100 on the sub side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), during the ART gaming state, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi" and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. In the ART game state (RT4 game state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", or "replay" symbols based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side, but only on the sub side.

As mentioned above, the combination of the "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" symbols is related to the granting of special benefits, so the presence or absence of notification will affect the player's profit (ball output). Can also be considered. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a special privilege is actually given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of the displayed symbols does not affect the given privilege. That is, if the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the combination of the "replay" symbols is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In that case, even if the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the player's profit (ball output), the sub is not notified on the instruction monitor on the main side. Notification is performed by the display unit 100 only on the side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), notification is performed to aim at a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), when the role "F_BB1" is carried over, "white 7 navigation" is performed, and as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the role "F_BB2" is carried over. If so, perform "Blue 7 Navi". "White 7 Navi" notifies the role "F_BB1" of the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB1", and "Blue 7 Navi" informs the role "F_BB2" of the information of the stop operation. Notify the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB2".

Here, as described above in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the combination related to the bonus and any of "off", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. If so, the combination of BB symbols can be displayed, and if the other combinations are determined as the internal winning combination together with the combination related to the bonus, the combination of BB symbols cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), when the main control board 71 is controlled on the main side, the combination related to the carry-over bonus and the “off”, “F_special combination 1”, and “F_special combination” Only when either "2" or "F_special role 3" is determined as an internal bonus, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" is performed. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing in which the role related to the bonus can be won.

The main control board 71 may perform "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after notifying that the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying the bonus confirmation screen or turning on the bonus confirmation lamp.

As an example, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to perform an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over several games and display a bonus confirmation screen according to the result of this continuous effect. It is commonly done. If "White 7 Navi" or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known on the way, which may spoil the interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after the bonus notification is made. The method of making it possible for the main side to grasp the timing of the bonus announcement is arbitrary.

As one method, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus is announced, and after the number of games is exhausted, "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7" A method of performing "navigation" is conceivable. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games required for the bonus notification, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games since the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination without carrying over the winning combination related to the bonus, and after the counting result reaches the predetermined number of times. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the bonus-related role and any of "Loss", "F_Special Role 1", "F_Special Role 2", and "F_Special Role 3" are determined as internal winning roles. I do.

As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side can be considered. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the bonus-related role as the internal winning combination in a state where the bonus-related role is not carried over, the effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed by the display unit 100 is performed. It is decided and notified to the sub-control board 72. By executing the effect notified by the sub-control board 72 and displaying the bonus confirmation screen, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side.

Of course, the timing when the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive the signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that the main control board 71 can accept. .. For example, since the main control board 71 can accept the signal associated with the stop operation, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed while the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, it is possible to give a bonus notice. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “combination related to bonus””. , Stop operation "other than forward push"), give a bonus notification. Since the trigger of such a bonus notification can also be grasped by the main control board 71, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side.

[Operation description of main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 91, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 by using the program will be described.

<Main operation processing of pachislot by controlling the main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 75 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to the internal lottery table (FIGS. 39 and 40) according to the current gaming state, and draws a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the combination "F_BB1" or "F_BB2" is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 game state flag and sets the game state to the inter-flag game state (S6).

Following the processing of S6, or when it is determined in S5 that the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have not been determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently subjected to the states described later in FIG. 76. Perform game control processing (S7).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the main side navigation control process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets the navigation data according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 74. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop initial setting process described later in FIG. 86 (S9). In this process, the reel stop control information used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various information necessary for the production such as the internal winning combination.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and then the reels are accelerated and controlled. It is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process described later in FIG. 87 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed, respectively. Reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line, according to the combination of the symbols such as the payout of medals and the operation of replay. Give profits. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data of the winning operation command and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the valid line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a BB check process described later in FIG. 88 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the RT check process described later in FIGS. 89 and 90 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls to shift the RT gaming state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the CZ / ART end time processing described later in FIG. 91 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ pullback lottery. When the CZ / ART end processing is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the processing to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the state-specific control process will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the RT4 gaming state (S31). In the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process described later in FIG. 77 (S32).

Following the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). When the player is in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the normal middle start time process (S34), which will be described later in FIG. 78, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ (S35). If it is in CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ middle start time process (S36), which will be described later in FIG. 79, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in normal ART (S37). When the normal ART is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process (S38), which will be described later in FIG. 83, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CT (S39). If it is during CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CT-during start-time process (S40), which will be described later in FIG. 84, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the BB start time process (S42) described later in FIG. 85, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the main CPU 31 is preparing for ART, the main CPU 31 performs processing according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the start of CT (S50). If it is the start of CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the flag conversion table lottery table during CT (FIG. 64) to draw and set the table number used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. (S51).

Following the processing of S51, or when it is not at the start of CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during non-ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set, and if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during normal ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set. , The ART mid-flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the CT mid-flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 65) is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not the winning is won (S54). If the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty chili lip" is treated as the combination "triple chili lip".

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state was accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state in which the notification of the general gaming state (non-ART) is not performed. judge. If the current game state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), then sets the next game to be preparing for ART (S58), and flags. End the conversion process. On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

Further, in S54, if the flag conversion lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 performs the flag maintenance process (S59) and ends the flag conversion process. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the combination "F_1 probability chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 probability chili lip" is treated as the combination "replay".

<Processing at the start during normal operation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the normal middle start process will be described. In the normal middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination with reference to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A) (S61).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62). When the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the CZ of the type won in the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the duration of CZ, and when the CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half). If the CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if the CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

Following the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table of FIG. 51 (A) for internal winning. The transition lottery of the lottery state of the CZ is performed based on the winning combination (S65), the lottery state of the CZ is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal middle start process is terminated.

<Processing at the start during CZ>
Next, the process at the start during CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the CZ middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ1 (S71). If it is in CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing (S72) described later in FIGS. 80 and 81, and ends the CZ intermediate start processing.

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is in CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing (S74) described later in FIGS. 80 and 81, and ends the CZ intermediate start processing. In this embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in the rank (mode or point) in which the expectation of winning the ART lottery is different, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing as the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ3 middle process described later in FIG. 82 (S75), and ends the CZ middle start process.

<Processing during CZ1 (CZ2)>
Next, the processing during CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. In the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). When the main CPU 31 is the first half portion (YES), the process is transferred to S82, and when it is not the first half portion (the second half portion) (NO), the process is transferred to S91 of FIG. 81.

In the case of the first half of the CZ1, the main CPU 31 performs a mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the CZ1 middle mode-up lottery table (FIG. 53) (S82). Similarly, in the case of the first half of the CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 54) and performs a point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or point) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze has been won in the lottery of S82 (S84). If the freeze is successful (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). When a freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S86), and ends CZ1 (CZ2) processing.

On the other hand, if the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (first half) (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 in the next game (S89), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 81, in the case of the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). In the case of the first game in the second half, ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points in the first half with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (B)) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). , Set (S94). Following the processing of S94, or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets "4" in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is won, and "3" is set in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is not won. "Is set.

Following the processing of S95, or if it is not one game in the latter half of S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 serves as an internal winning combination with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIG. 55 (C)). Based on this, an ART lottery is performed (S96), and it is determined whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). And set (S98).

Following the processing of S98, or when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (second half) (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and ends CZ1 (CZ2) processing. .. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ failure time (S103) and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

<Processing during CZ3>
Next, the processing during CZ3 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In the CZ3 middle processing, first, the main CPU 31 performs an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the CZ middle ART lottery table (FIG. 56 (D)) (S121), and has the ART lottery been won? It is determined whether or not (S122).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze has been won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). If the freeze is successful (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process to temporarily stop the progress of the game (S125).

Following the processing of S125, or if the freeze has not been won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S127), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). If the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ3.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S131), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

<Processing at start during normal ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the normal start-time processing during ART will be described. In the normal start processing during ART, the main CPU 31 first adds 1 to the ART continuous game number counter (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter that normally counts the number of games that ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuous game number counter, an ART end game number counter that counts the number of games that can be normally continued by ART is provided. Then, the pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuous game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuous game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, the ART game state is changed. finish.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142) with reference to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61), and whether or not the CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of CT sets, sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S144), and then sets the type that wins the next game. Set the CT (S145).

Following the processing of S145, or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (B)) and counts the number of ART continuous games. The ART level is drawn and set based on the value of (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the CT lottery state of the migration destination based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination with reference to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 60) (S147). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148) with reference to the normal ART middle-addition lottery table (FIG. 62), and determines whether or not the additional lottery has been won. Judgment (S149). If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

Following the processing of S150, or if the additional lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently reaches the value of the ART continuous game number counter to the value of the ART end game number counter. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S151). If the value of the ART continuous game number counter does not reach the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 normally ends the start-time processing during ART.

On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuous game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the ART set number (S152), and then the ART end time is displayed. It is set (S153), and the normal start processing during ART is terminated.

<Processing at the start during CT>
Next, the process at the start during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 84. In the process at the start of CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the extra lottery table during CT (FIG. 66) and performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161), and the extra lottery is performed. It is determined whether or not the winner has been won (S162).

If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the number of times the winning combination “triple chili lip” is won during the same CT, the amount of addition per time increases.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination “triple chili lip” (that is, whether or not it is converted to the combination “triple chili lip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 77) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination “triple chili lip” (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets 8 to the CT game number counter (S165), and ends the CT middle start processing. Further, when the internal winning combination is not the combination "triple chili lip", the (NO) main CPU 31 ends the CT processing at the start.

In S162, when the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the additional lottery table for the number of sets during CT (FIG. 67), and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery for the number of CT sets has been won (S167). If the additional lottery for the number of CT sets is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the process at the start of CT.

On the other hand, if the additional lottery for the number of CT sets is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter. Is determined to be 0 (S170). If the number of CT games counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the process at the start of CT.

When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and ends the process at the start of CT. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends CT, sets a normal ART for the next game (S174), and ends the process at the start during CT.

<Processing at the start during BB>
Next, the process at the start during BB will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the BB middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games (FIG. 70), and performs the lottery for adding the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S182). If the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB middle start process.

On the other hand, when the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the BB middle start process. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185) and ends the BB middle start process.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 86. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the reel stop number based on the internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table, and acquires each information based on the rotation cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires various information associated with the rotation stop number, such as determination data for each pressing order.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of the entire symbol code storage area (excluding the unused area) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control process>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. 87. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. If it is determined that the valid stop button has not been pressed, the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201 (NO).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 has a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (not shown) according to the pressed stop button. (Not shown) and is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and its order. Use to manage the order of stop operations (push order).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

Next, the main CPU 31 executes the sliding piece number determination process (S206). This slip piece number determination process determines the number of slip pieces specified in the stop start position based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected from the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table based on the internal winning combination. It is a process.

Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 33. The generation process is executed (S167). This reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the slip piece number determination data, and stores the stop schedule position in the main RAM 33 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of the predetermined numerical values "0" to "4" defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Is.

Next, the main CPU 31 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes the symbol code storage process (S210). This symbol code storage process acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel.

Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

If it is determined that the pressed stop button has not been released, the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213 (NO). On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button is released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this pull-in priority storage process, the pull-in priority of all the symbols of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check process>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in the bonus state (S221). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a winning determination medal payout process from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 75). The number of medals paid out in is subtracted (S222).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter is less than 0 (S223). If the BB payout counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the BB payout counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently continues. Processing at the end of the bonus is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 game state flag to ON.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus (FIG. 71), performs a CT lottery at the end of the bonus (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery has been won (S226). If the CT lottery is won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets in S227, and 1 is added to the number of ART sets.

Following the processing of S227, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO). S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S229), and performs a BB check process. finish.

On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state in the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of the CZ with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 51 (B)) (S231), and ends the BB check process.

Further, when the bonus state is not in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of BB symbols (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). If the combination of BB symbols is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws and sets the bonus type with reference to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 69) (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs bonus start processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start processing, the main CPU 31 starts the operation of the bonus and performs various processing such as setting the bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the RT5 gaming state is in progress (S241). If the RT5 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if the RT5 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently in the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is (S242).

When the RT0 gaming state is in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S243). If the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if the "bell spilled eye" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines. Subsequently, the RT2 game state flag is set to ON, the RT0 game state is changed to the RT2 game state (S244), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). When the RT1 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S246). When "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT1 game state flag, and shifts from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. (S247), and the RT check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not 20 games have elapsed in the RT1 gaming state (S248). If 20 games have not passed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if 20 games have passed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 game status flag and RT1. The game state is changed to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When the RT2 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" is displayed (S251). If "RT3 migration rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT3 migration rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT3 game state flag is set to on and the RT2 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state (S252), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When the RT3 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (S262). When "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT3 game state flag, and changes from the RT3 game state to the RT2 game. It shifts to the state (S263) and ends the RT check process.

On the other hand, when neither "bell spilled eye" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. (S264). If "RT4 migration rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT4 migration rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT4 game state flag is set to on and the RT3 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state (S265).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 has the number of CT sets. It is determined whether or not is 1 or more (S267).

When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a normal ART in the next game, sets a predetermined value in the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check process. do.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 gaming state (NO) in S261, since it is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip". It is determined whether or not it is (S270). If neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition rip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition rip" is displayed. If it is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT4 game state flag, shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state (S271), and performs the RT check process. finish.

<Processing at the end of CZ / ART>
Subsequently, the CZ / ART end-time processing will be described with reference to FIG. 91. In the CZ / ART end time processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the CZ failure time or the ART end time (S281). If it is neither at the time of CZ failure nor at the end of ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing at the end of CZ / ART, while at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART (YES). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ pull-back lottery (S282) with reference to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 52 (B)), and determines whether or not the pull-back lottery has been won (S283).

When the draw-back lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ of the type won in the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S285), the processing at the end of CZ / ART is terminated.

On the other hand, if the pull-back lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal game state for the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of the CZ with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 51 (B)) (S287), and ends the CZ / ART end time processing.

[Operation description of sub-control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 by using the program will be described.

<Sub-side navigation control processing>
First, the sub-side navigation control process will be described with reference to FIG. 92. In the sub-side navigation control process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the process of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data is included in the received start command data.

When the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub-side navigation data corresponding to the navigation data (S302). With reference to FIG. 74, for example, when the sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data “4”, the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for notifying the push order “left, middle, right” as the sub side navigation data. do. As a result, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

On the other hand, if the navigation data has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to be navigated, for example, when a flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination on the main control board 71. Is determined. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine whether or not navigation is necessary from various information included in the start command data. ..

If it is determined that navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub-side navigation control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub-side navigation data according to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub-side navigation control process. For example, in the sub CPU 81, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination and the flag conversion lottery is won, the navigation data for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip". (For example, navigation data that aims at the chili symbol by pushing forward) is set, and the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol of "replay" Set navigation data for displaying combinations (for example, navigation data indicating a push order other than forward push). As a result, even if the main side does not notify the content of the stop operation, the sub side alone can notify the content of the stop operation.

<Player registration process>
Next, the player registration process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration operation has been accepted (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is accepted on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is accepted on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been accepted. do.

When the registration operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the player registration state (S312). As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. The display screen of 201 is controlled.

On the other hand, if the registration operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration deletion operation has been accepted (S313). For example, when a specific operation is accepted on the registration screen of the first sub-display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration deletion operation has been accepted. If the registration deletion operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 makes it impossible to display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201, and displays the first sub. It controls the display screen of the device 201.

<History management process>
Next, the history management process will be described with reference to FIG. 94. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 acquires game results from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322) and ends the history management process. For example, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, determined as the internal winning combination). Whether or not a role is won) can be grasped. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current gaming state and the transition status of the gaming state from, for example, start command data. From these game results acquired from various command data, the sub CPU 81 has various features such as, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (number of games), the number of CZs, the number of CZ successes, the number of wins for each role, and the probability of winning. It is possible to manage various game histories.

[Switching the display screen of the 1st sub display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a method of switching the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 (A) is an example of transition of the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in a situation where the player registration state is not set, and FIG. 95 (B) shows the player registration state is set. It is a transition example of the display screen of the 1st sub-display device 201 in the situation.

As shown in FIG. 95 (A), in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 81) displays the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu. It is controlled so that transition is possible only between various display screens that can be transitioned from the screen 212 and the menu screen 212. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 has a top screen 211 and a menu screen 212 based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation for a predetermined button or a swipe operation on a display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201a. Switch the display screen between. On the other hand, in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub-control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to be impossible. That is, in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the first sub-display device 201.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95B, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub-control board 72 displays the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. In addition to various display screens that can be transitioned from the menu screen 212, control is possible so that transitions can be made between the game information screens 213, 214, and 215. That is, the sub-control board 72 controls not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, 215 so as to be displayable based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201a. As a result, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the first sub-display device 201.

As shown in FIG. 95B, the transition order of the display screens between the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 is arbitrary. For example, the top screen 211 may be able to directly transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, or the top screen 211 may be transitioned to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only via the menu screen 212. good.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 cannot be directly transitioned from the top screen 211, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be made only via the menu screen 212. It is possible to transition to. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the menu screen 212 can be switched to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 by swiping.

Here, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but display screens provided completely independently of the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information indicating the result of the game that the player has a strong interest in during the game, which is the game history, is obtained from the related information that is not related to the result of the game such as the payout arrangement and the volume control. Display independently. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the situation where the player registration state is set, it is possible to transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 without requiring the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to easily access the information (game history) that the player wants to confirm in the situation where the player registration state is set.

On the other hand, the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 cannot transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 cannot be transitioned unless a swipe operation that is not on the menu display is performed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation for transitioning to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be handled as a hidden command in the situation where the player registration state is set. For the player, his own knowledge of the pachislot machine 1 allows him to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players with little knowledge, so that he can play the game more advantageously than the other players. It can be done, and as a result, it can be expected to actively play the game.

(Display of the top screen from the game information screen)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are manually or automatically transitioned to the top screen 211. Specifically, when the back button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, 215, the display screen is changed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 regardless of the player's operation (automatic transition).

More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, while the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are displayed, the insertion operation (operation of the MAX bet button 11 operation, operation of the 1-bet button, and a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 22). When the closing operation) is performed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211. In a state where there is a high probability that the winning combination for the replay that activates the replay is determined as the internal winning combination (high lip state), such as in the ART gaming state, the medal is automatically activated by the activation of the replay accompanying the replay winning. As a result of being thrown into the high rip state, there is a possibility that the opportunity to display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 is limited. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when medals are automatically inserted due to the operation of the re-game, when the start operation is performed instead of inserting the medals, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are automatically displayed on the top screen. Transition to 211.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the re-game operation is performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 automatically transition to the top screen 211, and the re-game operation is performed. If is not performed, when the input operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 automatically transition to the top screen 211.

(Display of the top screen (or menu screen) from the display screen according to the menu)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various display screens (registration screen, explanation screen, arrangement payout screen, reach eye screen, WEB introduction screen, and volume adjustment screen) that can be changed by the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 can be displayed by the player. The transition to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) is performed manually or automatically. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is changed from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, a top button) is displayed on the various display screens. , Back button) is operated to transition the display screen from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined time elapses while various display screens are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) regardless of the player's operation.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time for transitioning to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is different depending on the type of the display screen currently displayed. For example, the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachi-slot machine 1 may be adjusted to an unintended volume due to an erroneous operation if it is displayed for a long time, and the erroneous operation makes other players uncomfortable. Since there is a risk of this, the screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) in a shorter time than other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than the other display screens in order to facilitate the registration of the player.

That is, various display screens are set with a time for transitioning to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212), and the volume adjustment screen is set with a shorter time than other display screens. A longer time is set on the registration screen than on other display screens.

(Selection function for menu operation availability)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the player shifts from the menu screen 212 to the registration screen, the explanation screen, the arrangement payout screen, the reach screen, the WEB introduction screen, and the volume adjustment screen, so that the player can perform various display screens. You can perform operations and check various information. Here, the functions that can be selected by the player may be restricted according to the settings of the game store.

For example, the game store can make it impossible for the player to adjust the volume by limiting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (for example, the volume button 212g is not displayed on the menu screen 212). ..

[Modified example of the first embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery during normal ART>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when an advantageous state (for example, CT) is won, the next game is immediately shifted to the advantageous state. In a pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control may be performed after a predetermined number of games, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. This predetermined number of games is called a so-called precursory game. In this modification, for example, when a CT lottery is won during a normal ART, a pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursory games instead of performing CT immediately will be described.

As shown in FIG. 96 (A), during normal ART, CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61). If you win this CT lottery, it will shift to a state that is advantageous for the player called CT (additional chance zone), so until you win the CT, various lottery for CT lottery will be performed on the main side (main control board 71). .. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine the internal winning combination, and also serves as the internal winning combination "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip". When any of "D" is determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed using the flag conversion lottery table during ART (FIG. 58).

On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, the CT precursor after winning the CT lottery is the CT based on the role after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the role "triple chili lip" or the role "reach eye lip"). We will not perform lottery to give benefits to players such as lottery. Then, during this CT precursor, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side. For example, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is displayed on the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the information is displayed. , Information for displaying the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed on the display unit 100.

As described above, in recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform lottery that affects the profit (ball output) of the player on the main side, but in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, the lottery of the flag conversion lottery is required. A period (during CT precursor) in which the result does not affect the profit of the player is provided, and the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. This makes it possible to increase the chances of displaying a special combination of symbols called "reach eye lip" in a situation where it is decided to grant the privilege of being in the middle of CT, for example, and the variation of how to show the combination of symbols increases. Therefore, improvement in playability can be expected.

Note that FIG. 96B is a flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor used for the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. When referring to the flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are converted to the role "reach eye lip" with a very high probability during the CT precursor. I understand. As a result, if the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning roles during the CT precursor, the combination of the "reach eye lip" symbols is displayed with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that it is in the midst of a sign. It should be noted that, again, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is performed, but the privilege is not given.

Of course, the flag conversion lottery during the CT precursor may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side during a period that does not affect the player's profit as in this modification, the main side can perform the lottery. It is suitable because it can reduce the data capacity and processing load.

<Another example of the push order for displaying triple chili lip>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, if the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed. If the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed (Fig. 47). Further, it is assumed that the correct push order for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is "forward push".

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the types of combinations of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer are increased. , The order of pushing the correct answer is different for each of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, the correct push order of the combination "F_certain chili lip" is "forward push (first stop operation is the left reel). 3L) ”, and the incorrect push order is“ middle push (first stop operation is middle reel 3C) ”and“ reverse push (first stop operation is right reel 3R) ”. Then, for the role "F_certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when it is pressed forward, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when it is "middle pressed", and "reverse push". When "" is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, the role "F_1 certainty chili lip" has a correct push order of "reverse push" and an incorrect push order of "forward push" and "middle push". And. Then, for the role "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when it is pushed backward, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when it is "middle pressed", and "forward push". When "" is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, when any one of the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, "pushing forward" changes the winning combination. "Triple chili lip" or "double chili lip" is displayed accordingly, and similarly, "triple chili lip" or "double chili lip" is displayed depending on the type of winning combination when "reverse push" is performed. .. On the other hand, if any of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning role, "middle press" is a combination of "replay" symbols regardless of the type of winning role. Is displayed.

By doing so, for example, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) aiming at the chili symbol become possible. Specifically, both "navigation that aims at the chili symbol by pushing forward" and "navigation that aims at the chili symbol by pushing backward" can be performed. In addition, when the role "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning role, "navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for displaying "triple chili lip", and "reverse push". "Navi that aims at the chili pattern" is a navigation that does not display "triple chili lip" (double chili lip is displayed). On the contrary, when the role "F_1 certain chili lip" is decided as the internal winning role, "navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for not displaying "triple chili lip", and "reverse". "Navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing" is a navigation for displaying "triple chili lip" (double chili lip is displayed).

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by a flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side. Is executed.

FIG. 97B is a diagram showing the relationship between the flag conversion lottery on the main side and the navigation on the sub side during normal ART. During normal ART, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-step flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 58). On the sub side, the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and the navigation to be performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery.

Specifically, when the flag conversion lottery of the two stages is not won at the time of the flag conversion lottery of the first stage, the sub-control board 72 performs "replay navigation". In this "replay navigation", the sub-control board 72 notifies the player to press the button in the middle. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed at the time of middle pressing regardless of the combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip".

Further, when the flag conversion lottery of the first stage is won out of the flag conversion lottery of the two stages and the flag conversion lottery of the second stage is not won, the sub-control board 72 performs the "chili lip fan navigation". In this "Chile Lip Fan Navi", the sub-control board 72 notifies that if the role "F_Definite Chile Lip" is an internal winning role, push it backwards to aim at the Chile pattern, and the role "F_1 Definite Chile Lip" is inside. If it is a winning role, it will notify you to aim at the Chilean pattern by pushing forward. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pressed backward and when the combination "F_1 certain chili lip" is pressed forward, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed. Will be.

Further, when the flag conversion lottery of both the first stage and the second stage of the two-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 performs the "chili lip matching navigation". In this "Chile Lip Matching Navi", the sub-control board 72 notifies that if the role "F_Definite Chile Lip" is an internal winning role, push forward to aim at the Chile pattern, and the role "F_1 Definite Chile Lip" is inside. If it is a winning role, it will notify you to aim at the Chilean pattern by pushing it backwards. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pressed forward and when the combination "F_1 certain chili lip" is pressed backward, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed. Will be.

As mentioned above, the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect the profit (although the flag conversion lottery itself affects the profit, the combination of symbols displayed as a result affects the profit. The notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor), but only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this respect, as in this modified example, by performing not only "Chiririp aligned navigation" but also "Chiririp fanning navigation", navigation that does not affect profits can be performed in various ways on the sub side, which is interesting. Is improved.

[Effects of pachislot machines]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Management of duration during CT)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, a CT is provided as an additional chance zone for extending the duration of the normal ART, and the number of ART games is added based on the internal winning combination during the CT. CT is performed by eight games in one set, but if the number of ART games can be added during CT, the number of games is not subtracted, and if the number of games cannot be added, the number of games is subtracted. .. From the player's point of view, it is not possible to know how long the CT will last, and as long as the addition is performed, the CT will not end, so that the interest of the game during the CT can be enhanced.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1, if the addition is performed according to the winning combination "triple chili lip" during CT, the game is reset eight times in one set. As a result, even if the CT is just before the end, the CT will be restarted from the beginning by adding according to the role "triple chili lip", so there is a strong interest in the game during the CT. It is possible to continue the game without getting bored by holding it, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during CT.

In addition, the addition according to the role "triple chili lip" is performed only when the role "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are decided as the internal winning combination, and therefore the addition is performed only when the flag conversion lottery is won. It is possible to prevent an excessive profit from being given to the player, and it is possible to balance the profits of the player and the game store. In the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine 1, the flag conversion lottery for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is always won during CT (see FIG. 65), but the winning probability is only an example. It does not prevent the player and the game store from making appropriate adjustments according to the balance of profits.

(Number of additional games based on the role "Triple Chili Lip" in CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the number of times that the addition based on the role "triple chili lip" is performed during CT exceeds a certain number of times, the number of games to be added per time is increased. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the role "triple chili lip" is won, the CT will be reset, so from the player's point of view, the CT It is possible to expect that the amount of addition per time will increase as the number of times continues, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, the number of times that triggers an increase in the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), so that an excessive profit is given to the player. It can be prevented from giving, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

(Bonus notification performed on the main side)
Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus of "10" (or "11") on the instruction monitor of the information display 14. By displaying, bonus notification is performed on the main side. Here, the pachislot machine usually has a priority of the symbol to be drawn in, and if the winning combination of the bonus and the other winning combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the bonus is determined by the priority. Depending on the combination of symbols, it may or may not be retracted.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination related to the bonus and one of "missing", "F_special role 1", "F_special role 2", and "F_special role 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. In some cases, it is possible to draw in a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus, but if other roles are determined as internal winning roles, draw in a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus. I can't. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the instruction is given only when the combination related to the bonus and one of "missing", "F_special role 1", "F_special role 2", and "F_special role 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. A display of "10" (or "11") is displayed on the monitor. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing in which the role related to the bonus can be won.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even if the bonus-related role and any of "missing", "F_special role 1", "F_special role 2", and "F_special role 3" are determined as internal winning roles, the bonus is related. The instruction monitor does not display "10" (or "11") on the instruction monitor until the predetermined number of games has elapsed since the winning combination was first won, and the instruction monitor is provided on the condition that the predetermined number of games have elapsed. Is displayed as "10" (or "11").

For example, there is a case where a production (so-called continuous production) is performed over a plurality of games triggered by winning a role related to a bonus, and during this continuous production, "10" (or "or" "" is displayed on the instruction monitor. If it is displayed as 11 "), the meaning of the continuous production will be diminished, and there is a possibility that the interest will be spoiled. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the instruction monitor is not performed until the predetermined number of games have elapsed, and the display is performed on the instruction monitor after the predetermined number of games have elapsed. Bonus notification can be performed on the main side without damage.

(Notification performed on the main / sub side and notification performed on the sub side alone)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of types of combinations having different combinations of symbols displayed according to the mode (pushing order) of the stop operation are provided (see FIG. 47), and the symbols to be displayed are provided for these plurality of types of combinations. A combination of granting different benefits depending on the combination of the above and a combination of granting the same privilege even if the combination of displayed symbols is different are included.

For example, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on whether the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed or the combination of "bell spilled eyes" symbols is displayed, and the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. Since the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition lip" is displayed and the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition lip" is displayed, whether or not the transition of the RT gaming state is performed in addition to the operation of the re-game is different. The combination "F_maintenance lip_1st" is a combination that gives different benefits depending on the combination of displayed symbols. On the other hand, in the case where the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip" is displayed and the case where the combination of the symbols of the "replay" is displayed, the replay operation is only performed in both cases, so that the role "F_" "Probability Chili Lip" is a role that grants the same privilege even if the combination of displayed symbols is different (Note that the role "F_Probability Chili Lip" is a role that grants different benefits depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. , The combination of displayed symbols does not affect the benefits granted).

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination of giving different benefits depending on the combination of displayed symbols is notified on both the main and sub sides, but it is the same even if the combination of displayed symbols is different. The combination that grants the privilege of is not notified by the instruction monitor on the main side, but is notified only by the display unit 100 on the sub side. As a result, the notification that affects the privilege can be appropriately performed by the instruction monitor on the main side that manages the privilege, and the notification that does not affect the privilege can be performed by the display unit 100 on the sub side in various ways. ..

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
In addition, since the notification on the sub side at the time of winning the role "F_certain chili lip" is performed based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, the lottery for whether or not to perform the notification (notification lottery) is performed on the main side. It is managed by. That is, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" is won, the privilege to be given differs depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. Therefore, the flag conversion lottery is a lottery that affects the privilege and is strictly managed on the main side.

On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the notification as a directing may be performed completely without affecting the privilege to be given. In such a case, the notification lottery itself as to whether or not the notification is performed. On the sub side. For example, during the CT precursor, the privilege of CT has already been decided, and it is possible to increase the chances of displaying a special combination of symbols called "reach eye lip" (on the contrary, even though the privilege is not granted). If it is displayed, it will give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction, so it cannot be displayed).

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when the role "F_reach eye lip A to D" is won during the CT precursor, a flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side, and a combination of "reach eye lip" symbols is combined based on this lottery result. Notify for display. As a result, in a situation where it is decided to give the privilege of being in the sign of CT, the variation of how to show the combination of symbols increases, so that the playability can be expected to be improved. Further, it is preferable that the data capacity and the processing load on the main side can be reduced by performing the notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the sub side during the period that does not affect the privilege.

(How to display the game history)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100, and various information useful to the player is displayed on the first sub-display device 201. For example, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 has a top screen 211 showing an outline game history, a menu screen 212 capable of performing various operations on the pachi-slot machine 1, and game information screens 213, 214 showing detailed game history. , 215 are displayed. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 registers a player who plays a game and provides a service unique to the player. For example, when the registration of the player is not accepted, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 showing the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the first sub-display device 201, but the registration of the player is accepted. In this case, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 showing the detailed game history are controlled so as to be displayable on the first sub-display device 201. Since confirming a more detailed game history leads to an improvement in the convenience of the player, the pachi-slot machine 1 can improve the convenience when the registration of the player is accepted.

Here, the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, and the sub-control board 72 is the first sub-display device 201 (and) via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). Since the second sub-display device 202) is controlled and the display unit 100 is controlled via the accessory relay board (not shown), the first sub-display device 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100. .. Specifically, the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched even during the game (that is, the effect is being executed by the display unit 100). From the viewpoint of the player, by switching the display of the first sub-display device 201 during the game, various information can be acquired without disturbing the effect being executed by the display unit 100, which is preferable.

In particular, as in the display unit 100 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a flat image display is used. , When performing an effect using a video display with a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) and an effect using a curved image display, the effect of the effect can be significantly enhanced, but the effect such as the game history can be achieved during the effect. Is not suitable for displaying irrelevant information. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, information unrelated to these effects is displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided separately from the display unit 100, so that the effect of the effects is not impaired. Moreover, various information such as game history can be appropriately displayed.

By the way, in general, in a pachi-slot machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side when viewed from the player on the pedestal portion, and a bet button and a start lever are provided on the left side when viewed from the player. The player operates the right side or the left side (side) of the pedestal portion.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 is provided on the side (right side or left side) of the surface standing substantially vertically from the pedestal portion 10, and the first sub-display device 201 is displayed on the screen of the first sub-display device 201. A touch sensor 201a for switching the display of the sub display device 201 is provided. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a first sub-display device 201 and an input device (touch sensor 201a) for controlling the display are provided at a place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the player's operability. Is improved. In particular, since the first sub-display device 201 with the touch sensor 201a is provided on the surface of the pedestal portion 10 that stands upright from the horizontal plane, the player can display the first sub-display while placing his / her hand on the pedestal portion 10. The device 201 can be operated, which not only improves the operability but also reduces the fatigue associated with the operation, so that the operating rate can be expected to be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 109. The same configuration and control as the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will not be described in detail.

[Game flow of the pachi-slot machine of the second embodiment]
First, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Comparing the transition flow of the gaming state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 98 and the transition flow of the gaming state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33, the first embodiment and the second embodiment are basically the same. The game is played in the same flow, but the game is played in a different flow during the ART game state. That is, the control of CT during the ART gaming state is significantly different between the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a CT lottery is normally performed during ART based on an internal winning combination, and when the CT lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to CT. On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the CT is set between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. The MB (combination "F_MB") is a continuous differential device related to a so-called second-class special accessory. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 has an MB as an internal winning combination. Once determined, it is carried over as an internal winning combination over multiple games until the corresponding symbol combination (combination "C_MB") is displayed along the valid line.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the MB non-flags in the ART gaming state are set as normal ARTs, and CT is performed between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between the MB flags when (H) the MB is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART. During the ART gaming state, the game is played so that the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed between the MB flags, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. It should be noted that a method of playing a game so that the combination of symbols corresponding to MB is not displayed between the MB flags is already well known, for example, aiming at a symbol in which the combination of symbols corresponding to MB is not displayed. This can be achieved by notifying and notifying the push order in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is not displayed.

On the other hand, when the CT is completed, the winning of the MB is prompted (notified), and (I) when the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. After that, when the end condition of (J) MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the MB gaming state to the MB non-flag, and normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed during the MB flag>
Since the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, stop control different from that during the MB non-flag can be performed. For example, if the predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flag and the non-flagging, the internal winning combination is "MB + predetermined small winning combination" because the MB is carried over during the MB flag. Although it is a "role", the internal winning role is only a "predetermined small role" because the MB is not carried over during the MB non-flag. In the pachi-slot machine, stop control is performed based on the internal winning combination, so even if the same predetermined small combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, different stop control is performed. Stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small combination can be different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, it is difficult (or impossible to display) to display during normal ART (during MB non-flag) by making the stop control different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag. By displaying the combination of symbols during CT (between the MB flags), various playability is realized. Hereinafter, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be specifically described while paying attention to the difference from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the relationship between the internal winning combination and the combination of the displayed symbols in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. Since the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment have different types of roles and combinations of symbols, this point will be described first.

(Type of combination used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles "R_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 continuous chili lip 4" are used instead of these roles.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" are used instead of these combinations. In the following, the combinations “F_pushing order bell 1” to “F_pushing order bell 6” may be simply referred to as “pushing order bell”. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a combination (role "F_MB") related to MB that the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have is used. The other roles may be common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, or may be different from each other, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

(Types of symbol combinations used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes", and "first piece" is used as a combination of symbols corresponding to the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". I was using it. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6", in addition to the combination of these symbols, "MB" Use a combination of "cactus" symbols. The combination of "MB" symbols may be arbitrary. Further, the combination of the "cactus" symbols may be the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals to be paid out when displayed is the same as the combination of the "bell" symbols (9). Sheet).

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol during MB non-flag>
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination and the combination of displayed symbols during the MB non-flag. As shown in FIG. 99, the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and the pressing order is ". In the case of "forward push", the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed along the valid line. On the other hand, when the push order is other than "forward push", the combination of "chili lip" symbols is displayed along the valid line in the correct push order, and the "replay" symbol combination is displayed in the incorrect push order. Is displayed.

More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "single chili lip" is displayed, and each of them is displayed. In the case of incorrect answer push order for each role, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. In addition, in the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed, and for each role. In the case of incorrect answer push order, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. In addition, in the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip" is displayed, and for each role. In the case of incorrect answer push order, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed.

In addition, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" are different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flag, and the correct answer is for each combination. In the case of push order, the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed, and in the case of incorrect push order for each role, the combination of "bell spilled eyes" or "first piece" symbols is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination and the stopped symbol during the MB flag>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination among the MB flags and the combination of displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 100, in the space between the MB flags, the combinations of the symbols of "chili lip" are displayed along the effective line for the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when any of the combination "F_MB" and the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, "chili lip" is always used. The combination of symbols is displayed along the valid line.

More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "single chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order, and the combination "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" is displayed. -In "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order, and in the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", the combination is related to the pressing order. The combination of the symbols of "Triple Chili Lip" is displayed along the effective line.

Comparing FIGS. 99 and 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flag. While the combination is different, it does not affect the combination of symbols whose push order is displayed during the MB flag.

Further, among the MB flags, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and are determined for each combination. The combination of "bell", "bell spilled or first piece", "cactus", and "MB" is displayed according to the pressing order. Comparing FIGS. 99 and 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more kinds of symbol combinations are displayed during the MB flag than during the MB non-flag when the winning combination “pushing order bell” is won. be able to. Specifically, the combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes or the first piece" is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flags, while it is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB flags. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" and the roles "F_push order bell 1" to "F_push order bell 6" during the MB flag are used. The stop control for the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" and the stop control for the combination "F_push order bell 1" to "F_push order bell 6" are different.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the normal ART of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations of the symbols displayed in the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are different depending on the pressing order. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during normal ART, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and when this flag conversion lottery is won, "chili lip" is performed. Not only the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of is performed, but also the number of ART games is added. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is performed without adding the number of ART games.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the additional amount of the number of ART games when the flag conversion lottery is won is determined based on the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", the smallest additional amount is determined and the combination is obtained. Determine the next smallest additional amount in the case of "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", and determine the largest additional amount in the case of the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". do. As described above, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is given to display the combination of the "Chile Lip" symbols. Therefore, for the player, the more Chile symbols are displayed, the larger the amount to be added. Become.

[Data table during normal ART]
Subsequently, the data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. The data tables shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 101 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information controlled in the same manner as in the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, whether the main control board 71 converts the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" into the combination "chili lip" by using the flag conversion lottery table during ART. Whether or not to draw (flag conversion lottery). Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the correct pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the winning order. The sub-control board 72 notifies the wrong answer pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100.

<Normal ART middle lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 102 is an additional lottery table during the normal ART used for the additional lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the additional lottery is performed using the additional lottery table during the normal ART, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding lottery is performed. Add the number of additional games (add to the ART end game number counter). In addition, the lottery value information associated with the winning combination "single chili lip" in the figure is "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4" in which the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the role. The lottery value information associated with the winning combination "double chili lip" is referred to in the case, and the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the role "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". The lottery value information that is referred to in some cases and is associated with the winning combination "triple chili lip" is that the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the role "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". Referenced when is.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 103, the flow of the game during the CT of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the management method of the duration of CT. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of CT by playing eight times in one set, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 is used. The control board 71 has a CT duration based on the number of medals paid out during CT (more specifically, the so-called "difference number" obtained by subtracting "the number of medals used for the game" from "the number of medals paid out"). To manage.

Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the CT when the difference number of sheets in the CT reaches the end number (50 sheets) (for example, the notification for winning the MB when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won is performed. ). Here, when the combination of the "bell" and "cactus" symbols is displayed, nine medals are paid out, so when the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT). (If the flag conversion lottery is not won), the difference number (6 sheets) for which the duration of CT has increased is consumed. On the other hand, when the combination of the "cactus" symbols is displayed during CT (more specifically, when the flag conversion lottery is won during CT), the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has Maintain the duration of CT.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. When this flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "cactus" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the push order.

Then, when the combination of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus" is displayed, the main control board 71 increases the number of difference sheets by 6, and the duration of CT is exhausted, but the flag conversion lottery is won. If so, the main control board 71 adds 6 to not only the difference number but also the end number of CT. As a result, although the difference in the number of sheets during CT increased by 6 due to the display of the combination of "cactus" symbols, the number of sheets at the end of CT also increased by 6, so if the flag conversion lottery is won, CT The duration of will be maintained.

The flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a plurality of stages of CT meters from "1" to "MAX" are provided, and the lower the CT meter, the more the flag conversion lottery is won. The probability is low, and the higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

This CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the main control board 71 is the lowest when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. If the CT meter is promoted with a probability and the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, the CT meter is promoted with the next lowest probability and the role is used during CT. When "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning combinations, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

Further, if the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning combination "pushing order bell" during CT, the CT meter is demoted. In the case where the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability, or may be demoted without fail.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT, the number of ART games is added. The amount of additional ART games varies depending on the number of displayed dust symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the main control board 71 is used during CT to serve as "F_single chili lip 1". "-" F_single chili lip 4 "is determined as the internal winning combination, the smallest additional amount is determined, and the combination" F_2 consecutive chili lip 1 "to" F_2 consecutive chili lip 4 "is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. And the next smallest additional amount is determined, and when the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT, the largest additional amount is determined.

[Data table during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 106 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 104 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the CT of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the combinations “F_pushing order bell 1” to “F_pushing order bell 6” into “cactus” by using the ART middle flag conversion lottery table. Whether or not it is drawn (flag conversion lottery). Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "cactus" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the push order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are combined with the "bell" symbol for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notifies the pressing order for displaying.

Here, referring to FIG. 104, it can be seen that the higher the value of the CT meter, the easier it is to win the flag conversion lottery during CT, and when the CT meter is "MAX", the flag conversion lottery is always won. You can see that. If the flag conversion lottery is won, the duration of CT is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is "MAX", CT continues without ending. If the CT is not completed, the profit given to the player will be excessive. Therefore, when the CT meter becomes "MAX", the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing, and the upper limit of the number of completed sheets may be used. It may be provided, or both the demotion of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets may be applied.

When demoting a CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", it will spoil the interest of the player. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter reaches "MAX". Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages from "1" to "MAX", for example, the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been performed since the CT meter became "MAX". Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery has been performed eight times after the CT meter has reached "MAX". Further, the value of the CT meter after demotion is arbitrary, and may be demoted to, for example, the CT meter "1", may be demoted to the CT meter "7", or may be demoted to the CT meter "1". The value of the demoted destination may be determined by lottery from among "7".

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 105 is a CT meter promotion lottery table during CT used for a CT meter promotion lottery performed during CT of the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the promotion lottery of the CT meter in association with the current CT meter value and the internal winning combination.

Referring to FIG. 105, the probability of winning the promotion lottery of the CT meter is the lowest for the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", and the combination "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". It can be seen that the next lowest is the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at one time.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
Subsequently, FIG. 106 is a CT medium addition lottery table used for the additional lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the CT of the second embodiment. The extra lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery using the additional lottery table during CT, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding number of additional games is added (ART end). Add to the game counter).

Referring to FIG. 106, the additional amount of the number of ART games during CT is the smallest for the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", and the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". It can be seen that the number is the next lowest, and the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are the most. More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4" in which one chili symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 games or more is added, and two chili symbols are displayed. In "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", the number of ART games of 20 games or more is added, and in the role "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" in which three chili symbols are displayed, The number of ART games of 30 games or more will be added. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of Chilean symbols displayed during CT.

[Flow of games in CZ]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 107, the flow of the game in the CZ of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has CZs 1, 2, and 3 as CZs as in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of the CZ 3 is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of the CZ 1 and 2 is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. different.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, CZ1 and 2 are divided into a first half part and a second half part, and ranks (modes and points) having different expectations for winning an ART lottery are promoted in the first half part. In the latter half, the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by the battle effect (see FIG. 50). As shown in FIG. 107, the basic flow in such CZ1 and 2 is the same in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the termination condition of the first half. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of CZ1 and 2 is terminated based on the number of continuous games, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ1 is the first half based on the number of continuous games. The part is terminated, but CZ2 ends the first half based on the result of the end lottery. Further, both CZ1 and 2 perform a lock lottery in the first half portion, and even if the lock lottery is won, the first half portion of the CZ1 and 2 is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery for each game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 53), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the first half of the CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. This lock lottery is a process of drawing whether or not to perform a game lock based on the internal winning combination. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the first half of the CZ1 is terminated and the game is locked (for example, the rotation start is delayed at the start of reel rotation). On the other hand, in the case where the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of the CZ1 and continues the first half of the CZ1 until the first half of the CZ1 has passed 15 games.

Then, when the first half of the CZ1 has passed 15 games or won the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ1 and shifts to the second half. In the latter half of the CZ1, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (C)), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Be sure to win the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts to the normal gaming state, and if the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART gaming state via ART preparation. ..

On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery every game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 54), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the main control board 71 performs an end lottery for each game in the first half of the CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of the CZ1 is terminated and the second half is transferred to the end lottery. In the case of winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

Further, in the first half of the CZ2, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the first half of the CZ2 is terminated and the game is locked. On the other hand, in the case where the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of the CZ2, but continues the first half of the CZ2 until the end lottery is won.

Then, when the main control board 71 wins the end lottery or the lock lottery, it ends the first half of the CZ2 and shifts to the second half. In the latter half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55 (B) and 55 (C)), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Be sure to win the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts to the normal gaming state, and if the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART gaming state via ART preparation. ..

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the lock lottery is performed for each game in the first half of the CZ1 and 2. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the end condition of the first half of the CZ2 is not the number of continuous games but the end lottery.

[Data table in CZ]
Subsequently, the data table used in the CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. The data tables shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 108 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Referring to FIG. 108, in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination “replay” is determined as the internal winning combination, the ending lottery is performed, and the ending lottery may be won with a high probability. I understand. Since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, the combination "replay" is any one of the combination "F_maintenance lip A" to "F_RT4 lip_3rd". In the pachi-slot machine, the replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined value (about 1 / 7.3) or more. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ 2 may end. It turns out that it happens relatively frequently.

<Lock lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 109 is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and 2 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 109 (A) is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. FIG. 109 (B) is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2. The lock lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Comparing FIGS. 109 (A) and 109 (B), it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 has a higher probability of winning than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) has elapsed, while the first half of the CZ2 ends when the end lottery is won. Further, a rank-up lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1 and 2, and when the first half of the CZ1 and 2 is completed, an ART lottery is performed based on the result of the rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which the timing of ART lottery is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which the timing of ART lottery is indefinite.

In addition, since the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination with a relatively high probability, the rank-up lottery is performed during CZ2 compared to during CZ1. It is easy to receive less chance. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the lock lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1 and 2, and the probability of winning the lock lottery is higher in the CZ2 than in the CZ1. As a result, even CZ2, which tends to have less chance of receiving a rank-up lottery, can be expected to move to ART.

[Modified example of the second embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when the transition between the MB flags is normally performed during ART, the transition to the CT is immediately performed from the next game, but the transition between the MB flags is performed. After that, a predetermined number of precursor games may be inserted.

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), when the MB is normally determined as an internal winning combination during ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from between the MB non-flags to the MB flags. During normal ART (during MB non-flag), the number of ART games will be added if the role "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is won in the flag conversion lottery (see Fig. 102). The flag conversion lottery until the transition between the MB flags is performed is performed on the main side (main control board 71) because it affects the privilege given to the player.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is always displayed regardless of the pressing order between the MB flags. From the stop control (combination of displayed symbols), the player may know that the precursory game is in progress. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is not displayed by pressing forward when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is won. , When the combination of the symbols of "Chilip" is displayed by pressing forward, the player knows that it is during the MB flag (during the precursory game).

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the push order is intentionally notified. As described above, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is displayed regardless of the pressing order. However, when the push order is notified, the player recognizes that the combination of the "chili lip" symbols is displayed by the notified push order, and the player is in the middle of the MB flags. It can be difficult to grasp.

Since such notification of the push order has no effect on the profit of the player, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, a lottery (notification) as to whether or not to notify the push order during the MB flag is drawn. Lottery) is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, the notification lottery between the MB flags may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery that does not affect the player's profit at all as in this modification, the data capacity on the main side is performed. It is suitable because it can reduce the processing load.

FIG. 110B is a notification lottery table in the CT precursor used for the notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge board 82. The notification lottery table in the CT precursor defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table in the CT precursor is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies an arbitrary push order other than the forward push via the display unit 100.

<Navigation at the time of pushing order bell between MB flags>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won during the MB flag, more kinds of symbol combinations are displayed than during the MB non-flag. Specifically, while the MB non-flags are displayed, the combination of "bell" and "bell spilled eyes or the first piece" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flags, "bell" is displayed according to the pressing order. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the pressing order necessary for displaying the combination of "cactus" symbols that can be displayed only between the MB flags is notified during the CT between the MB flags. ..

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won during the MB flag, the notification content is changed according to the state until the start of the MB.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when MB is normally determined as an internal winning combination during ART, the gaming state shifts between the MB flags, and then CT is performed. In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursor games after shifting between the MB flags, the states during the MB flags are divided into a “precursor game” state, a “CT” state, and a “MB waiting” state. be able to.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, when the MB is hit during the normal ART, the "precursor game" state is set between the MB flags, and then a predetermined number of premonition games are performed and the CT is started. It will be in the "CT" state during the MB flag, and then, when the CT is completed, it will be in the "MB waiting" state until the MB wins.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, the notification content at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is different depending on the state between these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, in the "precursor game" state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the push order. Further, in the "CT" state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the push order in which the combination of the "bell" or "cactus" symbols is displayed via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. That is, in the "CT" state, the push order corresponding to either the "bell" or the "cactus" is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

In the "MB standby" state after the CT is completed, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the arbitrary combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the push order in which the combination of the “bell” symbols is displayed, or the push order in which the combination of the “cactus” symbols is displayed. It may be notified, or it may be notified of the push order in which the combination of the symbols of "MB" is displayed.

On the other hand, since the combination of the "cactus" symbols cannot be displayed during normal ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed.

[Effect of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
The second embodiment of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between the MB flags)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more kinds of symbol combinations can be displayed during the MB flag than during the MB non-flag when the winning combination “pushing order bell” is won. Specifically, the combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes or the first piece" is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flags, while it is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB flags. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the MB flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the MB flags. Specifically, it is now possible to display a combination of "cactus" symbols corresponding to the so-called rare role between the MB flags, and the appearance frequency of the rare role without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability. Can be enhanced. In particular, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is changed, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of the rare combination with the payout of medals.

If the combination of "cactus" symbols is continuously displayed between the MB flags, it will be known that the combinations are between the MB flags. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of the "cactus" symbols is notified only when the flag conversion lottery is won, and the combination of the "bell" symbols is notified in the case of non-winning. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state, which is preferable. In addition, by controlling the notification content by the flag conversion lottery, the frequency of the symbol combination (rare role) of the "cactus" between the MB flags can be adjusted, and the playability between the MB flags can be diversified. Can be done.

(Playability during CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT, which is an additional chance zone for adding the number of ART games, is performed between the MB flags. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is continuously performed until the difference number reaches the end number (50 sheets) between the MB flags. During this CT, if you do not win the flag conversion lottery when you win the role "push order bell", the difference number will increase and the duration of CT will be exhausted, while if you win the flag conversion lottery, the number of ends will increase as the difference number increases. Increases and the duration of CT is maintained. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, while changing the stop control during the MB flag, the CT is continued according to the combination of the displayed symbols (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery). Since the period can be controlled, the playability between the MB flags can be diversified.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, the duration of CT is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. Can be done. In addition, this CT meter will be promoted when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, and will be demoted if the winning combination between flags is not won during CT. The player will be strongly interested in the result of the game during CT, and the game playability between the MB flags can be diversified.

In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to "MAX", the flag conversion lottery will always be won for a predetermined period of time, so that expectations can be expected for subsequent games, and the interest of the game is high. Is improved.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags and MB non-flags)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, not only the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is different between the MB flag interval and the MB non-flag interval, but also the combination "F_single chili lip". The combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning "1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is also different. That is, while the MB non-flags are displayed, the combination of "replay" or "chili lip" symbols is displayed depending on the pressing order, while the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed during the MB flags. Only the combination of "Chili Lip" symbols is displayed without.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flag conversion lottery is performed both between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags. The flag conversion lottery between the MB flags is to draw the target to be notified at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" from the combination of "bell" or "cactus" symbols, and also during the MB non-flags. The flag conversion lottery is to draw the target to be notified at the time of winning the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip" from the combination of "replay" or "chili lip" symbols. By performing the flag conversion lottery both between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags in this way, it is possible to control the combination of the displayed symbols both between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags. It is possible to enhance the playability of both flags and non-flags.

At this time, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery between the MB flags is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery between the MB non-flags is adjusted based on the ART level and the lottery state. The flag. As a result, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the playability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between the MB flags and the MB non-flags, it may be known from the combination of the displayed symbols that the MB flags are in the middle. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the originally unnecessary push order is intentionally notified during the MB flags, and it is difficult to grasp that the MB flags are in the middle. Then, by managing the notification of the push order on the sub side, the data capacity and the processing load on the main side can be reduced.

[Modification example]
Although the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this.

(Bell Navi between flags and Bell Navi between non-flags)
For example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the main side is notified by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor. Since the mode of notification on the main side is basically the same in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, an example thereof is shown in FIG. 74 of the first embodiment. Here, in FIG. 74, while "white 7 navigation" and "blue 7 navigation" are performed during the flag-to-flag state, "bell navigation" and the like are not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the flag-to-flag state is not performed. It may be possible to perform "bell navigation" or the like during the state.

In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the flag-to-flag state and the non-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 74 (A) and 74 (B), when performing "bell navigation" in the non-flag state, numerical values "1" to "3" (pushing order second instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. ) Is displayed, while as shown in FIG. 112, when performing "bell navigation" in the state between flags, the numerical values "12" to "14" (pushing order first instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. May be. The navigation on the sub side performed via the display unit 100 may be common to both the flag-to-flag state and the non-flag-to-flag state. The same applies to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the numerical value when "Bell Navi" is performed during the MB non-flag and the numerical value when "Bell Navi" is performed during the MB flag are different. May be.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to give a privilege based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, the combination of symbols displayed when the notification-following stop operation is performed is displayed. It will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give a privilege based on the combination of the actually displayed symbols.

In this case, the main control board 71 grants a privilege based on the combination of symbols displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and is based on the combination of symbols displayed without following the notification. It may be decided not to give the privilege. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the combination of the symbols displayed is different depending on the pressing order, so that when the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation, the player performs the stop operation. There is a possibility that a special combination of symbols such as "triple chili lip" will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is given only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of following the notification without granting the privilege. It may be that.

(Control of notification that does not affect profits (privileges))
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification that affects the profit is performed by the notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the main side, and whether or not the notification is performed on the main side is controlled. For notifications that do not affect profits, the sub side performs a notification lottery, and the sub side controls whether or not to perform notifications. As an example of the notification that does not affect the profit, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment shows the notification of the "reach eye lip" during the precursory game, and the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment shows the notification. It shows the notification of "chili lip" during the MB flag. In this respect, notifications that do not affect profits are not limited to these.

In recent pachislot machines, the game may be changed to a state in which it is easy (difficult) to lock the game according to the order of stop operations. For example, transitioning to a state where it is easy to lock the game when the push order is "left, middle, right", and transitioning to a state where it is difficult to lock the game when the push order is "right, middle, left". There is. In such a pachislot machine, by notifying the push order, it is possible to shift to a state in which it is easy (difficult) to lock the game, but if whether or not to lock the game affects the profit. While it is necessary to control this notification on the main side, if whether or not to lock the game does not affect the profit, this notification may be controlled on the sub side.

In addition, the case where whether or not to perform the game lock affects the profit is, for example, the case where the game lock is performed as in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the ART lottery is won. Yes (see Figure 107). On the other hand, the case where whether or not to perform the game lock does not affect the profit is the case where the game lock is performed as a production, for example, during a precursory game in which it is decided to give a profit (privilege). By making the game lock frequently, it is shown in a dramatic manner that profits will be given in the subsequent games.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the push order and the locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left, middle, right" when the winning combination "F_maintenance lip A" is won, the lock state changes from "0" to "1". , "Left, right, middle" "middle, left, right" "middle, right, left" When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order, the current locked state is maintained, "right, left, middle" "right" When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of ", middle, left", the locked state changes from "1" to "0". Similarly, the same applies when the winning combination "F_maintenance lip B" is won, and when the stop operation is performed in the first pressing order, the lock state changes from "0" to "1", and in the second pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, the locked state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third pressing order, the locked state changes from "1" to "0".

In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), in order to simplify the explanation, the lock state "0" is set to a state in which it is difficult to lock the game, and the locked state "1" is set to a state in which the game is easy to lock. Of course, the locked state is not limited to two stages, and may be a number of stages of three or more stages, and in the case of three or more stages, the transition may be performed in multiple stages at once instead of transitioning one stage at a time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), when the game lock affects the profit, a lottery for notifying whether or not to perform the notification is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, and the lottery result is used. Based on this, both the main side and the sub side notify the predetermined push order. On the other hand, if the game lock does not affect the profit, a lottery for notifying whether or not to perform the notification is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side, and a predetermined push order is performed on the sub side based on the lottery result. Is notified.

Depending on the pachislot machine, there are pachislot machines in which the game lock affects the profit for the entire period of the game, and there are pachislot machines in which the game lock does not affect the profit for the entire game period. In some pachislot machines, the game lock affects the profit for a predetermined period, while the game lock does not affect the profit for a specific period of the game. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, a lottery for notifying whether or not to perform the notification is performed on the main side, and a predetermined push is performed on both the main side and the sub side based on the lottery result. While notifying the order, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, a lottery for notifying whether or not to perform the notification is performed on the sub side, and the sub side notifies the predetermined push order based on the lottery result. May be.

Since the game lock is normally performed by the main control board 71, the main control board 71 has a function of transitioning to the locked state according to the push order shown in FIG. 113 (A). That is, the main control board 71 draws a lottery whether or not to lock the game with a probability according to the lock state setting means for setting the lock state based on the order of the detected stop operations and the lock state set by the lock state setting means. When it is determined that the game lock determination means determines the game lock and the game lock determination means performs the game lock, the game lock determination means functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. Then, the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 is a notification lottery means for notifying whether or not to notify the push order in which the lock state setting means sets the lock state in which the game lock is easy (difficult). , And functions as a notification means for notifying a predetermined push order based on the lottery result of the notification lottery means.

(Usually ART and CT end conditions)
Normally, the termination conditions for ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during normal ART or CT, the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified during normal ART or CT, and the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games). ) Can be set as one set, and any end condition such as the number of sets and the continuation rate at the end of one set can be adopted.

Further, as the number of medals given during normal ART or CT, for example, the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used for the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game is used. May be. Further, the number of medals given during normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on the actual value), and the notification may be made regardless of whether or not the number has actually increased. It may be calculated based on the number of medals to be increased according to the above (calculation based on the ideal value). In addition, the number of medals awarded may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, for some of the winning combinations that have a low probability of being determined as the internal winning combination, or for the winning combination in which the display / non-display of the combination of symbols is switched according to the timing of the stop operation, the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. However, the number of medals awarded may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (pushing order, timing))
Further, the content of the notification normally performed during ART or CT is also arbitrary, and the order of the stop operation (pushing order) in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified, and the combination of the symbols may be notified. It may be possible to notify the timing of the stop operation (design to be aimed at) necessary for displaying.

(others)
In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game is not changed (or changed within a range that does not affect the game playability), and the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. The so-called "AT" may be used, and the replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is high is activated, and the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed. The so-called "ART" that informs the aspect may be used.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine 1, various display screens are displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10 (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various display screens may be displayed on the second sub-display device 202 provided on the right side (medal insertion slot 22 side) of the pedestal portion 10. Similarly, a touch sensor may be provided on the display surface of the second sub-display device 202, and the display screen of the second sub-display device 202 may be switched based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor.

(White 7 (blue 7) navigation and bell navigation between the flags)
In the above embodiment, during the inter-flag state, one of the bonus-related combination (“F_BB1” and “F_BB2”) and “missing”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” is used as the internal winning combination. When it is decided, the BB ("C_BB1" and "C_BB2") is controlled so as to be displayable, and when the combination related to the bonus and other roles such as the push order combination are determined as the internal winning combination, The BB is controlled so that it cannot be displayed (see FIG. 48). Such control is performed based on the attraction priority of a plurality of combinations, and in the above embodiment, the attraction priority is higher than the combination related to the bonus and the push order combination and the like, as described above. Such stop control is performed.

By the way, depending on the pachi-slot machine, it is also possible to perform stop control in which the role related to the bonus is prioritized and the role related to the bonus is pulled in higher than the role related to the payout of medals such as the push order role. be. Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115, the white 7 or blue 7 navigator and the bell navigator in the pachislot machine that draws in the winning combination related to the bonus in preference to the winning combination related to the payout of medals (for example, the pushing order combination). I will explain the relationship with.

In the following, the white 7 navigation will be described as an example, and the description of the blue 7 navigation will be omitted, but the blue 7 navigation will have the same relationship as the white 7. Further, in the above embodiment, a three-choice push order combination (“F_3 choice bell_1st” or the like) is used as the push order combination, but in the example shown below, six choices are used in order to clarify the explanation. The push order combination ("F_6 choice bell_123") will be used. In this case, as described above, the end of the name of the combination in the 6-choice push order combination means the correct push order.

FIG. 114 (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped (some combinations are omitted), and corresponds to FIG. 48 of the above embodiment. It is a figure to do. FIG. 114A shows, in particular, whether or not BB (“C_BB1”) can be displayed during the inter-flag state. In the example shown in FIG. 114 (A), during the inter-flag state, not only the combination related to the bonus and the “missing” are determined as the internal winning combination, but also the combination related to the bonus and the push order combination (“F_6”). BB can be displayed even when "selection bell_123" to "F_6 selection bell_321") are determined as internal bonuses.

Subsequently, FIG. 114 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (some combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control differs depending on the timing of the stop operation (so-called "pushing") and the order of the stop operation (so-called "pushing order"). When the combination related to the above is preferentially drawn in, the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 114 (B) is displayed.

Specifically, when the bonus-related role ("F_BB1") and the push order role ("F_6 choice bell_123" to "F_6 choice bell_321") are determined as internal winning roles, the push is accurate. In some cases, the winning combination related to the bonus is drawn in with priority over the pushing order combination, so that the BB can be displayed regardless of the pushing order. On the other hand, if the push order is not accurate, the combination of symbols displayed depends on the push order, and if the push order is correct, the bell (“C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04”) symbols. If the combination of the bells ("R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition B_02") is displayed and the push order is incorrect, the combination of the symbols or the first one ("C_1st_A_01" to The combination of the symbols of "C_2nd_B_04") is displayed.

By the way, when the winning combination related to the bonus is drawn in with priority over the pushing order combination, the combination of any of the symbols of BB, bell, bell spilled eye and the first piece may not be displayed depending on the result of the stop operation. For example, when the push is accurate in the first and second stop operations, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in accordance with the first and second stop operations can display the BB, but the bell and the bell are spilled. The combination of the eyes and the first pattern may not be displayable. In such a case, if the push of the third stop operation is inaccurate, both the winning combination and the pushing order combination related to the bonus will be missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), when the push is not accurate, the combination of the missed symbols may be displayed regardless of whether the push order is correct or incorrect.

Here, in a game in which the combination related to the bonus and the push order combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the out-of-order symbols is displayed, and if any combination is missed, the player feels a loss. You will be dissatisfied with it. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, the following notification (navigation) is performed during the state between flags. FIG. 114 (C) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side.

As shown in FIG. 114 (C), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, in addition to the above-mentioned "white 7 navigation", "white 7 navigation_123", "white 7 navigation_132", "white 7 navigation_213", and "white 7" Perform "Navi_231", "White 7 Navi_312", and "White 7 Navi_321". "White 7 Navi_123" is performed when the role "F_BB1" and the role "F_6 choice bell_123" are determined as internal winning roles, and "White 7 Navi_132" is performed when the role "F_BB1" and the role "F_6" are determined. "Selection bell_132" is performed when the internal winning combination is determined, and "White 7 Navi_213" is performed when the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 selection bell_213" are determined as the internal winning combination. We, "White 7 Navi_231" is performed when the role "F_BB1" and the role "F_6 choice bell_231" are determined as internal winning roles, and "White 7 Navi_312" is performed as the role "F_BB1". "F_6 choice bell_312" is performed when the internal winning combination is determined, and "white 7 navigation_321" is performed when the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 selection bell_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. It is done in.

When performing "white 7 navigation_123", the main control board 71 displays a numerical value of "12" on the instruction monitor, and when performing "white 7 navigation_132", the main control board 71 displays "13" on the instruction monitor. When displaying the numerical value of "White 7 Navi_213" and performing "White 7 Navi_213", the main control board 71 displays the numerical value of "14" on the instruction monitor, and when performing "White 7 Navi_231", the main control board 71 is When displaying the numerical value of "15" on the instruction monitor and performing "white 7 navigation_312", the main control board 71 displays the numerical value of "16" on the instruction monitor and performing "white 7 navigation_321". The main control board 71 displays the numerical value of "17" on the instruction monitor.

On the other hand, when performing "white 7 navigation_123" to "white 7 navigation_321", the sub-control board 72 performs the special navigation illustrated in FIG. 115. Note that FIG. 115 shows an example of a special navigation corresponding to "White 7 Navi_123", but the pressing order of "White 7 Navi_213" to "White 7 Navi_321" is different only. , Basically, it is the same as "White 7 Navi_123" shown in FIG. 115.

When performing "white 7 navigation_123", as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the sub-control board 72 is a push order combination determined as an internal winning combination during rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The correct pressing order for "F_6 choice bell_123" is displayed on the display unit 100. In the example shown in FIG. 115 (A), the push order of "left, middle, right", which is the correct push order for the push order combination "F_6 choice bell_123", is displayed on the display unit 100.

When the winning combination related to the bonus is pulled in with priority over the pushing order combination as in the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, even if the stop operation is performed according to the notified push order, the combination related to the bonus is supported. The stop control is performed so as to pull in the symbol as much as possible. As a result, at the timing when the first reel is stopped due to the first stop operation, (1) the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order combination is not displayed, (2) related to the bonus. The symbol according to the combination is not displayed, the symbol according to the push order combination is displayed, and (3) both the symbol according to the combination related to the bonus and the symbol according to the push order combination are displayed. Three patterns of stopping modes are conceivable.

In addition, in the case of performing "white 7 navigation_123", the symbol corresponding to the combination related to the bonus (specific combination configuration symbol) is the symbol "white 7" constituting the combination of the symbols of the combination name "C_BB1". The symbol corresponding to the push order combination (push order combination configuration symbol) is a symbol (for example, a symbol "hat") constituting the combination names "C_9-sheet combination A_01" to "C_9-sheet combination H_04".

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, the sub-control board 72 switches the content to be notified according to the stop mode of the symbol displayed in accordance with the stop operation, thereby switching the contents to be notified from "white 7 navigation_123" to "white 7 navigation_321". "I do.

Specifically, when (1) the symbol "white 7" corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order combination is not displayed, FIG. 115 (B) shows. As shown, the sub-control board 72 stops the notification of the correct push order that was performed during the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and aims at the symbol "white 7" for the reels that are still rotating. Navigating. Since the player cannot obtain the profit according to the push order as long as the symbol corresponding to the push order is not displayed on the stopped first reel, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to this modification is a navigation system. To encourage the player to win a BB prize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the combination of out-of-order symbols from being displayed in this game.

Further, when (2) the symbol corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is not displayed and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order combination is displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the sub The control board 72 continues to notify the correct push order that was performed during the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Since the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the stopped first reel, the symbol corresponding to the pushing order is drawn when the remaining reels are stopped. Therefore, the pachi-slot machine according to this modification. In 1, the notification of the correct push order is continued for the push order combination. As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the combination of the bell symbols is displayed in this game, and the player pays out the profit (9 medals paid out) according to the combination of the symbols. ) Can be received.

Further, when both the symbol corresponding to the combination related to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the push order combination are displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), the sub-control is performed. The board 72 notifies the reels that are still rotating that the stop operation is performed in the correct push order that was performed during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R while avoiding the symbol "white 7". If both the symbol corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order combination are displayed on the stopped first reel, the combination of either the BB or the bell symbol may be displayed. .. The role related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning role until the prize is won, while the push order role (especially the role in which more medals than the number of medals inserted at the time of winning are paid out) is not carried over and is won only in the game. Therefore, in the game, it is more advantageous for the player to realize the winning of the push order role.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to this modification, when both the symbol corresponding to the combination related to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the push order combination are displayed when the reel is stopped, the notification of the push order is continued. , Encourage the avoidance of the design "White 7". As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the combination of bell symbols is displayed in this game, and the player pays out the profit (9 medals paid out) according to the combination of the symbols. ) Can be received.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present modification, by switching the content to be notified according to the progress of the game, the player can perform the notification without loss, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. be able to.

In the example shown in FIG. 115, the description is given only at the time of the first stop, but the content to be notified can be similarly switched at the time of the second stop.
Further, such "white 7 navigation_123" to "white 7 navigation_321" are performed only in the gaming state (ART gaming state) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and during the general gaming state. You may simply perform "White 7 Navi". That is, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 execute "white 7 navigation_123" when the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 selection bell_123" are determined as internal winning combinations during the ART gaming state. If the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 selection bell_123" are determined as the internal winning combination during the general game state, the "white 7 navigation" may be simply executed.

In addition, the duration of the ART gaming state when executing "White 7 Navi_123" or the like during the ART gaming state can be arbitrarily managed. That is, since the mode (pushing order) of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified even during the inter-flag state, for example, when the duration of the ART gaming state is managed by the number of games, the flag is displayed. The number of games in the interim state may also be counted as the number of games in the ART game state (added to the ART continuous game number counter), and for example, when the duration of the ART game state is managed by the number of navigations. May also count the number of times such as "white 7 navigation_123" performed during the flag-to-flag state as the number of navigations during the ART gaming state, and for example, the duration of the ART gaming state is during the ART gaming state. When managed by the number of medals paid out or the difference number, the number of medals paid out in connection with "White 7 Navi_123" is also counted as the number of medals paid out during the ART game state. It may be that.

Of course, on the contrary, during the inter-flag state, it may be managed so as not to affect the duration of the ART gaming state. Further, the duration of the ART game state may be managed based on the result of the game in which "White 7 Navi_123" or the like is performed. For example, if a profit (payout of 9 medals) according to the push order is given according to "White 7 Navi_123" or the like, the game in which "White 7 Navi_123" or the like is performed is ART. Assuming that the game is in the game state, the duration during the ART game state is managed, and if the profit according to the push order is not given according to "White 7 Navi_123" etc., the game is placed in the ART game state. It may be possible to manage the duration during the ART game state as it is not a game in the middle.

By not displaying the combination of symbols according to the winning combination related to the bonus, it is possible to extend the notification section during the inter-flag state. Therefore, once, the notification based on the main side navigation "10" (for example, "white 7 navigation" in the game of the internal winning role "off") is executed, and the combination of symbols according to the role related to the bonus in the game is displayed. If this is not possible, the sub-control board 72 then uses "white 7 navigation" instead of "white 7 navigation_123" to "white 7 navigation_321" for the main navigation "12" to "17". You may do it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the capture by stretching. In addition, in the game in which the notification based on the main side navigation "12" to "17" cannot be displayed, if the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus cannot be displayed, it does not correspond to the capture by stretching, so the sub control board 72 Performs "White 7 Navi_123" to "White 7 Navi_321" for the subsequent main side navigations "12" to "17".

In addition, while a part of the push order bell is in the state between flags, the reel control may be the same as the push order bell, and the player's push frequency may be reduced. Then, if the push order navigation and the white 7 navigation are not displayed and the player is notified that a small winning combination can be obtained regardless of the push order, the player does not have to make unnecessary pushes.

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 146. The same configuration and control as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment will not be described in detail. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
The control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a circuit block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided inside the housing 60 and a sub control board 72 provided on the upper door 62a. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 410, a ratio display device 420, a setting key type switch 430, a cabinet-side relay board 440, and a power supply device 450 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachislot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 73, a hopper device 40, a medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and a reset switch 442 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 440.
Since the configurations of the external centralized terminal board 73 and the hopper device 40 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 410 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 410 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The ratio display device 420 includes a ratio display board 421 connected to the main control board 71, a ratio display 422 connected to the ratio display board 421, and a changeover switch 423. The ratio display board 421 controls the display of the ratio display 422 based on the signal output from the main control board 71. The ratio display 422 displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and a bonus ratio. The changeover switch 423 switches the display of the ratio display 422.
The configuration of the ratio display 422 and the details of the various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 will be described later with reference to FIG. 118.

The setting key type switch 430 is set when setting one of a plurality of setting values provided for setting the magnitude of the profit given to the player, or in the pachi-slot machine 1. It is used when confirming the set value that has been set. When the main control board 71 receives an operation using the setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71 sets a setting value according to the content of the operation from a plurality of setting values.

The cabinet-side relay board 440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71 to the external centralized terminal board 73, the hopper device 40, the medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and the reset switch 442. The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 442 is used when resetting (initializing) various data of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The power supply device 450 has a power supply board 451 connected to the main control board 71 and a power supply switch 452 connected to the power supply board 451. The power switch 452 is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 has a selector 461, a door open / close monitoring switch 462, a BET switch 11S, and a settlement switch 13S connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 460 and the door relay terminal plate 460. , A start switch 6S, a stop switch board 463, a game operation display board 470, and an auxiliary relay board 75. Since the BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S, the start switch 6S, and the sub-relay board 75 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The selector 461 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 to the hopper device 40. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 461.

The door open / close monitoring switch 462 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The stop switch board 463 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 463 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 7L, 7C, 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 470 is connected to the information display 14, and is inserted when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable, when replaying a game, and the like. It is a board for displaying the number of medals and the like on the information display 14. Further, the LED group 471 is connected to the game operation display board 470, and the LED group 471 is, for example, a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for performing a re-game, etc. based on the signal input from the game operation display board 470. Turn on.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 460 and the sub-relay board 75. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has speakers 9L, 9R, various LEDs 101, a touch sensor 201a, and a display unit 110 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 75.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 82 and a liquid crystal relay board 480 connected to the sub-control board 72. The rom cartridge board 82 and the liquid crystal relay board 480 are housed in the sub-control board case together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 82 is a board for managing image (video), audio, optical, and communication data for directing. The liquid crystal relay board 480 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. Since the configuration of the sub-control circuit mounted on the sub-control board 72 is the same as that shown in FIG. 31, the description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 117 (A), the main control circuit is mainly composed of a microcomputer 30 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 30 is composed of a main CPU 31, a main ROM 32, and a main RAM 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72, and the like. Further, the main ROM 32 stores a plurality of minimum game times related to the unit game.

The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

<Ratio indicator>
Next, the configuration of the ratio display 422 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. As described above in FIG. 116, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ratio display 422 that displays various ratios. FIG. 118 (A) shows an example of mounting the ratio display 422, and FIG. 118 (B) shows the contents displayed on the ratio display 422.

(Composition of ratio display)
As shown in FIG. 118, the ratio display 422 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and as will be described later in FIG. 118 (B), the upper 2 digits indicate the type of the ratio to be displayed, and the lower 2 digits. Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio display 422 is provided inside the housing 60 of the pachi-slot machine 1 because it is used by an administrator (such as a clerk at a game store) to confirm that the pachi-slot machine 1 is not tampered with. At this time, in order to prevent fraud on the ratio display 422 itself, it is preferable that the ratio display 422 is provided inside the main control board case that covers the main control board 71.

As a specific mounting example, as shown in FIG. 118 (A-1), the ratio indicator 422 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and is also shown in FIG. 118 (A-2). As shown in FIG. 118 (A-3), it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71, and as shown in FIG. 118 (A-3), 7 segments as the ratio display 422. The LED unit may be attached by connecting it to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), it is preferable that the main control board 71 is provided inside the main control board case together with the main control board 71.

Normally, a seal is attached to the main control board case, but if the ratio indicator 422 is provided inside the main control board case, the seal may impair the visibility of the ratio indicator 422. It is preferable to attach a sealing sticker so that there is no such thing. Further, a caulking recording sticker is also attached to the main control board case. The caulking recording sticker is a sticker on which the person in charge of the caulking opening record, the date entry field, the serial number of the main control board, and the two-dimensional code for identification used at the time of manufacturing are described. Depending on the model, a sticker of the two-dimensional code used at the time of manufacturing may be attached to the main control board case. It is preferable that the layout is such that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired by the sticking member such as a sticker.
Further, the front door (upper door 62a or lower) may also be made of a caulking member or harness assembled to the main control board, another board in the case of a board configuration in which a plurality of boards are arranged in an overlapping manner, or other members in the housing. It is preferable to design the door 62b) so that the visibility of the ratio display is not impaired when the door 62b) is opened, and by doing so, the efficiency of the manager's confirmation work of the ratio display is improved.

(Display contents of the ratio display)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio display 422 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (B), the ratio display 422 shows the cumulative specific section ratio, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio between the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous character ratio and the character ratio. , Is displayed. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 422, "AU" is displayed in the upper two digits of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, and when displaying the continuous character ratio between the latest 6000 games. , "= R" is displayed in the upper two digits, and when displaying the character ratio between the latest 6000 games, "= b" is displayed in the upper two digits, and the cumulative continuous character ratio is displayed. In this case, "Ar" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "Ab" is displayed in the upper two digits when the cumulative percentage of bonuses is displayed. Further, the corresponding ratio is displayed as a percentage in the lower two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED.

Here, the "specific section ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of games played in a game state advantageous to the player to the number of games played in all the game states (that is, the total number of games played). In this case, the gaming state advantageous to the player may include, for example, a CZ having a high expectation of transition to the ART gaming state in addition to the bonus state during the bonus operation and the ART gaming state (see FIG. 33). ).

The main control board 71 counts the total number of games indicating the number of games in all the game states and the specific number of games indicating the number of games in the game state advantageous to the player in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, the specific section ratio is calculated by the formula shown below.
Specific section ratio = specific number of games / total number of games x 100

In addition, the "continuous bonus ratio" is related to the first-class special bonus or the first-class special bonus with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all the gaming states (that is, the total number of payouts). The ratio of the total number of medals paid out while the continuous accessory actuating device is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all game states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus. The number of medals paid out during the first specific game, which indicates the total number of medals paid out while the continuous bonus actuating device according to the above is in operation, is counted, and the ratio of continuous bonuses is calculated by the following formula.
Percentage of consecutive characters = Number of payouts during the first specific game / Total number of payouts x 100

In addition, the "feature ratio" is the total number of medals paid out while any of the bonuses is in operation with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (that is, the total number of payouts). It refers to the ratio of occupancy. In addition, any of the characters is a type 1 special character, a character continuous operation device related to the type 1 special character, a type 2 special character, and a character continuous operation related to the type 2 special character. A device or an ordinary accessory. Further, since the player is in an advantageous state during the ART gaming state and the CZ, it may be included in the state in which any of the accessories is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and medals paid out during operation of any of the accessories. The number of medals to be paid out during the second specific game, which indicates the total number of medals, is counted, and the bonus ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Character ratio = Number of payouts during the second specified game / Total number of payouts x 100

Further, "cumulative" means the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and "between the latest 6000 games" means the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the ratio of "cumulative", the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the entire period, and when calculating the ratio of "between the latest 6000 games", The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

The pachi-slot machine 1 is configured so that none of the counting items in the counter provided in the main RAM 33 is erased by power failure. Specifically, the data is saved in the backup area provided in the main RAM 33 at the time of power failure, and the data is read from the backup area and reset at the time of recovery. As a result, data can be continuously accumulated from the time of installation even in the case of general operation in which the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened.

Further, the right of the replay accompanying the winning of the replay can be considered as the payout of the same number of medals as the medals used for the game, or can be considered as the payout of 0 medals. In the above-mentioned calculation of the ratio, the calculation result may differ between the calculation method A in which the right to replay is considered to be the payout of medals and the calculation method B in which the right to replay is not considered to be the payout of medals. For example, in the calculation of the ratio to the total number of medals paid out in all the gaming states (total number of payouts) such as the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio, the calculation method A in which the right to replay is considered to be the payout of medals. Then, the total number of payouts will increase by the number of times the replay wins, and as a result, the ratio will decrease. On the contrary, in the calculation method B in which the right of replay is not considered as the payout of medals, the winning of the replay does not affect the total number of payouts, and as a result, the ratio becomes high. Since the difference between the calculation method A and the calculation method B increases as the number of times the replay wins increases, it increases as the number of games increases.

Therefore, in the ratio display 422, the calculation result by the calculation method A and the calculation result by the calculation method B may be displayed in a switchable manner. In this case, the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method A and the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method B should be different. Further, if there is a margin in the size of the substrate on which the ratio display 422 is provided, a 7-segment unit of the ratio display 422 may be added to display both at the same time.
Further, even when displaying the continuous character ratio or the character ratio on the setting screen (so-called hall menu) that can be displayed by the store manager, the results calculated by a plurality of calculation methods can be displayed in the same manner. good.

(Display contents of ratio display (switching display))
The ratio display 422 switches and displays various ratios calculated by the main control board 71. The method of switching the content to be displayed on the ratio display 422 is arbitrary, for example, various ratios may be automatically switched at predetermined intervals, and depending on the operation of the changeover switch 423 (see FIG. 116). The various ratios may be switched manually, or the various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Display contents of the ratio display (when an error occurs))
Pachislot machines have rules in the industry so as not to increase gambling unnecessarily. For example, the ratio of the game state that is advantageous to the player to all the games does not become too high, and By paying out more than a predetermined number of medals not only during the advantageous gaming state but also in the normal gaming state, the base (so-called coin holding) at the normal time is lowered so that the game can be played with peace of mind in the normal gaming state. There are regulations such as not to go too far. The above-mentioned various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 make it possible to confirm whether or not these regulations are satisfied. Although it may temporarily exceed the regulation value due to the continuous establishment of accidental bonuses, from a statistical point of view, the value of the ratio shown on the display as the number of games increases is in line with the regulation. It converges in a way that approaches the created design value. Therefore, when the number of trials is large, such as 100,000 games, if a value that deviates from the design value is still displayed, it can be inferred that the fraudulent activity has been performed. In addition, when a value having a large deviation from the design value is frequently displayed only on a specific table, the administrator can infer that a fraudulent act has been performed on that specific table, such as hanging an unauthorized board. In this way, whether or not the value displayed on the ratio display 422 exceeds the specified value functions as a clue for the administrator to detect fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 exceed the specified value, it is preferable that the manager can appropriately grasp the fact. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned various ratios (specific section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio) calculated by the main control board 71 are equal to or higher than the specified values set for the ratio. The display mode of the ratio on the ratio display 422 is different depending on the case and the case where the value is less than the specified value set for the ratio. For example, the ratio display 422 blinks the ratio when it is equal to or more than the specified value, and lights and displays the ratio when it is less than the specified value. As a result, the manager can grasp at a glance whether or not the various ratios satisfy the specified values.

In addition, if there is a ratio that is equal to or higher than the specified value, it may be notified to an external device (for example, a hall computer) to that effect (for example, a notification that the specific section ratio exceeds the specified value). good. Specifically, when the ratio of the calculated ratio is equal to or higher than the specified value, the main control board 71 notifies the external device to that effect via the external centralized terminal board 73. If the output pins from the external centralized terminal board 73 are limited, the output pins currently used as error output are used to notify the external device (that is, error output). May be good.

It should be noted that just because there is a ratio that exceeds the specified value, it cannot be said that it is an immediate fraudulent act. Therefore, in the case of a model equipped with a first error output that is output when an abnormality with a strong suspicion of fraud is detected and a second error output that is output when an abnormality that occurs in a normal game is detected, it is specified. An error based on exceeding the value is preferably a second error output. Here, the abnormalities with a strong suspicion of fraud are, for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read / write inability, RAM software abnormality, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormality, internal voltage abnormality, and non-internal winning combination. There are cases such as a winning abnormality in which the symbol related to the above is displayed on the valid line, a case where a payout is detected at a timing when the payout cannot be originally made, and a case where the set value shows a value other than 6 steps. Abnormalities that occur in normal games include, for example, hopper empty where the medals of the hopper device 40 run out, detection of medal clogging at the payout exit of the hopper device 40, medal overflow that fills the medal auxiliary storage, and medals. A door caused by the hall clerk opening the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) for medal replenishment, etc. For example, when it is detected that the wiring of the hopper is disconnected when an opening error or medal replenishment is performed.

By giving a predetermined notification to the external device when the ratio is equal to or higher than the specified value in this way, the administrator can perform various types without looking at the ratio display 422 provided inside the housing 60. Since it is possible to grasp whether or not the ratio satisfies the specified value, the burden on the administrator can be reduced.

(Display contents of the ratio display (immediately after installation))
Until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, such as immediately after the installation of the pachi-slot machine 1, various ratios have a large blur width and move up and down greatly. Therefore, the display modes of various ratios may be different until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number. At this time, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of the calculated ratio. For example, the cumulative percentage is displayed in a different mode (for example, displayed in yellow) until the total number of games reaches "17,500", and after the total number of games reaches "17,500", it is displayed. While it is displayed in a normal mode (for example, displayed in red), the ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed in a different mode until the total number of games reaches "6000", and the total number of games is displayed. After reaching "6000 times", it may be displayed in a normal manner.

Further, the output to the external device may not be performed until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, even if the various ratios are equal to or higher than the specified value. Even in this case, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of ratio to be calculated.

(Modification example of ratio display)
By the way, since the existing pachi-slot machine does not have a ratio display, it is necessary to make a major modification to the existing pachi-slot machine in the installation example of the ratio display shown in FIG. 118 (A). Therefore, the display provided in the existing pachislot machine may be used as a ratio display for displaying various ratios. Specifically, in the existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) that displays the number of medals stored (number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (number of payouts). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachi-slot machine, a display unit (described later) that displays the type of ratio to be displayed on the display unit that displays the number of credits (credit lamp 145 described later) and displays the number of payouts. The display of the display may be switchable so that the ratio of the type is displayed on the payout number lamp 146).

Although the special operation is optional, it is preferably an operation using a switch provided inside the housing 60. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing a special operation.

<Information display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the configuration of the information display 14 including the instruction monitor in which the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation will be described.
As shown in FIG. 119, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, an instruction monitor 147, and the like. It is configured to include a limit lamp 148.

The insert lamp 141 informs the player that a medal can be inserted by lighting (or blinking (hereinafter omitted)), and the start lamp 142 lights up to play with the operation of the start lever 6. The replay lamp 143 informs the player that the medal can be automatically inserted by the operation of the re-game by turning on the replay lamp 143. Further, the bet number lamp 144 informs the player of the number of medals bet by turning on the lamp, and the credit lamp 145 turns on the number of medals stored inside the pachislot machine 1 (number of credits). Is reported to the player, and the payout number lamp 146 is turned on to notify the player of the number of medals paid out (the number of payouts) as a result of the game.

Further, the instruction monitor 147 is configured to include a notification lamp 147a and a status display 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and by lighting in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, the information of the necessary stop operation is notified to the player. Further, the state display 147b is turned on to notify the player that the current gaming state is a gaming state (for example, an ART gaming state) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. ..
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 is provided without providing the notification lamp 147a. May be used to notify the information of the stop operation.

Further, the limit lamp 148 is turned on when the gaming state favorable to the player continues for a long period of time. If the playing state that is advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, there is a risk that the gambling will be agitated. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, the ART gaming state is forcibly terminated even before the continuation period of the ART gaming state expires. (Limit processing). The limit lamp 148 lights up when the ART gaming state is terminated by this limit processing, and notifies the player that the limit processing has been performed. Further, the limit lamp 148 may blink when the limit processing is about to be activated, and may be turned on when the limit processing is actually performed.
The details of the limit processing will be described later in FIGS. 126 and 127.

The insert lamps 141 to the limit lamps 148 are turned on, blinked, and turned off by LEDs (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LED to inform the player of various information related to the game.

<Status indicator>
Next, the state display 147b provided in the information display 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting timing pattern of the status display 147b.
In FIG. 120, timing T1 is the start of the game, timing T2 is the start of reel rotation of the game, timing T3 is the first stop operation of the game, and timing T4 is the second stop of the game. It is the operation time, the timing T5 is the third stop operation of the game, the timing T6 is the time when all reels of the game are stopped, the timing T7 is the end time of the game, and the timing T8 is the start of the next game. It's time.

In the example shown in FIG. 120, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for transition to the specific section (for example, the ART game state) is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the winning game. For example, in lighting pattern example 1, the state indicator 147b is lit at the start of the game (timing T1) that wins the transition lottery to a specific section. Further, in the lighting pattern example 2, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the start of reel rotation (timing T2) of the game won in the transition lottery to the specific section, and in the lighting pattern example 3, the transition lottery to the specific section is won. The status indicator 147b is turned on during the first stop operation (timing T3) of the game, and in the lighting pattern example 4, the status indicator is turned on when all reels of the game won in the transition lottery to a specific section are stopped (timing T6). The 147b is turned on, and in the lighting pattern example 5, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the end of the game (timing T7) that wins the transition lottery to the specific section.

The lighting pattern example shown in FIG. 120 is only an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the status display 147b may be turned on during the game in which the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, and the timing thereof may be set. Is optional.

By turning on the status indicator 147b during the game in which the lottery for transition to the specific section is won in this way, the player can grasp that the lottery for transition to the specific section has been won, so that the subsequent game can be performed. It is suitable because it can have expectations.

(Improvement of notification by status indicator)
By the way, if the presence or absence of the winning was announced only by turning on / off one lamp, the presence or absence of the winning can be immediately known, but the player feels that only the lamp should be turned on. As a result, there is a risk that the interest in other productions on the liquid crystal display device or the like will be lost. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fact that the lottery for transition to a specific section has been won is notified during the game without becoming monotonous by the method shown below.

(Ingenuity for status display 1)
119 (B) and 119 (C) show another configuration example of the status indicator 147b. The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (B) has a plurality of lamps "a" to "i" that are turned on, blinked, and turned off, respectively, based on a pattern of turning on, blinking, and turning off the plurality of lamps. , Inform that you have won the transition lottery to a specific section.

As an example, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a plurality of lamps are lit in a specific pattern (for example, "a", "c", "d", "h", "i" are lit). If not, multiple lamps will light up in a pattern other than this particular pattern. The specific pattern is not limited to one, and may have a plurality of patterns. This makes it possible to give a deeper notification than when one lamp simply lights up to notify the winning. For example, as the game is repeated and the lighting pattern at the time of winning is memorized, the detection of the winning becomes faster. It is possible to realize such playability.

It should be noted that the presence or absence of winning of the transition lottery may be reported based on the number of lamps that are lit, instead of reporting based on the lighting pattern. For example, if the transition lottery is won, a specific number of lamps among the plurality of lamps are lit, and if the transition lottery is not won, a number other than the specific number among the plurality of lamps is lit. The lamp may be turned on. Further, for example, when the transition lottery is won, a specific number or more (or a specific number or less) of the lamps among the plurality of lamps are lit, and when the transition lottery is not won, a plurality of lamps are lit. The number of lamps of less than a specific number (or more than a specific number) may be turned on.

Further, by controlling the lighting patterns of the plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting the degree of expectation of the winning of the transition lottery by using the plurality of lamps. For example, when the lighting pattern for notifying the winning of the transition lottery is "all lamps are lit", the progress of the game (start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation). By increasing or decreasing the number of lamps that are lit according to (when all reels are stopped, etc.), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning the transition lottery according to the progress of the game.

(Ingenuity for status display 2)
The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C) is similar to the status indicator 147b of FIG. 119 (B) in that each of the status indicators 147b has a plurality of lamps that are turned on, blinked, and turned off. The state display 147b is different in that the plurality of lamps have no meaning as a whole, whereas the state display 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C) has a meaning as a whole. That is, in the state display 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C), for example, the manufacturer name of the pachi-slot machine 1, the model name of the pachi-slot machine 1, the character name that became the motif of the pachi-slot machine 1 and the manufacturer, the shape of the character, and the like. Characters and shapes that you want to impress the player are also used as decorations. By using such decorations for a plurality of lamps, the characters and shapes represented by the decorations can be strongly memorized by the player, which leads to improvement of brand power.

Even in this case, by controlling the lighting pattern and the number of lamps to be lit, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the transition lottery has been won, and to control the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game. Then, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the winning of the transition lottery.

Note that some pachi-slot machines may have a plurality of types of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player as specific sections, and may shift to any specific section based on the result of the shift lottery. For example, in a pachi-slot machine having an ART game state and a CZ, a pachi-slot machine that shifts the game state to the ART game state or the CZ based on the result of the transition lottery, or an ART game state and an initial game in which the initial number of games is 50 games. A pachi-slot machine or the like having an ART game state in which the number of games is 100 and shifting the game state to the ART game state of the initial number of games determined by the transition lottery can be considered.

Here, when a plurality of lamps are used as in the above-mentioned devices 1 and 2, the plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) are turned on or off in different combinations of patterns according to the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery. You may let it. As an example, when the number of initial games is 50 games and the ART game state is won, the state indicator 147b is lit in the first lighting pattern, and when the initial number of games is 100 games and the ART game state is won. , The status indicator 147b may be lit with a second lighting pattern different from the first lighting pattern.

As a result, since the lighting pattern differs depending on the type of the specific section, it is possible to increase the variation of the lighting pattern of the status display 147b. For the player, as the variation of the lighting pattern increases, it becomes difficult to accurately grasp the content of each lighting pattern, so that the player does not lose interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

On the contrary, regardless of the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery, a plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) may be turned on or off in the same combination pattern. In such control, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the winning specific section, it is not possible to grasp the type of the winning specific section from the lighting pattern. Depending on the skilled player, the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps may be memorized. Therefore, a specific section that is truly advantageous for the player (for example, a long ART game state such as 50 games) and a specific section that is not so advantageous for the player (for example, an ART game state that ends in one game) are defined. By providing the same lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b in any of these specific sections, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the type of the winning specific section.

Further, as a consideration for beginners, the contents of each lighting pattern may be displayed on the waist panel 25 or the like. For example, the waist panel 25 of a design that is generally introduced does not display the content of the lighting pattern, but is used for the waist panel 25 of a pachislot machine that is mainly shipped to stores with many beginners such as low ball rental stores. May display the contents of the lighting pattern. Further, the purchasing store may be able to order the desired waist panel 25 from the manufacturer based on the customer base. This makes it possible to report or not report the content of the lighting pattern according to the customer base of the game store.

Since the design change of the waist panel 25 does not require testing by a testing institution and the burden of manufacturing and development costs is not large, a pachislot machine with appropriate specifications can be provided by simply changing the panel according to the market environment. Can be and is suitable. It should be noted that instead of changing the design of the waist panel 25 itself, it may be possible to switch between reporting and not reporting the content of the lighting pattern by a sheet member to which a predetermined seal member is attached or replaceable. Further, the place where the content of the lighting pattern is displayed may be a place other than the waist panel 25 as long as it can be recognized by the player during the game. However, it is desirable that the location is easy for the player to see.

(Ingenuity for status display 3)
Further, in order to prevent the presence or absence of winning from being known by whether or not one lamp is lit, the status indicator 147b may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. The position that is difficult to see may be, for example, an arbitrary place such as the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25, the side surface of the housing 60, or the back of the medal insertion slot 22. Further, the status indicator 147b is covered with an opaque cover so that the status indicator 147b can be visually recognized only from the hole (peephole) formed in the cover, thereby making the status indicator 147b difficult to see. be able to. Further, for example, a bill clip or a parking lot use service ticket clip may be provided on the pachi-slot machine 1, and a status display 147b may be provided behind the clip.

(Ingenuity for status display 4)
In addition, if the status indicator 147b that informs the success or failure of the transition lottery to a specific section is in the same position, it will be immediately known if only that location is viewed, so even if the position of the status indicator 147b is switched. good. As a specific method, it is conceivable to give at least a plurality of lamps (LEDs) of a plurality of places of the pachi-slot machine 1 a function of a status indicator 147b, and to make a different lamp for notifying the success or failure of the transition lottery every hour. Will be. As a result, for example, at a certain timing, the lamp at the upper right portion fulfills the function of the status indicator 147b, but at another timing, the lamp at the lower left portion fulfills the function of the status indicator 147b. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the success or failure of the transition lottery only from the lighting pattern of the status display 147b, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

(Ingenuity from playability)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 121, a device from the playability regarding a method of making it difficult to understand that the lottery for transition to a specific section is won will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, "F_3 choice bell_1st", "F_3 choice bell_2nd", and "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are provided as push order roles, and nine medals are paid out when the push order is correct (bell's). The combination of symbols is displayed), and 0 or 1 medal is paid out when the push order is incorrect (the combination of bell spilled or 1st symbol is displayed). Then, in the ART gaming state, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order according to the push order combination is notified. Therefore, during the ART game state, by playing the game according to the notification, a number of medals (for example, 9 medals) exceeding the medals used for the game (for example, 3 medals) will be paid out.

As a device from the playability, first, a push order role is further provided in which medals equal to or less than the medals used in the game are paid out even when the push order is correct. In the example shown in FIG. 121, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), push order combinations such as "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination _1st", "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination _2nd", and "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination_3rd" are provided. For "F_3 choice 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1-card combination 3rd", when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of the first pattern is displayed, one medal is paid out, and the order of pressing is not correct. When the answer is correct, the combination of out-of-order symbols is displayed and 0 medals are paid out.
In addition, the newly provided push order role does not have to increase the number of medals even when the push order is correct, and the number of medals (third quantity) equal to or less than the number of medals used for the game when the push order is correct is paid out. It suffices if the number of medals (fourth quantity) smaller than the number (third quantity) is paid out when the push order is incorrect, or no medals are paid out (that is, zero).

Further, as a device from the viewpoint of game playability, at least two types of ART game states are provided as ART game states. Specifically, all push order combinations ("F_3 choice 1-sheet combination _1st" to "F_3 selection 1-sheet combination_3rd" and "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd") are determined as internal winning roles. The correct answer is given when the ART game state that notifies the correct push order when the answer is made, and when "F_3 choice 1 piece combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1 piece role_3rd" among the push order roles are determined as the internal winning combination. When the push order is notified and "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are determined as the internal winning combination, a one-card combination ART game state in which the correct push order is not notified is provided.

Then, as a device from the game property, the state display 147b is turned on regardless of whether the game state is the ART game state or the single-card combination ART game state. It should be noted that the lighting pattern of the state display 147b may be different depending on the ART gaming state and the single-card combination ART gaming state, or the same lighting pattern may be used.

With such a device, the state display 147b can notify that the current game state is the game state for notifying the push order, but the state display 147b alone is truly advantageous for the player. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether the player is in the ART game state or the single-card combination ART game state.

The transition to the ART gaming state that is truly advantageous for the player is performed by winning the transition lottery to a specific section, but the transition to the single-card combination ART gaming state that is not necessarily advantageous for the player. Can be done arbitrarily.

In the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), all the games other than the ART game state are set as the one-card combination ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), in the 11th game, the lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, the lottery for transition to the ART game state) is won, so that the games after the 11th time. Is in the ART game state. During this ART game state, a 3-choice 1-card combination ("F_3 choice 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1-card combination_3rd") and a 3-choice bell ("F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd") Regardless of which of the above is decided as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), all the games before winning the lottery for transition to the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state. In this one-card combination ART game state, in the game in which the three-choice one-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination (first game), the correct push order is notified, while the three-choice bell is the internal winning combination. In the game determined as a role (second game), the correct push order is not notified.

In this way, when all the games other than the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state, the state display 147b is always lit regardless of whether or not the lottery for transition to the ART game state is won. Therefore, the player cannot grasp that the transition lottery has been won only by turning on / off the status display 147b.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), among the games other than the ART game state, only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination is set as the 1-card combination ART game state, and the other games are set. , It is in a state (normal) that is neither an ART game state nor a single-card combination ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), in the 11th game, the lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, the lottery for transition to the ART game state) is won, so that the games after the 11th time. Is in the ART game state.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), among the games before winning the lottery for transition to the ART game state, only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination is selected as the 1-card combination ART. The game state is set, and the other games are set to the normal game state. Specifically, since the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the first game, the game state of this first game is set as the 1-card combination ART game state, and the notification of the correct push order is notified. Is going. On the other hand, in the second game, since the three-choice one-card combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, it is in the normal game state and the correct push order is not notified.

In this way, even if only the game in which the three-choice one-card combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination is set as the one-card combination ART game state, the status indicator 147b has three choices. In a game in which one card combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the light is turned on regardless of whether or not the lottery for transition to the ART game state is won, so that the player can turn on / off the status indicator 147b. It will not be possible to know that the transition lottery has been won by itself. Further, even if the single-card combination ART game state is used, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Therefore, if the single-card combination ART game state is always set as shown in FIG. 121 (B), There is a risk that the notification game state in which the notification of the push order is performed will continue for a long period of time, and the gambling of the game will be unnecessarily enhanced. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), by setting only the game in which the three-choice one-card combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination, the one-card combination ART game state is set as the notification game. The period of the state can be limited, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from increasing unnecessarily.

<Basic game flow>
Subsequently, the basic game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that FIG. 122 shows only the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification, and the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of bonus operation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section that does not notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and a specific section that notifies the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The normal section corresponds to, for example, the normal gaming state during the general gaming state in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the specific section corresponds to, for example, the general game in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The CZ and ART gaming states in the state correspond (see FIG. 33).

(Transition from normal section to specific section)
A transition from a normal section to a specific section is made by winning a lottery for transition to a specific section. Here, the transition lottery to the specific section includes both the transition lottery to the CZ and the transition lottery to the ART gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed based on the information having no difference in the set values. "Information with no difference in set values" means a combination determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all set values in the internal lottery process (setting unquestioned combination), or in all set values when all reels are stopped. It includes at least a combination of symbols that will be displayed with the same probability (a combination of symbols with no setting difference).

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a lottery for transition to a specific section is performed, and the combination with a setting difference (setting difference combination) is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, the lottery for transition to a specific section will not be performed. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a combination of symbols having no setting difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, a lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed, and a combination of symbols having a setting difference is displayed. In that case, the lottery for transition to a specific section will not be performed.

In addition, the lottery for transition to a specific section is performed based on a predetermined and complete probability that does not change at all. The "predetermined perfect probability that does not change at all" means a probability that does not change at least based on the set value (that is, the probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).

By performing the transition lottery based on "information with no difference in the set value" with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be used for a specific section. The degree of expectation regarding migration can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in ball ejection performance can be suppressed to the winning probability of the setting difference combination with the setting difference.

(Example of lottery table used for transition lottery)
Here, an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for transition to a specific section is shown in FIG. 124. FIG. 124 (A) is an internal lottery table for determining an internal winning combination, and FIG. 124 (B) is a transition lottery table for performing a transition lottery to a specific section based on the internal winning combination. In the following, the internal lottery table has a probability denominator of 32768, and the transition lottery table has a probability denominator of 256.

As in the example shown in FIG. 124 (A), the internal lottery table defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. Here, the winning combination determined by lottery using the internal lottery table includes a setting difference combination in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and a set unquestioned combination in which the lottery value is the same regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 124 (A), the combination "F_BB1", "F_maintenance lip A", etc. are setting difference combinations in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and the combination "F_sabo 1", "F_chili lip", "F_BB1 + F_reach eye lip". , Etc. are set unquestioned roles with the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the set difference combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery to the specific section is not performed, and when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed. be able to. It should be noted that not performing the transition lottery to a specific section includes not performing the transition lottery itself and also including performing the transition lottery but always being unwinning. In addition, the transition lottery to a specific section does not necessarily have to be performed when any of the setting unquestioned roles is determined as the internal winning combination, and the setting unquestioned role that performs the transition lottery and the setting unquestioned combination that does not perform the transition lottery are not required. It may be possible to provide a role.

Subsequently, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 124 (B), the transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery for each set unquestioned combination determined as the internal winning combination. As described above, since the transfer lottery to a specific section is performed based on a predetermined and complete probability that does not change at all, the lottery value information specified in the transition lottery table is the same regardless of the set value. The value.

It should be noted that the "complete probability that is predetermined and does not fluctuate at all" may further include the probability that is uniquely determined for "information with no difference in the set value". In recent pachislot machines, there may be a state in which it is easy to win a transition lottery and a state in which it is difficult to win. In such a case, when the transition lottery is performed with the "probability uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value", for example, at the time of winning the setting unquestioned role, in any gaming state. The transition lottery that wins with the same probability will be performed. On the contrary, when the transition lottery is performed with a "probability that is not a uniquely determined probability (that is, a probability that fluctuates) for information that does not have a difference in the set value", for example, at the time of winning the setting unquestioned role, A transition lottery that wins with a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, a transition lottery that wins with a high probability is performed, and the current gaming state is a low probability state. In that case, a transition lottery, which wins with a low probability, will be performed.

(How to realize CZ when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
By the way, when the transition lottery is performed with the probability uniquely determined in this way, the transition lottery is performed with the same probability regardless of the game state, so that the transition lottery is performed as in the CZ (chance zone). In order to provide a state in which it is easy to shift to the ART game state, it is necessary to take some measures. Subsequently, an example of a method for realizing CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 125.

FIG. 125 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ART lottery method in CZ. For example, it is decided to notify the correct push order of the push order combination with no setting difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination during the CZ, and the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed at the time of the push order combination winning with no setting difference. It will be done based on the combination of displayed symbols. Specifically, as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (A), when a combination of bell symbols is displayed when all reels are stopped, a transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed, and a bell spill or 1 is performed. When the combination of the symbols on the reels is displayed, the lottery for shifting to the ART game state is not performed.

Comparing the normal section and the CZ, the winning probability of the push order combination is the same, but since the correct push order is not notified in the normal section, it is difficult to display the combination of symbols for which the transition lottery will be performed. On the contrary, since the correct pressing order is notified during CZ, it is easy to display the combination of symbols to which the transition lottery will be performed. As a result, the frequency of transition lottery is increased during CZ compared to the normal section, and even if the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, CZ (chance) that makes it easy to shift to the ART gaming state. Zone) can be realized.

Further, FIG. 125 (B) is a diagram showing another example of the ART lottery method in CZ. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination (replay) related to the re-game can be changed by shifting the RT game state. Therefore, by making the winning probabilities of some of the roles (replays) related to the re-game different in the RT game state, the ART game is performed between one RT game state and another RT game state. Transition to state The frequency with which lottery is performed can be different.

Specifically, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), the combination “F_Chillilip” is a setting-unquestioned combination with no setting difference, and as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), this combination. When "F_Chillilip" is determined as an internal winning combination, a lottery for transition to the ART gaming state is performed. Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), although there is no setting difference in the combination “F_chili lip”, the winning probability differs depending on the RT gaming state, and the winning probability differs depending on the RT gaming state, and the winning probability differs in the RT2 gaming state than in the RT1 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning role with a high probability.

Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the frequency of the transition lottery is higher than in the RT1 gaming state, and even when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, the CZ is easy to shift to the ART gaming state. (Chance zone) can be realized. More specifically, the RT2 gaming state can be used as the CZ.

(Another example of how to realize CZ when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
Subsequently, FIG. 125 (C) is a diagram showing another example of a method for realizing CZ. In the method shown in FIG. 125 (C), CZ is realized by using MB (a continuous operation device for a special accessory of the second kind). The pachi-slot machine 1 in this method has a single bonus (hereinafter referred to as “SB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) as a character to be drawn even during the MB, and the termination condition of the MB is (A). More than the specified number of medals have been paid out, (B) SB is established during MB (determined as internal winning combination or winning), (C) RB is established during MB (determined as internal winning combination, Or, one of the three conditions of winning a prize) shall be satisfied. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB is completed, according to the satisfied end conditions. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), when the MB ends due to the establishment of RB, it shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB ends, and when the MB ends due to other conditions, it shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB ends. Will not migrate.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), if the MB ends (so-called puncture) due to the establishment of SB, or if the RB is established before the specified number of medals are paid out, the transition to the ART gaming state is started. It will function as a chance zone (CZ) to win.
As a reel stop control during MB, it is possible to give priority to a combination of symbols for which medals are paid out even in a game in which the RB is determined as an internal winning combination, so that the number of medals to be paid out exceeds the specified number. There may be a game in which there is a game and a game in which the RB is determined as an internal winning role are the same game. In such a case, it is preferable to shift to the ART gaming state on the assumption that the end condition (C) is satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), (1) when the MB wins in the normal section, the gaming state shifts to the MB which is the CZ. Then, (2) when the number of medals exceeding the specified number is paid out in the MB, or when the SB is established, the MB which is the CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, (3) when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB, the MB which is the CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts between the RB flags. Then, (4) when the RB wins between the RB flags, the gaming state shifts to the RB, and then (5) when the RB ends, the ART gaming state is started at the high RT generated by the end of the RB. .. If the RB wins a prize in a game in which the RB in the MB is determined as an internal winning combination, the RB starts from the next game in which the MB ends without going through between the RB flags.

In such a pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of MB (functioning as CZ) in the normal section and the winning probability of RB (triggering to shift to the ART gaming state) in MB are common to all the set values. However, the winning probability of SB (which triggers the end of CZ) in MB may be a common probability for all set values or a different probability depending on the set value. For example, when the winning probability of SB in MB is different depending on the set value, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of SB, and the easier it is for MB to continue for a long time, so that the ART gaming state in CZ (MB) It is possible to raise the degree of expectation of transition to, and to increase the variation of ball ejection specifications.
In addition, the winning probability of RB, which triggers the transition to the ART gaming state, can be set arbitrarily depending on the relationship with other end conditions, but it is better to set the probability that the winning can be expected realistically for better game balance. Therefore, it is preferable that the specified number of sheets is as small as 10 to 30 sheets, and the RB is determined as an internal winning combination in the MB with a relatively high probability.

(Another configuration example of the main control board)
Here, the internal lottery using the internal lottery table and the transition lottery using the transition lottery table are executed on the main control board 71. In the main control board 71, since the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is limited, the variation of the lottery becomes monotonous when the transition lottery is performed in addition to the internal lottery. Therefore, the improvement method of the main control board 71 is shown below.

FIG. 117B is a diagram showing another configuration example of the main control board. In FIG. 117 (B), the main control circuit is provided with a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b. The first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are connected so as to be capable of bidirectional communication by serial communication or the like. Since the configurations of the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are the same as the configurations shown in FIG. 117, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, a plurality of first main control boards 71a and second main control boards 71b are provided as the main control boards, and for example, the first main control board 71a is subjected to internal lottery using the internal lottery table to perform the second main control. By performing the transition lottery using the transition lottery table on the substrate 71b, it is possible to sufficiently secure the capacity of the storage means used for each lottery, and it is possible to perform the lottery with abundant variations.

In addition, in FIG. 117B, the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main control board 71a is used. The configuration may be such that communication is possible only in one direction (from the first main control board 71a to the second main control board 71b) with the upstream and the second main control board 71b as the downstream. By using only one-way communication, it is possible to reduce the communication load as compared with the case of two-way communication.

Further, when the internal lottery and the transition lottery are performed on different boards (first main control board 71a and second main control board 71b), the order in which the internal lottery and the transition lottery are performed is arbitrary. For example, the transition lottery may be performed first on one substrate and then the internal lottery on the other substrate, and conversely, the internal lottery may be performed first on one substrate and then the transition lottery is performed on the other substrate. It may be that. In this case, if the transition lottery is performed first, the result of the internal lottery (internal winning combination) cannot be grasped at the time of the transition lottery, so that the transition lottery is performed in a form that is not affected by the result of the internal lottery. For example, in the case of a specification in which a transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each unit game regardless of the internal winning combination, such a configuration may be used. As a result, even if a fraudulent act of illegally inputting the winning combination information different from the actual internal winning combination is performed, the result of the transition lottery is not affected, so that the fraudulent act of generating an advantageous transition lottery result is generated. Can be suppressed. Further, when the transition lottery is performed first, since the internal winning combination is irrelevant, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set values can be performed only by performing the lottery with no difference in the set values.

On the contrary, when the internal lottery is performed first, the transition lottery may be performed with reference to the internal lottery determined as a result of the internal lottery, or the internal lottery determined as a result of the internal lottery may be performed. The transition lottery may be performed without referring to the role. When the transition lottery is performed with reference to the internal winning combination, the transition lottery can be performed based on the setting unquestioned combination as described above, so that the lottery can be performed based on the information with no difference in the set value, and also internally. When the transition lottery is performed without referring to the winning combination, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set values can be performed by performing the lottery with no difference in the set values.

Further, FIG. 117 (C) is a diagram showing still another configuration example of the main control board. Since what is lacking in the main control board 71 is the capacity of the storage means (main ROM), in FIG. 117 (C), one main control board 71 like the first main ROM 32a and the second main ROM 32b. A plurality of main ROMs are provided on the top. In this case, for example, by storing various tables used for the internal lottery in the first main ROM 32a and storing various tables used for the transition lottery in the second main ROM 32b, the storage means used for each lottery can be stored. Sufficient capacity can be secured, and lottery with a wide variety can be performed.

(Transition from specific section to normal section)
Subsequently, returning to FIG. 122, the transition from the specific section to the normal section will be described. The transition from the specific section to the normal section occurs when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. As the end condition of the specific section, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, the difference number, etc. can be used. .. Further, the end condition may be different depending on the type of the specific section, and for example, the end condition may be different between the CZ and the ART gaming state.

As described above, the specific section basically ends when the end condition is satisfied, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, exceptionally, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the end condition is not satisfied. , The transition from the specific section to the normal section (limit processing), and even when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, if the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is not performed, then the guaranteed number of times It continues without ending the specific section until the navigation is performed, and shifts from the specific section to the normal section according to the guaranteed number of navigations (navigation guarantee processing).

(Limit processing)
Here, the limit processing in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section, and FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a flow of limit processing in a specific section.
In a pachislot machine, if a specific section such as CZ or ART game state is continuously performed for a long period of time, the profit gained by the player during the specific section will increase and the overall profit will be balanced. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the profit that the player gets during the normal section, which increases the gambling of the game. Therefore, in recent years, it has been required to limit the duration of the advantageous state for the player to a certain period. The limit process is a process of limiting the duration of a specific section, which is advantageous for the player, to a certain period (for example, 1500 games).

(How to count the number of limit games)
First, with reference to FIG. 126, a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section when performing limit processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 126 (A), when the specific section continues, the main control board 71 counts the number of continuous games (number of limit games). For example, when the ART game state is continuous, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games by adding the number of continuous games by 1 for each game. Further, for example, when the transition from the normal section to the CZ and then the transition to the ART gaming state, the specific section includes at least the CZ and the ART gaming state as described above, so that the main control board 71 is a continuation game of the CZ. The sum of the number and the number of continuous games in the ART gaming state that are continuously performed thereafter is counted as the number of limit games.

By the way, depending on the pachi-slot machine, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), when shifting to the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the waiting section may be sandwiched without immediately shifting. For example, in a pachi-slot machine in which the RT gaming state is different between the normal section and the specific section, it is necessary to start the specific section after the RT gaming state is changed, so that the waiting section may be inserted once. As a specific case, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a waiting section may be inserted when transitioning from a normal section to a specific section, and a bonus (feature) is given during the specific section. When activated, a waiting section may be inserted when returning to a specific section after the end of the bonus.

The main control board 71 may or may not count such a standby section as the number of limit games. That is, the main control board 71 may count the games for the number of times "A1" to "An" in FIG. 126 (B) as the number of limit games, or may not count them as the number of limit games. good.

Further, the main control board 71 may have different counts as the number of limit games depending on the type of the standby section. For example, when the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the specific section sandwiched between the normal section and the specific section is not counted as the number of limit games, and the bonus (feature) is activated during the specific section. In this case, the waiting section sandwiched when returning to the specific section after the end of the bonus may be counted as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in a series of advantageous states as a whole.

Further, the main control board 71 may be different in whether or not to count as the number of limit games according to the type of notification (navigation) performed during the standby section. When a waiting section is provided to transition the RT gaming state, it is necessary to notify at least to transition the RT gaming state during the waiting section, but the notification regarding the push order combination related to the increase or decrease of medals is not always required. You don't have to do it. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, since the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes changes the RT gaming state, it is necessary to notify the push order role "push order bell" related to the increase or decrease of medals. When the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is controlled so that the RT game state is not changed, the push order combination "push order bell" related to the increase / decrease of medals does not necessarily have to be notified during the waiting section.

Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the waiting section for notifying the push order combination related to the increase / decrease of medals as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in an advantageous state for the player, and pushes related to the increase / decrease of medals. The waiting section in which the notification of the order combination is not performed may not be counted as the number of limit games.

Further, depending on the pachi-slot machine, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), when the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the bonus flag is set during the specific section. There may be a gap and a bonus state. The main control board 71 may or may not count the games between these flags and in the bonus state as the number of limit games. That is, the main control board 71 counts the games for the number of times "C1" to "Cn" in FIG. 126C and the games for the number of times "D1" to "Dn" as the number of limit games. Also, it may not be counted as the number of limit games.

In this case, the main control board 71 may count the games between the flags as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may not be counted as the number of limit games, and conversely, between the flags. The games in the middle may not be counted as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games. Further, both the game during the flag and the game in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games, and conversely, both may not be counted as the number of limit games.

Further, the main control board 71 may be different in whether or not to count as the number of limit games according to the type of notification (navigation) performed between the flags. Specifically, the main control board 71 counts the number of medals as the number of limit games while the flags for notifying the push order combination related to the increase / decrease of medals are in an advantageous state for the player. The number of limit games may not be counted during the period between the flags that do not notify the push order combination related to the increase / decrease.

Further, the main control board 71 may be different in whether or not to count as the number of limit games according to the type of notification (navigation) performed during the bonus state. Depending on the pachislot machine, it may be possible to win a push order role (that is, a role in which the number of medals paid out differs depending on the push order) even during the bonus state. In such a pachi-slot machine, the player can obtain more profit by notifying the push order combination during the bonus state. Therefore, when the main control board 71 notifies the player of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the bonus state, the game in the bonus state is counted as the number of limit games, which is advantageous to the player during the bonus state. If the mode of the stop operation is not notified, the games in the bonus state may not be counted as the number of limit games.

(Flow of limit processing)
Subsequently, the flow of limit processing will be described with reference to FIG. 127. As shown in FIG. 127 (A), when the number of limit games counted according to the above-mentioned counting method reaches a certain number of games (for example, 1500 games), the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Let me. That is, when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even if the number of games, the number of navigations, etc. still remain (when the end condition is not satisfied). ..

Then, at the end of the specific section, the main control board 71 performs an initialization process for initializing the values of variables related to the generation of notification (navigation). In this initialization process, the RT gaming state may be maintained as it is, or may be initialized to RT0, which is a low RT state. For example, in the RT game state for the ART game state, the RT game state ends when the specified number of games are exhausted or the bonus is won without shifting to the RT game state by combining symbols such as bell spills and fall replays. In this case, even if the navigation is not generated due to the limit processing, the high RT state that is advantageous to the player continues. Therefore, as the latter specification, it is desirable to set the game state with a low replay probability. In particular, when the specified number of games is a large value such as 6000 games and the RT game state is such that it will continue until the next bonus, the RT game state can be dropped by the limit processing to appropriately suppress the gambling. can.

When the limit processing is performed in this way, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the status display 147b until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, and the specific section ends. Then, the status display 147b is turned off. Further, when the main control board 71 ends the specific section by the limit process, the limit lamp 148 is turned on for a predetermined period thereafter. As for the predetermined period, when the limit processing is performed at the end of the game in which the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, for example, it may be during the next game of the game in which the limit processing is performed. Further, as described above, the main control board 71 may blink the limit lamp 148 when the limit processing is about to be activated, and notify the player that the limit processing is about to be activated.

Here, for example, when counting the games in the bonus state as the number of limit games, the number of limit games may reach a certain number during the bonus state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the main control board 71 may perform limit processing even in the bonus state to shift the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), the main control board 71 may perform the limit process at the timing when the bonus ends without performing the limit process during the bonus state. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 127 (B), the gaming state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, and in the example shown in FIG. 127 (C), the limit is reached. The gaming state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the bonus state ends, not at the timing when the number of games reaches a certain number of games.

Of course, when counting as the number of limit games during the waiting section of a specific section or between the flags of the bonus, the number of limit games reaches a certain number during the waiting section or between the flags. Then, the limit processing may be performed even during the waiting section or between the flags, and the timing of shifting from the waiting section to the specific section after the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, or the number of limit games is set. After reaching a certain number of games, limit processing may be performed at the timing of shifting from between flags to a specific section through a bonus state.

(Signal output to external device during limit processing)
Further, when the specific section is completed by the limit process, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal to that effect to an external device (data counter or hall computer). By receiving the output of this signal, the hall side can grasp that the limit processing has been performed in the pachi-slot machine, and can grasp new information that could not be grasped in the past.
When the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games during the bonus state, the main control board 71 is an external device at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games (that is, in the bonus state). A predetermined signal may be output to the external device at the timing when the bonus state ends (that is, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal to the external device (that is, the main control board 71 is in the bonus state during the specific section). When the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, a predetermined signal may be output to an external device at the end of the bonus state).

Further, the main control board 71 is not only a signal (limit signal) indicating that the limit processing is performed when the limit processing is performed more times than normally expected in one pachi-slot machine 1. , A signal (error signal) indicating that the limit processing has been performed more times than expected may also be output to the external device. Specifically, the main control board 71 is specified to the outside when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games (that is, the number of times the limit process is performed) reaches a predetermined number of times within a specific period. Output a signal. As an example, when the limit processing is performed more times than expected between the time when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and the time when the power is turned off, the main control board 71 also sends an error signal to the external device together with the limit signal. Output. This makes it possible for the hall side to grasp that, for example, when the limit processing is performed an unusual number of times such as 10 times in a day.

(Navigation guarantee processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 128, the navigation guarantee process in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a flow of navigation guarantee processing at the end of a specific section.
In the case of a pachislot machine that manages the end condition of a specific section based on the number of games, if the number of times the winning combination to be notified (for example, push order bell, etc.) is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific section is small, There are few medals to be paid out, and the player may feel a sense of loss. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when shifting to a specific section, the minimum number of navigations is guaranteed, and the navigation is continued without ending the specific section until the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

Here, in FIG. 128, the end condition of the specific section is managed by the number of games, and in FIGS. 128 (A) to 128 (C), the end condition of the specific section is satisfied at the end of 50 games. It is assumed that there is. In the example shown in FIG. 128 (A), when the specific section continues for 50 games (that is, the end condition is satisfied), the notification (navigation) for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed. In such a case, the main control board 71 continues the specific section even if the end condition is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 128 (A), after that, the winning combination (for example, the push order bell) to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination in the 54th game, and the combination of the notification target is notified. When the main control board 71 is notified for the guaranteed number of times in connection with this notification, the main control board 71 ends the specific section. On the other hand, the main control board 71 continues without ending the specific section if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed even by the notification after satisfying the end condition of the specific section.

By the way, in the pachi-slot machine, as push order roles, a plurality of types of push order roles in which the number of medals to be paid out at the time of the correct push order is different are provided, and the main control board 71 is used for these push order roles during a specific section. May inform you of the correct push order. As multiple types of push order, for example, even if the correct answer is given in the push order, the number of medals does not increase (that is, the number of payouts is less than or equal to the number of inserts), or the increase of medals is extremely small (for example, payout at the time of 3 bets). A push order combination (for example, the number of medals paid out at the time of 3 bets is 9) can be considered. It should be noted that, regardless of the push order combination, when the answer is incorrect in the push order, the number of medals paid out is smaller than when the correct answer is given in the push order, or the number of medals paid out is 0 in common.

From the player's point of view, even if the medals do not increase or the increase is extremely small when the push order is answered correctly, the total number of medals to be acquired during the specific section does not increase. Does not need to guarantee the number of navigations during a specific section. On the other hand, for the push order role, in which the number of medals increases when the push order is correct, the total number of medals acquired during the specific section is affected, so the player is guaranteed the number of navigations during the specific section. Is preferable.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of types of push order combinations in which the number of medals paid out at the correct answer in the push order is different, only the push order combination in which the number of payouts at the time of the correct answer in the push order is larger than the number of inserted medals. The number of navigations may be guaranteed, and the number of navigations may not be guaranteed for the push order combination in which the number of payouts at the time of the correct answer is less than or equal to the number of input pieces. In addition, among multiple types of push order combinations with different numbers of medals paid out when the push order is correct, only the push order combination with the largest number of payouts when the push order is correct is guaranteed the number of navigations, and other push order roles. As for, the number of navigations may not be guaranteed.

Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the number of navigations when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied in a situation where the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section. Regardless of the number of notifications to the unguaranteed push order combination, the specific section is ended on the condition that the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. On the other hand, the main control board 71 is in a situation where the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section, and if the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, the specific section Is continued without ending, and then the specific section is terminated at the timing when the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is performed for the guaranteed number of times.

By doing so, the number of notifications (navigation) about the push order role that affects the total number of medals acquired in a specific section is guaranteed, so that the loss felt by the player can be reduced. ..

Subsequently, a case where the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without being notified for the guaranteed number of times while sandwiching the bonus state will be described. In FIGS. 128 (B) and 128 (C), when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied (at the end of 50 games), the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet, but during the specific section before the end condition is satisfied. An example of transitioning to the bonus state once is shown.

Since the bonus state is basically a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it can be considered that the player is given a certain profit when looking at the specific section as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), when the main control board 71 satisfies the end condition of the specific section, even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet, the main control board 71 is in the specific section. When the state has been changed to the bonus state even once, the specific section may be terminated by satisfying the end condition of the specific section.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), when the main control board 71 satisfies the end condition of the specific section, if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet, the main control board 71 is in the specific section. Regardless of whether or not the system has transitioned to the bonus state, the specific section may be continued until the guaranteed number of notifications is given, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the guaranteed number of notifications are given. good.

Subsequently, a case where the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games without being notified for the guaranteed number of times will be described. If the specific section continues until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player. Therefore, the main control board 71 is shown in FIG. 128 (D). As shown, when the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the specific section may be terminated even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), even if the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 has not yet been notified for the guaranteed number of games. The specific section may be continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

In addition, when the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed by the navigation guarantee process, it is arbitrary whether or not the so-called additional lottery is performed during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. That is, the main control board 71 may perform additional lottery until the end condition is satisfied during the specific section, but may not perform additional lottery even during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. On the contrary, the main control board 71 may perform additional lottery during the period from when the termination condition is satisfied until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

Further, when the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed by the navigation guarantee process, the normal screen is returned to the normal screen at the timing when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied on the liquid crystal display device such as the display unit 100, and then. When the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order notification (navigation) may be performed on this normal screen. That is, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without being notified for the guaranteed number of times, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the status display 147b, but the sub control board 72 is the display screen in the specific section. Switch the display screen to the display screen during the normal section. After that, when the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies the push order via the notification lamp 147a of the instruction monitor 147, and the sub control board 72 notifies the push order combination. , The push order is notified on the normal screen. Then, when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, the main control board 71 may turn off the status display 147b.

<Outline of each game state>
The outline of the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 123, an outline of each gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 123, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is roughly classified into a normal section, a standby section, and a specific section. The normal section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and the specific section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Further, the waiting section is a state after winning the lottery for transition to a specific section and before shifting from the normal section to the specific section.

In the normal section, the waiting section, and the specific section, the winning combination related to the bonus is not determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus is activated, depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is won or whether or not the bonus is activated. Set to the probability that the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus is not activated, and the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. There is no difference between the "bonus state (no setting difference)" in which the bonus is operating according to the bonus combination, and the "bonus according to the bonus combination in which the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is different" is operating. Bonus state (with setting difference) "and the game state of.

As shown in FIG. 123, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 is , The status indicator 147b is turned off, and when the combination related to the notification is determined as the internal winning combination, these combinations are grouped and transmitted to the sub-control board 72. Specifically, when any of the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st", "F_3 choice bell_2nd", and "F_3 choice bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 groups these roles. Assuming that the winning combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, information is transmitted to the sub-control board 72.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" and "bonus state (no setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 draws a lottery for transition to a specific section based on the information that there is no difference in the set value. On the other hand, in the "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the normal section, the main control board 71 does not perform the transition lottery to the specific section. Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 continues the specific section. No additional lottery for the period or notification at the time of winning the push order will be given.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 is the state display 147b. Turn on. The main control board 71 may light the state indicator 147b in different modes during the standby section and during the specific section.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 wins the push order. It may or may not be notified of the order of pressing the correct answer of the time. When notifying the correct push order, the main control board 71 transmits to the sub control board 72 without grouping the roles related to the notification. Specifically, when any of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st", "F_3 selection bell_2nd", and "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 actually has the internal winning combination. Information that can identify the type of combination determined as is transmitted to the sub-control board 72. On the other hand, when the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is not performed, the main control board 71 groups the roles related to the notification and transmits the combination to the sub control board 72.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 wins. The transition lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the transition lottery may be performed for the specific section different from the specific section to be won). Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 does not perform additional lottery for the duration of the specific section. In the "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the standby section, the main control board 71 may and may perform an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value. It may or may not be.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section, the main control board 71 is the state display 147b. Is lit, and the correct push order is notified when the push order is won. Therefore, the main control board 71 serves as a notification in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 72 without grouping.

In addition, the main control board 71 wins in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section. The transition lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the transition lottery may be performed for the specific section different from the specific section to be won). In addition, the main control board 71 adds the duration of the specific section based on the information that there is no difference in the set value in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" and "bonus state (no setting difference)" of the specific section. While the lottery is performed, the additional lottery for the duration of the specific section is not performed in the "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the specific section.

In addition, the main control board 71 may perform a lottery for shifting to a specific section only at the time of 3 bets, or a lottery for adding a duration of a specific section, and may not perform these lottery at the time of 1 bet or 2 bets.

<Output of the transition lottery result to an external device>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131, the flow when the result of the transition lottery to the specific section is output from the pachi-slot machine to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer will be described.

At the amusement store, external devices such as a data counter and a hall computer are installed together with the pachislot machine. For example, when the bonus state starts in the pachislot machine, a signal is output from the pachislot machine to the data counter and data is output. Count the number of bonuses at the counter. In the conventional pachi-slot machine, the lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side, so that the main control board 71 is an event that can be recognized on the main (main control board 71) side (for example, in the RT state). The lottery result was estimated from the transition and the stop operation was performed multiple times in a specific push order, and the signal was output to the external device based on the estimation. However, in such a conventional method, the timing of outputting the winning of the transition lottery is delayed by several games from the timing of the actual winning, and the specific push order is accidentally repeated by the player's stop operation. If this happens, it is presumed that the winner has won the transition lottery even though the lottery has not been won, and as a result, an erroneous signal may be output.
In addition, in the specification that outputs a signal based on the transition of the RT game state, when the bonus is subtracted during ART, the signal is also displayed when the RT game state at the end of the bonus is returned to the RT game state for ART after the bonus is exhausted. Was sometimes output. In such a case, the signal is output more than the number of winnings and the number of digested sets of the accurate ART, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the accurate information when guessing the setting or selecting the machine. Was occurring.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery to a specific section itself is output to the external device as it is, not from the estimation result, so that the result of the transition lottery is accurately output to the external device. Can be output.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output timing pattern to an external device. In FIG. 129, the timing T1 is the start time of the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section (for example, the ART game state), the period P1 is the period between one game of the game, and the period P2 is. This is the period between one game of the next game.

In the example shown in FIG. 129, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for transition to the specific section is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, so that the main control board 71 can grasp that the transfer lottery has been won from the time of the timing T1. ..

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery is output to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game period P1 in which the transition lottery is won. For example, in the output pattern example A, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at the start of the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section (that is, when the start lever 6 is operated). is doing. Similarly, in the output pattern example B, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at the start of reel rotation of the game, and in the output pattern example C, the external device is used during the first stop operation of the game. The result of the transition lottery is output to the device, and in the output pattern example D, the result of the transition lottery is output to the external device when all the reels of the game are stopped.

Further, as shown in the output pattern examples E and F, the main control board 71 can also output the result of the transition lottery to the external device in the game after the game won in the transition lottery. For example, in the output pattern example E, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at the time of inserting the medal for the next game of the game won in the transition lottery. Further, in the output pattern example F, the main control board 71 is selected for a transfer lottery to an external device during an arbitrary game in which a plurality of games are subsequently played (for example, at the start of a game in which a specific section starts). The result is output.

Note that the output pattern example shown in FIG. 129 is only an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery is displayed to the external device at an arbitrary timing after the transition lottery to the specific section is won. Can be output.

Further, by arbitrarily combining the lighting pattern example of the state display 147b shown in FIG. 120 and the signal output pattern example to the external device shown in FIG. 129, it is possible to realize a novel fun that has never been seen before. Specifically, it may be possible to output a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won to the external device before the status display 147b is turned on, and conversely, the external device may be turned on after the status display 147b is turned on. A signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device, or a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device at the same time as the status indicator 147b is turned on. good.

For example, by outputting the signal to the external device before the status display 147b, the counter is updated in the external device (data counter) before the status display 147b is turned on, so that the pachislot machine It is possible to detect the transition of a specific section from an external device other than 1. Further, for example, in consideration of the processing time in the external device, the signal to the external device is output slightly before the lighting of the status display 147b, so that the status display 147b is lit (notification in the pachi-slot machine 1). The timing can be matched with the update timing of the external device (notification other than the pachi-slot machine 1), and the player's discomfort can be reduced.

In addition, for example, when there are many types of bonuses and there is no free output pin in the 8-pin signal line that outputs a signal to an external device, when the output pin from the external centralized terminal board 73 is limited. The main control board 71 may not output a signal to an external device even when the transition lottery is won.

Further, in the above embodiment, the signal is output when the transition lottery is won, but the signal may be output when a specific section such as ART continues. For example, in the case of a game specification in which one set of 30 games is set and the number of sets is managed, a signal is output when the transition lottery is won (so-called first hit), and two sets are output after the first set of 30 games is exhausted. It is possible to output an external signal at the timing when the eyes are started. By outputting the signal in this way, the exact number of sets can be grasped. Further, the signal for the first hit and the signal for the continuation may be regarded as different signals, and the number of first hits and the number of continuations may be accurately grasped by the data counter. In this case, the accuracy of grasping the game situation can be further improved. ..

In such a game machine that manages the number of sets, if the bonus state starts in the middle of the ART game state, a pachislot machine or a pachislot machine that restarts the game from the number of remaining games from the time when the bonus is won in the set after the bonus ends. , There is a pachislot machine that starts a new set from the beginning after the bonus ends.
In the former case, for example, if 25 games out of 30 games in one set of ART game state are consumed and the bonus state starts, the number of remaining games after the bonus ends is 5 games (remaining at the time of bonus winning). The ART game state is restarted from the number of games). In such a case, it is desirable not to output a signal when the ART is restarted because one set is simply separated in the middle. On the other hand, in the latter case, as a benefit of winning the bonus during the ART game state, one set of ART is substantially added, so it is desirable to output a signal when the ART is restarted. The same signal output processing can be applied not only to the type of ART in which the predetermined number of games is set as one set, but also to the type of managing the number of ART sets based on the difference number of games and the number of navigations.

It should be noted that a pachi-slot machine having both a pattern of restarting the game from the number of games remaining from the time of winning the bonus in the set after the end of the bonus and a pattern of starting a new set from the beginning after the end of the bonus can be considered. For example, if the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than the predetermined value and the bonus is won, one set is added as a remedy, and if the number of remaining games is more than the predetermined value and the bonus is won, the remaining after the bonus ends. Specifications such as restarting the game from the number of games can be considered.

In such a pachi-slot machine, the main control board 71 controls the signal output according to the presence or absence of the addition of ART at the time of winning the bonus. That is, when the addition of ART occurs at the time of winning the bonus, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when the ART gaming state is restarted after the end of the bonus, and when the addition of ART does not occur at the time of winning the bonus. The main control board 71 does not output a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the end of the bonus. More specifically, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than a predetermined value, it is assumed that an additional ART has occurred and a signal output is output when the ART is restarted after the bonus ends. If the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the signal is not output when the ART is restarted after the bonus is completed, assuming that the ART has not been added.
In other words, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than the predetermined value, the ART gaming state of a set different from the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. And output a signal to the outside. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 resumes the ART game state of the same set as the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. At the same time, no signal is output to the outside.

Further, it may be determined whether or not the signal is output according to not only whether or not the ART is added at the time of winning the bonus but also whether or not the ART is added from the bonus winning to the start of the ART.

The signal output described so far is a signal in which the value of the data counter is increased by 1 by one output, but when starting a high-value ART gaming state, the data counter is according to the magnitude of the value. It may be a signal in which a plurality of values of are increased. For example, when a long ART consisting of 90 games per set is started, which is usually an ART of 30 games per set, a signal may be output so that the value of the data counter increases by 3. ..
In addition, although it is usually an ART of 30 games per set, when starting an ART that continues until the next bonus, a signal is output so that the value of the data counter increases according to the average number of games up to the bonus win. May be good. For example, when the winning probability of the bonus is 1/150, the average number of continuous games is 150 games, which corresponds to 5 sets, so that a signal in which the value of the data counter increases by 5 is output. In this case, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the bonus, the average number of continuous games determined from the bonus probability of a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) regardless of the setting so that the setting is not specified. Outputs a signal according to. By doing so, even if the pachi-slot machine has a plurality of ART gaming states having different values at the start, it becomes easy to determine after the fact how much profit has been obtained from the data counter or the like. The signal in which the value of the data counter rises by a plurality of values may be a signal in which a signal for raising the value by one is transmitted multiple times at intervals so that an external device can identify it, or a dedicated signal for raising the value by a plurality of values. May be transmitted in one shot.

(Example of production in cooperation with an external device)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, an example of an effect performed in cooperation with an external device when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won will be described. FIG. 130 shows an example of an effect in which a signal is output to an external device during a game in which a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, and FIG. 131 shows an external game in a game after winning a lottery for transition to a specific section. An example of production when a signal is output to a device is shown.

(Production example 1)
In the effect example 1 shown in FIG. 130, in the game winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 reversely rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R prior to the start of reel rotation, and then rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R forward. The game is progressing by letting it. In this production example 1, the timing T1 is the timing at which the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the timing T2 is the timing at which the forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started (that is, at the start of reel rotation). ), And the timing T3 is when all reels of the game are stopped. Further, the main control board 71 lights the status display 147b at the timing of the lighting pattern example 4 (when all reels are stopped), and externally indicates that the transition lottery has been won at the timing of the output pattern example B (when the reel rotation starts). Output to the device.

As shown in the timing T1, in the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section, the main control board 71 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the operation of the start lever 6. At this time, the main control board 71 first rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the opposite direction. Further, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to display that attention is paid to the data counter installed on the upper part of the pachi-slot machine 1, and also displays a countdown of 5 seconds. Here, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R means that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate from the bottom to the top, so that the player sees the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. As a result, the line of sight is guided from the bottom to the top. Further, in addition to guiding the line of sight by the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the display unit 100 also attracts the attention of the data counter, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the data counter.

At timing T1 to timing T2, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to proceed with the countdown. After that, at the timing T2, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the forward direction, and outputs a signal to the data counter indicating that the transition lottery has been won. Upon receiving this signal, the data counter updates the counter and displays "hit" or the like.

As described above, in the production example 1, the line of sight is guided to the data counter by using the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display by the display unit 100, and then a signal is output to the data counter. , Notifies that the player has won the lottery for transition to a specific section on the data counter that gathers the line of sight of the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect linked with not only the pachi-slot machine 1 but also an external device (data counter).

Further, in the production example 1, when the timing T3 is reached, the main control board 71 turns on the status display 147b. The sub-control board 72 displays an image or the like indicating that the display unit 100 has won a specific section in accordance with the lighting timing of the status display 147b. As described above, in the effect example 1, various effects can be performed in conjunction with each other by performing the effect according to the lighting timing of the status display 147b and the output timing of the signal to the external device, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. Can be done.

(Production example 2)
Subsequently, an effect example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 131. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART game state, the specific section is not started immediately after winning the transition lottery to the specific section, but the specific section is started after a predetermined number of games have passed after winning the transition lottery. In some cases, so-called precursory effects may be performed during this predetermined number of games. By the way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery performed by itself to the external device as it is, as in the output pattern examples A to D shown in FIG. , Even in the game that wins the transition lottery, the result of the transition lottery can be output to the external device. Here, if the result of the transition lottery is output to an external device in the game that wins the transition lottery, the counter is updated on the data counter (external device), so the data is being produced during the precursory effect. The effect result (that is, the success or failure of the transition lottery) is known from the value of the counter, and the interest is lost.

Therefore, in the production example 2 shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game 32 games after the game winning the transition lottery in the specific section. do. Then, as shown in the effect example A, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform a precursory effect during the 32 games. As a result, the value of the data counter is not updated during the 32 games in which the precursory effect is performed, and the player can be interested in the precursory effect.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the transition lottery in a specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game, but the result of the transition lottery from the status indicator 147b during the precursory effect is obtained. It is preferable that the result of the transition lottery is difficult to understand from the status display 147b, because if it can be grasped, the interest will be lost. The method of making the result of the transition lottery from the status display 147b difficult to understand is as described above.

Further, when the registration operation is accepted from the player, the period for performing the precursory effect may be customizable. In the example shown in FIG. 131, the precursory effect is performed for 32 games in the effect example A, but the precursory effect is performed for 16 games in the effect example B, and after that, the winning of the specific section is confirmed. It is decided to perform a standby production later. The standby effect may be, for example, an introduction of a character appearing in the pachi-slot machine 1, a story introduction, or the like, or an effect of suggesting a set value. Further, even when the period of the precursory effect can be customized in this way, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the external device at the same timing regardless of the presence or absence of customization. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 71 is 32 games after the game winning the transition lottery in the specific section, regardless of whether the effect example A is performed or the effect example B is performed. The result of the transition lottery is output to the external device during the game.

<How to secure navigation in a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 132, a navigation securing method for securing the number of times to notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the specific section will be described. In a pachi-slot machine having a specific section such as an ART gaming state, if navigation is not performed during the specific section, the game in the specific section becomes monotonous, which may reduce the interest of the player. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by creating a state in which navigation is easy to be performed in a specific section, it is possible to prevent the game in the specific section from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the timing to start a specific section is set to the start of the bonus state, and during this bonus state, there is a higher probability that the push order role (notification target role) is higher than when the bonus is not activated. Is determined as an internal bonus. Then, when the specific section is also started at the start of the bonus state, the correct push order is notified to the winning push order combination during the bonus state, and the specific section is not started at the start of the bonus state. Does not notify the push order during the bonus state. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which navigation is not performed during a specific section, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the specific section.

In particular, since the timing to start the specific section is the start time of the bonus state, once in the situation where the bonus state is never reached during the specific section, that is, the situation where navigation is easy to be performed during the specific section (bonus state). As a result, the player can receive a certain number of navigations in a specific section.

(Example of how to start a specific section at the start of a bonus)
Here, the method of setting the timing of starting the specific section to the start of the bonus state is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-1), the main control board 71 responds to the fact that the combination related to the bonus, which is a non-setting unquestioned combination, is determined as the internal winning combination (that is, the bonus winning) during the normal section. Then, a transition lottery will be held. Then, when the main control board 71 is in a state of winning this transition lottery and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state and is the main control board. The 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct push order to the push order combination determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed in the state where the main control board 71 has not won the transition lottery, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting a specific section. The control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 do not notify the correct push order even if the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-2), the main control board 71 does not determine the combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination, but serves as the combination related to the bonus which is an unquestioned combination during the normal section. The transition lottery may be performed according to the display (that is, the bonus winning) of the corresponding combination of symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-3), the main control board 71 may perform a transition lottery during the normal section regardless of the winning combination related to the bonus. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to a specific section based on information with no difference in set values during the normal section, and if the transition lottery is won, the transition right to the specific section is performed. Is given. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed thereafter, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state when the transition right is granted, and the main control is performed. The board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct push order to the push order combination determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the transition right is not granted, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting a specific section, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 push forward during the bonus state. Does not notify the correct push order even if is determined as an internal winning combination.

(Data example)
FIG. 132 (B) is an example of a data configuration for realizing a navigation securing method in a specific section. As shown in FIG. 132 (B), during the bonus state, there is a higher probability than in the state other than the bonus state, the push order combination (“F_3 selection combination _1st”, “F_3 selection combination _2nd”, “F_3 selection combination_3rd”. ) Is determined as an internal bonus. For this push order combination, for example, if the correct answer is given in the push order, a combination of symbols for which 9 medals are paid out is displayed, and if the answer is incorrect for the push order, a combination of symbols for which 5 medals are paid out is displayed. It is what is displayed. Further, the bonus state is terminated when, for example, 10 or more medals are paid out.

According to such a data example, when notifying the push order of the correct answer to the push order during the bonus state, the player has 18 medals (= 9 x 2 times) during the bonus state. If the player does not notify the push order of the correct push order during the bonus state, the player can receive 10 cards (= 5 cards x 2 times) during the bonus state. You may not be able to pay out or receive medals.

<Method of realizing precursors using a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134, a method of realizing the precursory effect in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a shift lottery to a specific section is won, the state display 147b is turned on during the game to notify that the shift lottery has been won, so that the effect is performed over a plurality of games. Is not suitable for notifying the result of the transition lottery using. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific section (first specific section) different from the specific section (second specific section) for which the result is reported is used, and a precursory effect is produced during the first specific section. Is to be done.

(Precursor method 1 regarding transition to a specific section)
First, with reference to FIG. 133, one method of realizing a precursory state regarding the transition to the second specific section will be described. In this method, a plurality of specific sections having different durations, a short ART (first specific section) and a long ART (second specific section), are provided, and the game during the short ART is treated as a precursor game related to the transition to the long ART. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, a short ART that continues for a first period (for example, between three games) and a second period that exceeds the first period (for example, for example). A long ART that continues (for 53 games (3 + 50)) is provided, and a lottery for transition to a short ART or a long ART is performed during a normal section. FIG. 133 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table used for the transition lottery. The main control board 71 performs a lottery for transition to a short ART or a long ART with a probability that does not fluctuate depending on the set value, based on the information (internal winning combination) that does not differ in the set value.

In this transition lottery, if either the short ART or the long ART is won, the pachi-slot machine 1 performs a precursory effect of notifying whether or not the long ART is won during the period in which the short ART continues. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the short ART is won, a precursor effect is performed to notify that the long ART is not won during the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the long ART is won, the long ART is won from the start to the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART. Along with performing a precursory effect to notify that, an effect unique to long ART is performed after this precursory effect.

When the precursor effect is performed using the short ART, since both the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 turns on the status display 147b. That is, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART. Further, when the long ART is won in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the second period, which is the continuation period of the long ART. The main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in different modes for the short ART and the long ART, or may light in the same mode.

Further, the method of outputting a signal to an external device when performing a precursory effect using a short ART is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, and only when it wins the long ART in the transition lottery, it signals to the external device. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device regardless of whether the short ART is won or the long ART is won in the transition lottery.

In addition, as the end condition of the short ART and the long ART, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, the difference number, etc. can be set. Can be used. In this case, the end condition used for the short ART and the end condition used for the long ART may be of the same type or may be different types. The same type means, for example, when the number of games is used as the end condition of the short ART, the number of games is also used as the end condition of the long ART, and the different types are, for example, the end of the short ART. When the number of games is used as the condition, a condition other than the number of games is used as the end condition of the long ART.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 133 (C), an example of the effect in the case of performing the precursory game using the short ART will be described. When the short ART or the long ART is won, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect of, for example, "explosion chance rush" in the display unit 100. This "explosion chance" effect is an effect of notifying the winner of the long ART depending on whether or not the bomb can be detonated during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. In the example shown in FIG. 133, it is assumed that the duration of the short ART is between three games.

If the sub-control board 72 has won the short ART in the transition lottery (that is, if it has not won the long ART), the sub-control board 72 ends the "explosion chance" effect without being able to explode the bomb, and wins the long ART in the transition lottery. If so, perform a production that succeeds in blasting the bomb in the "Bombing Chance" production. It should be noted that the timing at which the bomb is successfully detonated when the long ART is won is arbitrary. For example, if the duration of the short ART is 3 games, the bomb may be successfully detonated in the 1st or 2nd game, or the bomb may be successfully detonated in the 3rd game. You may succeed in exploding the bomb at the beginning of the fourth game.

Further, since the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 can notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode during the precursory effect. In the example shown in FIG. 133 (C), since the push order combination is won during the "explosion chance" effect, which is the precursor effect of the long ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are in the push order role. On the other hand, the order of pushing the correct answer is notified. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player during the precursory effect, so that the player is given a sense of loss during the precursory effect that should enhance the interest of the game. There is no such thing as a hobby.

(Precursor method 2 regarding transition to a specific section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 134, another method of the precursor realization method regarding the transition to the second specific section will be described. In the above-mentioned precursor method 1, since the result of the transition lottery has already been determined at the start of the “explosion chance” effect, the result of the precursor effect has already been determined at the start of the precursor game. Another method described below is a method in which the result of the precursory effect can be determined during the precursory game. In this method, a plurality of specific sections of CZ (first specific section) and ART gaming state (second specific section) are provided, and the game in CZ is treated as a precursory game related to the transition to the ART gaming state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, the transfer lottery to the CZ is performed during the normal section, and the transfer lottery to the ART is performed during the CZ. FIG. 134 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table used for the transition lottery. In the main control board 71, the lottery for shifting to the CZ is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed based on the combination of symbols. Specifically, when the combination of bell spilled eyes or the first piece of symbols is displayed on the main control board 71, the transition to the ART gaming state is not performed, and the combination of bell symbols is displayed. , ART game state transition lottery is performed. Then, by notifying the push order bell of the correct push order during the CZ, it is possible to easily shift to the ART gaming state during the CZ.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the CZ is won in the transition lottery performed during the normal section, the “explosion chance” effect shown in FIG. 134 (C) is produced. This "explosion chance" effect continues, for example, for three games, and if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination during these three games, the correct push order is notified, and as a result, the game shifts to the ART game state. You can get a lottery. Then, when the CZ ends without winning the transition lottery to the ART gaming state, the sub-control board 72 ends the "explosion chance" effect without being able to explode the bomb, and shifts to the ART gaming state before the end of the CZ. If the lottery is won, the effect of successfully exploding the bomb is executed in the "explosion chance" effect.

The main control board 71 lights the state display 147b in both the CZ and ART gaming states, but the lighting mode of the state display 147b is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may light the state display 147b in different modes depending on the CZ and the ART gaming state, or may light in the same mode.

Further, the method of outputting the signal to the external device is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the CZ in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, and only when it wins the ART gaming state in the transition lottery, it signals to the external device. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when the CZ is won in the transition lottery and when the ART gaming state is won.

Further, the end conditions of the CZ and ART gaming states are arbitrary, and different types of end conditions may be used, or the same type of end conditions may be used.

Further, as a modification of the above example, a specification in which a short ART or a long ART is started at the start of the so-called gap MB can be considered.
Here, the gap MB is, for example, a combination of medals whose end condition of MB exceeds 14 medals, and a combination of symbols in which 14 medals are paid out or a combination of symbols in which 15 medals are paid out. In the MB in which is displayed, in the state where the notification is performed, in the first game in the MB, the push order in which the combination of the symbols to which 14 medals are paid out will be displayed is notified, and in the next game. , The combination of symbols for which 15 medals will be paid out will be displayed. By notifying the push order, 29 medals can be paid out, but in the state where the notification is not performed, 15 medals will be displayed. A combination of symbols to be paid out is often displayed, and refers to an MB that ends with the payout of 15 medals.

In the above example, it is necessary to keep waiting until the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but if the short ART is started at the start of such a gap MB, the push in the game of starting the short ART and the next game is pushed. Since the order navigation occurs, it is not necessary to keep waiting until the push order role is decided as the internal winning role, and the game is not delayed, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, even if you finish with a short ART, the game will not be delayed due to the gap MB, so you will get more medals than you can get by digesting the number of bell navigations in a normal game, and you can experience the profitable navigation consumption, so you can experience the long ART. It is possible to reduce the disappointment caused by not being able to connect to the game and suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

<How to save the number of navigations>
In a so-called pachislot machine that manages the number of navigations, which uses the number of navigations performed during the specific section as the end condition of the continuation period of the specific section, if the roles to be navigated (the roles to be notified) are concentrated and won. Navigation is concentrated, and as a result, a specific section ends immediately. If the specific section ends immediately, it may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Therefore, in the following, a method of saving the number of navigations will be described with reference to FIG. 135.

When the number of navigations is used as the end condition of the continuation period of the specific section, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player even during the bonus state is notified. A necessary bonus (MB1) and a bonus (MB2) that do not require notification of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the bonus state are provided. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the combination of symbols corresponding to MB1 is displayed, and the MB2 gaming state in which the combination of symbols corresponding to MB2 is displayed. Start.

As shown in FIG. 135 (B), during the MB1 game state, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols having different payout numbers according to the push order, “F_maintenance _1st + all small combinations” and “F_maintenance”. While "Rip_2nd + All Small Combinations" and "F_Maintenance Lip_3rd + All Small Combinations" are determined as internal winning combinations, only the combinations that display the same combination of symbols with the same number of payouts are displayed during the MB2 game state. Determined as the winning role. Then, during the MB1 game state, the number of payouts may differ depending on the push order. Therefore, when these combinations are determined as the internal winning combinations, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are in the correct push order. Notify (pushing order in which 9-card combination is displayed).

By doing so, if the MB1 gaming state starts during the specific section, the game will be played while consuming the number of navigations, but if the MB2 gaming state can be started during the specific section. Can play a game without consuming the number of navigations, and can reduce the consumption speed of the number of navigations.

In the MB1 game state, a combination in which a combination of symbols having different payout numbers is displayed according to the push order is determined as an internal winning combination, while in the MB2 game state, the payout number is the same regardless of the push order. The method of realizing that only the winning combination for which the combination is displayed is determined as the internal winning combination is arbitrary. As an example, the MB1 game state is set as the game state dedicated to 3 bets, and during the MB1 game state, only the winning combination related to the replay is individually drawn, and when all the small winning combinations are determined as the internal winning combination, the individual lottery is performed. The stop control is different depending on the type of replay that has been set. As a result, during the MB1 gaming state, it is possible to determine as the internal winning combination a combination in which a combination of symbols having different payout numbers is displayed according to the pressing order. On the other hand, the MB2 game state is set to the game state dedicated to 2 bets, and the number of medals paid out is the same for all small wins at the time of 2 bets. As a result, during the MB2 game state, only the winning combination in which the combination of symbols having the same payout number is displayed regardless of the pushing order can be determined as the internal winning combination.

<Individual management of Lipnavi and Bellnavi>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141, a method of individually managing the lip navigator and the bell navigator in the specific section will be described. In conventional pachislot machines, it is common to notify both the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state and the notification for increasing the number of medals during a specific section. By individually managing the above, it is possible to realize a new playability that has never existed before.

(Game example 1)
First, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, a game example 1 in which the Lip Navi and the Bell Navi are individually managed will be described. This game example 1 has a plurality of types of specific sections, Lipnavi AT and Bernavi AT, as specific sections. In the Lipnavi AT, the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state is performed, but the notification for increasing the medals is not performed. Further, in the Bernavi AT, at least a notification for increasing the number of medals is performed, and a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state is performed as necessary.

FIG. 136 (A) is a game flow in Game Example 1. As shown in FIG. 136 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with three types of RT gaming states, an RT0 gaming state to an RT3 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. .. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state in which the player stays after the bonus ends, the initialization process, the setting change, and the like. Further, the RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state mainly used in a normal game. In addition, the RT2 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, and if it shifts according to the notification, it is treated as a Lipnavi AT, and if it shifts regardless of the notification. Is a game state that is treated as a normal game. Further, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, and is a gaming state mainly used in the Bernavi AT.

There is a possibility of shifting from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the bell spilled symbols is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is the combination of the push order roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". Is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the push order in the game in which "" is determined as the internal winning combination. In a game in which the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are determined as internal winning roles, when the correct answer is in the push order, the combination of bell symbols is displayed and nine medals are paid out.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT1 game state, the winning combination “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321”, which are push order combinations, are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed.

Further, there is a possibility that the RT2 gaming state may shift to the RT1 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the bell spilled eyes or the symbol of the RT1 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT2 game state, the winning combination “F_maintenance rip_123” to “F_maintenance rip_321”, which are push order combinations, are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pushing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed. When the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed by the correct answer in the push order, the main control board 71 maintains the game state in the RT2 game state, and the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed by the incorrect answer in the push order. In that case, the gaming state is changed from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT2 game state, the winning combination “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321”, which are push order combinations, is used as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed. When the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed by the correct answer in the push order, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and the combination of the symbols of the replay is changed by the incorrect answer in the push order. If it is displayed, the gaming state is maintained in the RT2 gaming state.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the bell spilled eyes or the symbol of the RT1 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. That is, in the game in which the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 displays a combination of bell symbols by the correct answer in the push order. While paying out 9 medals, the game state is maintained in the RT3 game state, and if a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed due to an incorrect push order, the number (or 0) is less than 9. While paying out the medals, the gaming state is changed from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 137 (C), in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the Lipnavi AT based on the internal winning combination. It should be noted that this transition lottery table indicates that the transition lottery to the Lipnavi AT is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the type of the combination for which the transition lottery is to be performed is merely an example.

Further, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 137 (C), in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the Bernavi AT based on the combination of the displayed symbols. In this game example 1, the main control board 71 performs a transfer lottery to the Bernavi AT only when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed. Be sure to win the Bernavi AT.

In the illustrated example, the lottery for the transition to the Bernavi AT is determined by displaying the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip, that is, the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. It is supposed to be performed on the condition that the correct answer is given in the push order in the played game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board 71 simply contains the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321". If it is decided as the winning combination, a lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT may be performed.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 determines the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination during the RT2 gaming state, and the combination "" during the other RT gaming states. F_RT3 transition rip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition rip_321 "are not determined as an internal winning combination, or during other RT gaming states, there is a lower probability than during RT2 gaming state, and the roles" F_RT3 transition rip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition rip_321 " Is determined as an internal winning role. Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the lottery for shifting to the Bell Navi AT is performed more frequently than in the other RT gaming states, and the main control board 71 is in the other RT gaming states (particularly, the RT1 gaming state) during the RT2 gaming state. ) More frequently, the lottery for transition to Bernavi AT will be performed.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 (main control board 71 and sub-control board 72), when neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bernavi AT is won, the player is notified of the advantageous stop operation mode (correct answer pressing order). do not do. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the Lipnavi AT is won, the notification associated with the Lipnavi AT is performed, and when the Bernavi AT is won, the notification associated with the Bernavi AT is performed.

Specifically, in the case of winning the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the roles "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to. When either "F_RT3 transition lip_321" or the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the order of pressing the correct answer is notified. On the other hand, even in the case of winning the Lipnavi AT, one of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination for the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Even if it is done, the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified.

Further, in the case of winning the Bell Navi AT, one of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination for the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. , Notify the correct push order. In the case of winning the Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the roles "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition". When either "Rip_321" or the combination "F_Maintenance Lip_123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order may be notified or may not be notified.

By doing so, the Lipnavi AT can be treated as a specific section for notifying the RT2 game state in which the frequency of the transition to the Bernavi AT is high, and the medal can be awarded during the Bernavi AT. It can be treated as a specific section for notifying to increase. As described above, in Game Example 1, since the Lipnavi AT and the Bernavi AT have specific sections having different roles, the meaning of the notification differs depending on the type of the specific section for the player. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest without the notification becoming monotonous.

Further, during the Lipnavi AT, the notification for increasing the number of medals is not performed, so that the increase in medals can be suppressed. With pachislot machines, it is necessary to balance the profits of the player and the game store, but if the period of increase in medals is long, the profits that the player will get will be excessive, making it difficult to move to a specific section. It is necessary to balance profits in other parts. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1, there is a specific section called the Lipnavi AT, which does not notify to increase the number of medals, in addition to the Bell Navi AT, which notifies to increase the number of medals. It is possible to balance the profits of the player and the game store while realizing the playability that is easy to shift to.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section is made the same for each set value by performing the transition lottery based on the information that does not differ in the set values. .. In this respect, the transition lottery itself may be performed based on information that does not differ in the set values, but the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section may be different for each set value. The specific method is shown below.

In the above-mentioned game example 1, according to the fact that the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination (more specifically, the correct answer is obtained when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination. (According to the stop operation in the push order), the lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT will be performed. Since the transition lottery is performed based on the information that does not differ in the set values, the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" have a probability of being an internal winning combination according to the current gaming state regardless of the set value. Must be determined as. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability during the RT2 gaming state regardless of the set value. As described above, even in the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state, the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" may be determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the main control In the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state (for example, the RT1 gaming state), the board 71 has a probability lower than a predetermined probability regardless of the set value, and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321". Is determined as an internal winning role.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the probability of winning the transition lottery to a specific section is the same regardless of the set value, the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are internal. Depending on the winning combination (more specifically, depending on the stop operation in the correct push order when determined as the internal winning combination), the winning combination has the same probability regardless of the set value. It is necessary to carry out a transition lottery. Therefore, when the main control board 71 performs a lottery for transition to the Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 performs the lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321", which trigger the lottery for transition to Bernavi AT, are determined as internal winning roles with the same probability regardless of the set value. In addition, the lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT will be won with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, at first glance, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT is the same for each set value, but in this method, by giving a setting difference regarding the transition of the RT gaming state, the transition to the Bernavi AT is related. The degree of expectation is different for each set value.

Specifically, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state with a probability corresponding to the set value. As described above, during the RT2 game state, the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed more frequently than in other RT game states, so that the RT2 game does not have a setting difference in the trigger of the transition lottery and the winning probability. By providing a setting difference regarding the transition to the state, as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT can be made different for each set value. More specifically, in the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in FIG. 136 (B), the probability (lottery value information) of determining the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination is determined. , By making it different for each set value, it is possible to provide a setting difference regarding the transition to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, the set value with a high probability of determining the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination is easy to shift to the RT2 gaming state, and as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT. Therefore, it is possible to show the characteristics of each set value regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT.

(Production example in Game Example 1)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 138, an production example in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1 will be described. FIG. 138 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the game when the effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 138 (A), the first game is in the RT1 game state, and is a game that has not been won by either the Lipnavi AT or the Bernavi AT. In the first game, since neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bellnavi AT was won, the status indicator 147b is turned off, and both the number of Lipnavi and the number of Bellnavi remain 0. The number of rip navigators includes any of the roles "F_RT2 transition rip_123" to "F_RT2 transition rip_321", the roles "F_RT3 transition rip_123" to "F_RT3 transition rip_321", and the role "F_maintenance rip_123". It is the number of times to notify the push order of the correct answer when it is decided as the winning combination, and the number of bell navigations is that any one of the combination "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice_3rd" is decided as the internal winning combination. It is the number of times to notify the pressing order of the correct answer in the case.

Subsequently, in the second game, the lottery for transition to Lipnavi AT is won. Therefore, the status display 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1, and the number of rip navigators is 5 times. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138 (a) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays that the number of times of lip navigation has been given to the display unit 100, and also displays that the "search challenge" effect is started. The "search challenge" effect is an effect of searching for treasures performed during Lipnavi AT, and if the treasure can be found while the number of times of Lipnavi remains, it will be a success (Bernavi AT). Is.

Subsequently, in the third game, any of the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and promote the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from 5 to 4 in the third game. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138 (b) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 the push order for shifting from the standby period (RT1 gaming state) to the treasure interval (RT2 gaming state). When the player performs the stop operation according to this notification, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and then, as shown in (b) of FIG. 138 (B), the sub-control board 72 is displayed on the display unit 100. A display indicating that the item has arrived between the waiting period and the treasure is displayed.

Subsequently, in the fourth game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the third game, the state display 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the fourth game, any of the roles "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the fourth game is in Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and prompt the user to maintain the RT2 game state. Along with this notification, in the fourth game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from four to three. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (c) of FIG. 138 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for maintaining the RT2 gaming state on the display unit 100. When the player performs the stop operation according to this notification, the RT2 gaming state is maintained and the search among the treasures is continued.

Subsequently, in the fifth game, any of the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning role, but since it is in the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub The control board 72 does not notify the correct push order. Therefore, as shown in (d) of FIG. 138 (B), the sub-control board 72 displays that the pressing order is unknown in the display unit 100. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 138, since it is assumed that the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state in accordance with the display of the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes. Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that the display unit 100 has fallen from the treasure room (RT2 game state) to the standby time (RT1 game state).

Subsequently, in the sixth game, since the transition to the RT1 game state was performed in the fifth game, the state display 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1. Further, in the sixth game, any one of the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and promote the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, in the sixth game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from three to two. Further, as shown in FIG. 138 (e), the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for shifting from the standby period (RT1 game state) to the treasure period (RT2 game state) on the display unit 100. After that, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the display unit 100 is displayed to indicate that it has arrived between the waiting period and the treasure.

Subsequently, in the 7th game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the 6th game, the state display 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the seventh game, any of the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the seventh game is in Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order. Along with this notification, in the seventh game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from two to one. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (f) of FIG. 138 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the correct pressing order on the display unit 100.

Here, when any of the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the transfer lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed and the winning is won to the Bernavi AT. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that the Bell Navi AT has been won. Further, depending on the winning of the Bell Navi AT, the initial value (10) is added to the number of Lip Navi and the number of Bell Navi, respectively. It should be noted that the number of rip-navigation at the time of winning the Bernavi-AT is 11 because one time remains as the number of rip-navigation when the bell-navigation AT is won.

After that, the game state becomes the bell navigation AT from the eighth game, and the main control board 71 lights the state display 147b in the lighting pattern 3. In this Bell Navi AT, as long as the number of rip navigations remains, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the roles "F_RT2 transition rip_123" to "F_RT2 transition rip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition rip_123" to "F_RT3 transition". The correct answer is pushed to the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice_3rd" as long as the number of bell navigations remains. Notify the order.

(Game example 2)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, a game example 2 in which the lip navigation and the bell navigation are individually managed will be described. In this game example 2, both Lip Navi and Bell Navi are performed during the specific section, and the number of notifications of both is managed individually. That is, in this game example 2, the number of times of both Lip Navi and Bell Navi is used as the end condition of the specific section. The lip navigator is a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state, and the bell navigation is a notification for increasing the number of medals.

FIG. 139 (A) is a game flow in Game Example 2. As shown in FIG. 139 (A), the game example 2 has a normal section and a specific section, and during the specific section, there is a high probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. It has (for example, the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state in the game example 1) and the rip low probability (for example, the RT1 gaming state in the game example 1) in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low.

In Game Example 2, the main control board 71 performs a shift lottery to a specific section during the normal section, and when the shift lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal section to the specific section. .. In Game Example 2, the lottery for shifting to a specific section may be performed by any method.

Further, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become 0 in the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. That is, in Game Example 2, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform notifications for maintaining the RT game state in the high rip state for the number of times indicated by the number of rip navigators, and receive medals for the number of times indicated by the number of bell navigators. Notify to increase. Then, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become 0, the main control board 71 ends the specific section and shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section.

Further, when the combination of the fall replay symbols is displayed during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the RT game state from the high rip state to the low rip state, and the combination of the promotion replay symbols is displayed. , The main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the low lip state to the high lip state. The combination of the symbols of the fall replay and the promotion replay is arbitrary, but in accordance with the expression of Game Example 1, for example, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the fall replay, and the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition. The combination of the symbols of the rip and the RT3 transition rip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay.

In addition, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed when the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination, and is displayed when the push order is incorrect, and the RT2 transition lip or RT3 The combination of the symbols of the transition lip is the correct answer when the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. Sometimes displayed. Therefore, the lip navigation in Game Example 2 is a combination of the symbols of the fall replay by notifying the correct push order when the roles "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. When the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as internal winning combinations. It includes notifying the pressing order of the correct answer and prompting the display of the combination of symbols of the promotion replay.

If the combination "F_maintenance rip_123" to "F_maintenance rip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the combination of the replay symbols is displayed and the RT game state is displayed. Is maintained in the current RT gaming state. That is, when the combination "F_maintenance rip_123" to "F_maintenance rip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination during the high rip state, the main control board 71 displays the combination of the replay symbols (push). (Correct answer), while maintaining the RT game state in the high rip state, when the combination of the falling replay symbols is displayed (push order incorrect answer), the RT game state is changed from the high rip state to the low rip state. ..

Subsequently, FIG. 139 (B) is a diagram showing the characteristics of the specific section of Game Example 2. As shown in FIG. 139 (B), Game Example 2 has a plurality of states, that is, a normal ART and a special state in a specific section. Comparing the normal ART and the special state, the normal ART is a state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is faster than that in the special state. Further, in Game Example 2, the number of rip navigators and the number of bell navigators are added during a specific section. When comparing the normal ART and the special state, the amount of the number of bell navigators added is smaller than that of the normal ART during the special state. On the other hand, increase the amount of additional Lipnavi. That is, during the special state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is suppressed, the number of lip navigations is prioritized over the number of bell navigations.

(How to realize a special state)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 140, a method of realizing a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of times of bell navigation will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the roles "F_3 choice bell A_1st", "F_3 choice bell A_2nd", "F_3 choice bell A_3rd", and the roles "F_3 choice bell B_12t", "F_3 choice bell B_2nd", and "F_3 choice" are the targets of the bell navigation. Bell B_3rd ". In the following, the roles "F_3 choice bell A_1st" to "F_3 choice bell A_3rd" are simply referred to as the role "F_3 choice bell A", and the roles "F_3 choice bell B_1st" to "F_3 choice bell B_3rd" are simply referred to as the role "F_3". Sometimes called "Choice Bell B".

As shown in FIG. 140 (A), when the bonus is not won, that is, when the winning combination related to the bonus is not carried over as the internal winning combination, either the combination "F_3 selection bell A" or the combination "F_3 selection bell B". The combination of symbols displayed according to the order of pressing is different. Specifically, for both the role "F_3 choice bell A" and the role "F_3 choice bell B", when the push order is correct, the combination of bell symbols is displayed, nine medals are paid out, and the push order is irregular. When the answer is correct, a combination of bell-spilled symbols is displayed, and a smaller number (or 0) of medals than 9 is paid out.

Therefore, in the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, when either the combination "F_3 selection bell A" or the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section when the bonus is not won, Performs bell navigation (notification of the correct push order) as many times as the number of bell navigations. In other words, during the specific section when the bonus is not won, the number of bell navigations will be reduced regardless of whether the role "F_3 choice bell A" or the role "F_3 choice bell B" is decided as the internal winning role. Become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), during the flags, that is, in the state where the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_3 choice bell B" is displayed according to the pressing order. The combination of symbols is different, but the combination of symbols displayed in the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is the same regardless of the order of pressing. Specifically, for the role "F_3 choice bell B", a combination of bell symbols is displayed when the push order is correct, nine medals are paid out, and a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed, and less than 9 (or 0) medals are paid out. On the other hand, for the role "F_3 choice bell A", the combination of bell symbols is displayed regardless of the order of pressing, and nine medals are paid out.

Therefore, when the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section between the flags, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 do not notify the push order between the flags. When the combination "F_3 choice bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section of, the bell navigation (notification of the correct push order) is performed as many times as the number of bell navigations. In other words, during the specific section between the flags, even if the combination "F_3 choice bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of bell navigations does not decrease, and the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination. The number of bell navigations will be reduced.

In this way, by distinguishing between the normal ART and the special state depending on whether or not the role related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning role, the realization of a special state that can suppress the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations. can do. That is, in the case of the above example, by setting the specific section when the bonus is not won as a normal ART and setting the specific section between the flags as a special state, it is possible to realize a special state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations can be suppressed. can do.

(Additional example)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 141, a method of adding the number of times of Lip Navi and the number of times of Bell Navi will be described. The additional lottery table of FIG. 141 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the additional amount of the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations for each internal winning combination and game state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 adds the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations with reference to the addition lottery table shown in FIG. 141 (A). Note that FIG. 141B is a diagram showing an outline of the degree of expectation of addition according to the addition lottery table of FIG. 141 (A).

With reference to FIGS. 141 (A) and 141 (B), it can be seen that the expected degree of addition of the number of times of bell navigation and the degree of expectation of addition of the number of times of lip navigation are different between the normal ART and the special state. Specifically, in the addition based on cactus and weak cherry, the number of bell navigations is usually more likely to be added during ART, while the number of lip navigations is more likely to be added during special conditions. More specifically, during the special state, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is smaller than that during normal ART, and conversely, the amount of addition of the number of lip navigations is increased.
In the example shown in FIG. 141, the addition based on the strong cherry has the same addition expectation between the normal ART and the special state.

In such a pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, the rip-navigation and the bell-navigation are individually managed in a specific section, the rip-navigation is performed for the number of rip-navigation times, and the bell-navigation is performed for the number of bell-navigation times. As a result, even if either the role targeted for Lip Navi or the role targeted for Bell Navi is concentrated and determined as the internal winning combination during a specific section, only one of the navigation times is consumed. And since the other number of navigations is not consumed, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, a normal ART and a special state are provided as specific sections, and the expected degree of addition differs depending on the current state. Specifically, during normal ART, where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is high, it is easy to add the number of bell navigations, and conversely, during the special state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is suppressed, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is reduced. , Increase the amount of additional lip navigation. As a result, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed, and as a result, the interest in a specific section is not impaired.

<How to select CZs with different end periods>
Subsequently, a method of selecting CZs having different end periods will be described with reference to FIG. 142. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the transition from the specific section to the normal section is performed without satisfying the end condition (limit processing). Further, since the specific section includes the CZ in addition to the ART gaming state, when the limit processing is performed, the ART gaming state continuously performed from the CZ has a gaming period corresponding to the number of games in which the CZ continues. It will be shortened. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can select the CZ to be executed from the CZs having different end periods, and at the time of selection, the CZ considered to be preferable for the player can be easily selected. There is.

As shown in FIG. 142, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of CZs having different end periods. Specifically, the CZ "short-term battle" shown in FIG. 142 (A) is a CZ with an end period of 0 games, and the CZ "game" shown in FIG. 142 (B) is a CZ with an end period of 1 game. Yes, the CZ "stable" shown in FIG. 142 (C) is a CZ with an end period of 10 games, and the CZ "turbulence" shown in FIG. 142 (D) is a CZ with an end period of 10 games. The CZ "long-term battle" shown in (E) is a CZ with an end period of 30 games. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal section. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the lottery for transition to the ART gaming state before the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and changes the gaming state to the ART gaming state. Transition.

Here, a method of selecting CZ will be described. 142 (A) to 142 (E) are selection screens for selecting CZ. This selection screen is provided with a selection cursor for selecting a CZ. In FIG. 142, the selection cursor points to the CZ “short-term battle” in FIG. 142 (A), the CZ “game” in FIG. 142 (B), and the CZ “stable” in FIG. 142 (C). In FIG. 142 (D), it refers to the CZ “disturbance”, and in FIG. 142 (E), it refers to the CZ “long-term battle”. This selection cursor, for example, switches the CZ to be selected with the passage of time.

The selection screen accepts the player's operation on the chance button (not shown), and the main control board 71 executes it assuming that the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor is selected at the timing when the chance button is operated. Accepts the selection of CZ and then starts the selected CZ. That is, when the chance button is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A), the main control board 71 accepts the selection from the player as selecting the CZ "short-term battle", and then accepts the selection from the player, and then the CZ "short-term battle". "Battle" begins. The method of specifying the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor by the main control board 71 is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 can also count the interval at which the CZ pointed by the selection cursor is switched. The CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the board 71 can be specified.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the selection cursor points to the CZ "short-term battle" having the shortest end period in the initial state, and then points to other CZs in the order of the shortest end period with the passage of time. .. For example, the selection cursor points to CZ in the order of CZ "short-term battle", CZ "game", CZ "stable", CZ "disturbance", and CZ "long-term battle" with the passage of time.

Here, when the limit process is performed as described above, the game period in the ART game state is shortened by the number of games in which the CZ continues, so that the CZ "short-term battle" with the shortest end period is a game. It is considered to be preferable for the person. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the CZ is selected based on the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor, but by pointing to the CZ "short-term battle" as the initial state of the selection cursor, the CZ is kind to the player. The selection method can be realized.

Further, depending on the player, the game may proceed without making any selection on the selection screen. For example, when the start lever 6 is operated and the game is started (that is, when a predetermined operation is performed) without accepting the operation for the chance button on the selection screen, the player has not made a selection. become. When the game is started without accepting the selection of the CZ in this way, the main control board 71 starts the CZ having the shortest end period among the plurality of CZs having different end periods. That is, when the player starts the game without selecting the CZ, the main control board 71 performs the CZ "short-term battle" having the shortest end period regardless of the position of the selection cursor at the timing when the game is started. It is automatically selected, and then the CZ "short-term battle" is started. This makes it possible to realize a CZ selection method that is kind to the player.

It should be noted that such a selection screen is displayed, for example, at the start of CZ, in other words, in a state where the right to shift to CZ is granted. That is, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the CZ for performing a shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the ART gaming state, and the right to shift to the CZ is granted, and a plurality of types of CZs are granted. Accepts the selection of one CZ from among.

<Reel control at the start of a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, reel control at the start of a specific section will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reel stop control can display a combination of specific symbols such as "7-7-7" (hereinafter referred to as "AT start result") when starting a specific section. I do. Specifically, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the specific section when the lottery to shift to the specific section is won. The right to shift to the specific section is carried over until the gaming state shifts to the specific section, and is cleared (deprived) when the gaming state shifts to the specific section. That is, when the main control board 71 satisfies the transition condition to the specific section (for example, the AT start result is displayed) while the transition right is granted, the game state is shifted to the specific section and the transition right is given. clear. Then, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted or not (that is, the reel stop control). Different).

143 and 144 are views showing an example of a rotation cylinder stop initial setting table used for reel stop control, and are used in steps S9 and S12 of FIG. 75 described above. This rotation cylinder stop initial setting table is referred to when determining the reel stop control information for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel stop initial setting table is used when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in association with the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination, the current gaming state, and the presence or absence of the right to shift to a specific section. Specifies reel stop control information. The main control board 71 refers to the reel stop initial setting table, acquires reel stop control information corresponding to the internal winning combination, the game state, and the presence / absence of the transition right, and uses the reel stop control information to obtain the reel 3L. Stop 3C and 3R.

The reel stop control information associated with the winning combination, the game state, and the presence / absence of the transition right includes the rotation cylinder stop number, the determination data for each pressing order (pull-in priority table number, pull-in priority selection table number), and table number selection. Value (change status, stop table data), 1st cylinder 1st stop table change data, 1st cylinder stop data table selection data (left 1st stop table), 1st cylinder 1st stop Table change Information including the initial data selection value (change status, table number) and search order data table number.

"Determination data by pressing order" includes a pull-in priority table number and a pull-in priority selection table number. The "draw-in priority table number" is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table (not shown). Further, the "drawing priority selection table number" is a number for selecting the pulling priority selection table (not shown).

The "table number selection data" is a value referred to when all reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes a change status and stop table data.

The "stop table number" is a number for selecting a stop table to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L. The "change status" is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and is the initial stage of the line status in the present embodiment. The state is A line. Here, when the change status is "0", the line status is not changed, and when the change status is "2", if the line status is A line, it is changed to B line.

The first stop reel is the first reel for the first cylinder first stop table change data, the first cylinder stop data table selection data, and the first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value. That is, it is the data referred to when the left reel is 3L.

"Table change data for the first stop of the first cylinder" indicates whether to use or change the same stop table after the first stop on the left after the second stop when the first stop reel is the left reel 3L. It is the data which shows. If there is a value (value other than 0) in the table change data for the first stop of the first cylinder, select the change data search table based on the planned stop position, search the data, and perform the second and subsequent stops. Select the stop table for.

The "first body stop data table selection data" is a number for selecting the first body stop data table (not shown) referred to when the first body is stopped.

The "first table change initial data selection value for the first cylinder stop" is data referred to when the second and third cylinders are stopped, and includes a table number and a line status. The "table number" is a number for selecting a stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder, which is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels. The "change status" is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder selected based on the table number. If the change status is "0", the line status is not changed, if it is "2", it is changed to B line if the line status is A line, and if it is "3", it is changed to B line. If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

The "search order table number" is a number for selecting a search order table (not shown) for determining the number of slip pieces.

As shown in FIGS. 143 (A) and 143 (B), in the pachi-slot machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the spinning reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 (A), which is referred to when the winning combination related to the bonus is not won, the reeling stop number "17" is used for the winning combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". In the reel stop control information of the above, and in the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 (B), which is referred to when the winning combination related to the bonus is won, for the same combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". The reel stop control information of the turning cylinder stop number "31" is specified. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control information is different depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is won, so that the reel stop control is different when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Can be made.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 143 (A) and 144 (C), the pachi-slot machine 1 uses different reel stop control information depending on whether or not the transfer right is granted. Specifically, in the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 (A) referred to when the transition right is not granted, the reel stop number "17" is assigned to the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". In the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table of FIG. 144 (C), which is referred to when the reel stop control information is specified and the transition right is granted, the rotation cylinder is for the same combination "F_3 choice bell_1st". The reel stop control information of the stop number "41" is specified. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control information can be changed according to the presence or absence of the shift right, so that the reel stop control can be changed when the lottery for shift to a specific section is won.

Subsequently, FIG. 145 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol when the reel stop control is performed using the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. As shown in FIG. 145, in a normal section to which the right to shift to a specific section is not granted, if the internal winning combination is "off", a combination of "missing" symbols is displayed, and the internal winning combination is also displayed. When is the role "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd", the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the correct answer is given in the push order, and the bell spilled eye or the first one is displayed when the push order is incorrect. The combination is displayed.

On the other hand, in the waiting section of the specific section to which the right to shift to the specific section is granted, when the internal winning combination is "off", if the push operation is accurate, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result. Is displayed, and if the push operation is inaccurate, a combination of "missing" symbols is displayed. In addition, when the internal winning combination is the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd", if the eye-pressing operation is accurate, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result is displayed, and the eye-pressing operation is not possible. If it is accurate, a combination of bells, bell spills or the first pattern is displayed.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to make the reel stop control different depending on the presence or absence of the right to shift to the specific section, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result is set according to the stop operation of the player at the start of the specific section. The rotation of the reel can be stopped as shown.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control may be different depending on the type of the specific section of the transition destination. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the main control board 71 is given the right to shift to one specific section and the one specific section. The reel stop control may be different depending on the case where the right to shift to another specific section different from the above is granted. Specifically, when the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, depending on whether the right to transfer to one specific section is granted or the right to transfer to another specific section is granted. A reel stop initial setting table may be provided so that the reel stop control information used is different.

As a result, the reel stop control can be changed according to the type of the specific section of the transfer destination. Therefore, for example, when shifting to a specific section more advantageous for the player and when shifting to a specific section other than that. With, it is possible to make different combinations of symbols displayed at the start of a specific section. For the player, the degree of advantage of the subsequent game differs depending on the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section, so that the player has a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the specific section. The fun of the game is improved.
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the internal winning combination differs depending on the bonus state and the RT gaming state, but the winning probability of the internal winning combination does not differ depending on the type of the specific section.

Here, in recent years, a pachi-slot machine in which another reel (hereinafter, “second main reel”) is provided in addition to a reel (hereinafter, “first main reel”) controlled according to the result of internal lottery is also known. ing. For example, a pachi-slot machine having three reels of the above-mentioned reels 3L, 3C, and 3R as the first main reel and a reel provided in only one row to the right of the reel 3R as the second main reel is known. .. The reels having different stop controls depending on the result of the shift lottery may be the first main reel or the second main reel.

When the stop control of the second main reel is different depending on the result of the shift lottery, the main control board 71 is the first main reel in response to the operation of the start lever 6 in the game in which the shift lottery to the specific section is performed. The rotation of the second main reel is started before the rotation of the second main reel is started. Then, when the stop button 7R is operated, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the second main reel according to the result of the shift lottery to the specific section. Specifically, when the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the rotation of the second main reel is stopped so that a symbol that is not displayed if the lottery is not won can be displayed. When the rotation of the second main reel is stopped according to the result of the shift lottery to the specific section in this way, the main control board 71 then starts the rotation of the first main reel.

In the above example, the second main reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 7R. However, in addition to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, a stop button dedicated to the second main reel may be provided. good. Further, a plurality of second main reels may be provided instead of one.
By separating the stop operation for the result of the transition lottery in the specific section and the stop operation for the result of the internal lottery in this way, both sides can be enjoyed and the player can easily grasp the game.

<Control when changing settings>
Subsequently, control at the time of setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between control contents when the setting is changed and when the main RAM 33 is cleared. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a new setting value is set (at the time of setting change), the main control board 71 is a combination related to a bonus carried over as an internal winning combination even during the flag period. Is maintained without clearing, the specific section is maintained even during the specific section, and the result of the transition lottery is maintained even during the waiting section that is winning the transition lottery of the specific section. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even if a new set value is set during the flag interval, the specific section, or the standby section, the gaming state before the new set value is set is maintained as it is. ..
The case where a new setting value is set (when the setting is changed) is not limited to the case of changing from setting 1 to setting 6 to a different setting value, and the same setting such as setting 1 to setting 1 is performed. It also includes the case of resetting the value (so-called resetting to the same setting).

On the other hand, when the main RAM 33 is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control board 71 clears all the gaming states. That is, the main control board 71 clears the combination related to the carried-over bonus when the RAM is cleared during the period between the flags, and ends the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section. The game state is shifted to the normal section, and when the RAM is cleared during the standby section, the result of the shift lottery is cleared.

In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 clears the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section, but maintains the specific section when the setting is changed during the specific section. From the game store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear a specific section while changing the set value, so that the game store side can be given various options regarding the operation of the pachislot machine.

The setting change operation can be performed, for example, via the setting key type switch 430 (see FIG. 116), and the RAM clear operation can be performed, for example, via the reset switch 442 (see FIG. 116). It can be carried out.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Subsequently, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the start operation detecting means, the symbol changing means, the internal winning combination determining means (combination determining means), and the stop It functions as an operation detecting means, a reel stop control means (stop control means), a winning determination means, a game medium giving means (game value adding means), and a profit giving means.

Further, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip" is determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART, and the result of this flag conversion lottery or other internal winnings. When a CT lottery based on a combination is won, a CT that normally extends the duration of ART is started, so that it functions as a conversion lottery means and an additional game start means.

Further, the main control board 71 adds (extends) the number of ART games indicating the duration of normal ART during CT according to the internal winning combination. Specifically, the number of normal ART ART games is added by a predetermined amount according to the roles "cactus", "weak cherry", and "strong cherry", and the number of normal ART ART games is specified according to the role "triple chili lip". Add it.
At this time, when the number of times the number of ART games added based on the combination "triple chili lip" is added to the main control board 71 is 9 times or more, which exceeds 8 times corresponding to one set of CT, one time is performed. Since the amount of addition is increased, it functions as an addition control means.

Further, the main control board 71 counts the number of games in which the number of ART games is not added during CT by using the CT game number counter, and when the CT game number counter counts 8, CT ends. At this time, when the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won (that is, the flag conversion lottery is won), the main control board 71 resets the game eight times in one set (the value of the CT game number counter is set to the initial value). (Return), functions as a counting means and an additional game ending means.

Further, when the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the inter-flag state and until the bonus is activated in the inter-flag state (as a bonus). In order to carry over the bonus-related winning combination as an internal winning combination (until the relevant combination wins) (when a specific symbol combination is not derived in a unit game in which the derivation of a specific symbol combination is permitted, a specific symbol combination is derived. It functions as a bonus carry-over means (carry-over means). Further, the main control board 71 activates the bonus when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in the inter-flag state, and shifts the gaming state to the bonus state (when a specific symbol combination is derived as the result display of the stop control). (To start the bonus state), it functions as a bonus starting means. Further, since the main control board 71 ends the bonus state when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number, the main control board 71 functions as a bonus ending means.

As shown in FIG. 48, the main control board 71 becomes a bonus when the combination related to the bonus and the predetermined combination (off, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as the internal winning combination in the inter-flag state. Stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols (C_BB1, 2) according to the relevant combination can be displayed, and when the combination related to the bonus and the combination other than the predetermined combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination related to the bonus is determined. Stop control is performed so that the combination of the symbols can not be displayed.
Then, the main control board 71 controls the instruction monitor of the information display 14, and is for winning the bonus-related winning combination when the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus-related winning combination can be displayed during the inter-flag state. The display of "10" and "11" (bonus instruction information) that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation is notified, and when it is impossible to display the combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus, "10" and "11" are displayed. Since the notification is not performed, the instruction monitor of the main control board 71 and the information display 14 functions as an instruction information notification means.

At this time, the main control board 71 notifies "10" and "11" via the instruction monitor only after the bonus notification is given. Specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the winning combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination without carrying over the winning combination related to the bonus, the number of subsequent games is counted, and the counting result becomes the predetermined number of times. When the winning combination and the predetermined winning combination (off, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies "10" and "11" via the instruction monitor. , It functions as a counting means for counting the number of unit games after the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, the sub control board 72 manages the game history based on various command data received from the main control board 71, and when the registration operation is received from the player, the sub control board 72 accepts the registration of the player who plays the game, so that the history management is performed. It functions as a means and a means for accepting registration.
Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, a display unit 100 that produces an effect according to the progress of the game and a plurality of display units 100 that are provided separately and include a top screen 211 and game information screens 213, 214, 215. The sub-control board 72 has a first sub-display device 201 for displaying the display screen of the above, and a touch sensor 201a provided on the display unit of the first sub-display device 201, and the sub-control board 72 is the display unit 100 and the first sub-display device. 201 is controlled. Specifically, when the sub-control board 72 accepts the registration of the player, the sub-control board 72 controls the first sub-display device 201 so that the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 can be displayed, and the registration of the player is registered. If not accepted, the sub-control board 72 functions as a control means because the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 cannot be displayed on the first sub-display device 201.

Further, since the main control board 71 grants various benefits according to the result of the game, it functions as a privilege granting means. Specifically, the main control board 71 grants a privilege according to the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line, and in the game in which the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" is determined as the internal winning combination, "bell". When the combination of the symbols of "" is displayed, 9 medals are given, and when the combination of the symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed, 0 medals are given. Further, the main control board 71 is the same as the operation of the re-game when the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" or "replay" is displayed in the game in which the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination. Grant the privilege of.
Further, the main control board 71 grants a privilege not based on the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line but also based on the result of the flag conversion lottery. For example, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the combination “F_certain chili lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the flag conversion lottery is won, a privilege such as winning the CT lottery is given.

Further, since the sub-control board 72 executes the effect according to the mode of the stop operation via the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as the effect executing means.
Here, the main control board 71 uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player via the instruction monitor when the privilege to be given differs depending on the combination of the symbols displayed along the effective line. If the benefits given by the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line are the same, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 executes an effect indicating the order of the stop operation regardless of whether the privilege given by the combination of the displayed symbols is the same / different.

Further, since the main control board 71 performs a CT lottery for whether or not to start CT, it functions as an advantageous state lottery means, and when the CT lottery is won, a predetermined number of precursor games are performed after the winning. Since CT is started after it is broken, it also functions as an advantageous state starting means.
Then, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination during this CT precursor, the sub-control board 72 functions as a notification lottery means because the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side. do.

Further, when the MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 carries over the MB as the internal winning combination until it is determined that the MB has won a prize, so that the main control board 71 functions as a predetermined combination carrying-over means.

Further, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination among the MB flags in which the MB is carried over as the internal winning combination, so that the main control board 71 can be used as a conversion lottery means. Also works.
Then, when the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the "cactus" symbols is displayed for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the flag conversion lottery is not won, the push order in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed for each winning combination is notified via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Therefore, the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts the normal ART when the ART lottery is won, ends the normal ART when the duration of the normal ART ends, and performs the CT when the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the normal ART. To start, it functions as a first advantageous state control means and a second control means. Since the duration of the normal ART is not digested during the CT, the main control board 71 interrupts the normal ART and starts the CT when the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the normal ART. ..

Further, the main control board 71 counts the difference number of sheets during the CT, and ends the CT when the difference number reaches the end number of sheets. Here, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination "F_pushing order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, and when the winning combination is won in this flag conversion lottery, the difference number to be counted is calculated. On the other hand, "6" is added, and "6" is added to the number of finished sheets to maintain the duration of CT. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, "6" is added to the difference number to be counted, and the duration of CT is exhausted. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a counting means, a second advantageous state ending means, and a conversion lottery means.

Further, the main control board 71 sets the value of the CT meter that defines the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. , Update to a value that is easier to win the flag conversion lottery than the currently set CT meter value, while if you do not win the flag conversion lottery during CT, the flag conversion will be more than the currently set CT meter value. Since the value is updated to a value that is difficult to win in the lottery, it functions as a lottery stage setting means (first lottery stage setting means).

Further, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the value of the CT meter at the time of winning the combination "F_pushing order bell" between the MB flags (CT) during the ART gaming state, and the MB is not in the ART gaming state. Between the flags (normal ART), the first conversion lottery means and the second conversion lottery means are used to perform the flag conversion lottery based on the ART level and the lottery state at the time of winning the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". Functions as.

Then, based on the result of these flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 gives a privilege, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the push order via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. The main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting means, and the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.
In addition, when the flag conversion lottery during CT is won (“cactus”), the main control board 71 grants the privilege of maintaining (that is, extending the duration) the duration of CT without digesting it. , If you win the flag conversion lottery during normal ART (“Chiririp”), you will be given the privilege of adding the number of ART games.

Further, in the main control board 71, when the MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART during the MB non-flag, and then a predetermined number of precursor games are performed without the MB winning, the normal ART addition chance zone In order to start CT, which is, it functions as an additional game state start means.

Further, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT, the main control board 71 normally extends the duration of ART and also serves during CT. When the flag conversion lottery at the time of "pushing order bell" is won, it functions as a first addition control means and a second addition control means in order to extend the duration of CT.

Further, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART during the MB non-flag, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery and this flag. It functions as a first notification lottery means for determining whether or not to perform notification for displaying a combination of symbols of "chili lip" based on the result of conversion lottery.
On the other hand, during the CT precursor, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 determines whether or not to notify the push order. The sub-control board 72 functions as a second notification lottery means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts CT when a predetermined number of precursor games are performed during the MB flag (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the combination "push order bell" is won during the period during this CT. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, it functions as a lottery state start means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display the combination of the symbols of the "bell" when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won during the precursory game between the MB flags (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). The required push order is notified via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100, and during the CT (lottery state) between the MB flags, the combination "push order bell" is "bell" or "bell" based on the result of the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning. In order to notify the pressing order required for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "cactus" via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 notify the notification. Functions as a means.

The display unit 100 includes an irradiation light device B that irradiates the irradiation light, a screen device C that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, and an irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2 that switch between a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 as a screen device that causes an image corresponding to an effect to appear by irradiation with light. Therefore, the irradiation light device B functions as an irradiation light device that irradiates the irradiation light, and the screen device C functions as a movable screen that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device. Further, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 function as a drive device for driving the movable screen so that the position where the movable screen is arranged can be adjusted.

Further, the main control board 71 has a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b, and the first main control board 71a is subjected to an internal lottery process for determining an internal winning combination, and the second main control board 71 is subjected to an internal lottery process. The main control board 71 and the first main control board 71a are the main control unit, the first main control unit, and the second main control, respectively, in order to perform a shift lottery as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a specific section in the control board 71b. Functions as a department.
In addition, the second main control board 71b performs a transition lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the set value when the set unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and this set value is for setting. Since the main control board 71 is set by the operation using the key type switch 430, the setting key type switch 430 and the main control board 71 function as setting means.

Further, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the gaming state, and when the transition lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted from the normal section to the specific section. Therefore, the main control board 71 is selected for the transition lottery. It functions as a means, a game state control means, and a notification game start means. Further, when the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery, the main control board 71 notifies external devices such as a data counter and a hall computer of the winning information indicating that the transition lottery has been won via the external centralized terminal board 73. The 71 and the external centralized terminal board 73 function as output means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 use the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 to notify the player of the correct push order, which is an advantageous stop operation mode for the player, in the main control board. The 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as notification means.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a status display 147b (AT lamp) is provided on the instruction monitor 147 and the transition lottery to a specific section is won, the main control board 71 turns on the status display 147b and wins the transition lottery. Report what you have done. The status indicator 147b has a plurality of lamps "a" to "i", each of which is turned on, blinks, and turns off, and shifts to a specific section based on the pattern of turning on, blinking, and turning off the plurality of lamps. The main control board 71 and the status indicator 147b function as notification means in order to notify that the lottery has been won.

Further, when the combination "F_maintenance rip_123" to "F_maintenance rip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination during the high rip state, the main control board 71 displays the combination of the replay symbols according to the correct answer in the push order. When it is done, the high rip state is maintained, and when the combination of the falling replay symbols is displayed due to the incorrect answer in the push order, the game state is shifted from the high rip state to the low rip state, so that the main control board 71 is a game. Functions as a state control means.
Then, when the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination in the specific section by using the instruction monitor and the display unit 100, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 receive medals for the number of bell navigations. Notification for increasing (Bell Navi) is performed, and when "F_maintenance rip_123" to "F_maintenance rip_321" are determined as internal winning medals during a specific section, the RT game state is maintained in a high rip state. The main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as notification means for performing notification (lip navigator).

Further, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 carries over the winning combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination until the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a carry-over means and a predetermined combination carry-over means. At this time, the main control board 71 makes the stop control different depending on whether or not the combination related to the bonus is carried over, and if the combination related to the bonus is not carried over, the combination "F_3 choice bell A" is belled at the time of winning. Or, if the combination of bell spilled symbols is controlled so that it can be displayed, and if the role related to the bonus is carried over, only the combination of bell symbols can be displayed when the combination "F_3 choice bell A" is won. The main control board 71 functions as a reel stop control means.

In addition, the main control board 71 increases the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations, respectively, and when the combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is smaller than when it is not carried over. However, in order to increase the amount of addition of the number of times of lip navigation, the main control board 71 functions as a first addition means and a second addition means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to MB1 is displayed when all reels are stopped, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to MB2 when all reels are stopped. Is displayed, the MB2 gaming state is started, so that the main control board 71 functions as a specific gaming starting means.
The main control board 71 may determine the winning combination to be notified as the internal winning combination during the MB1 gaming state, while the main control board 71 may determine the winning combination to be notified as the internal winning combination during the MB2 gaming state. The main control board 71 functions as an internal winning combination determining means.

Further, since the main control board 71 ends the specific section even if the end condition is not satisfied when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the main control board 71 functions as a notification game end means. At this time, the main control board 71 counts the duration of the specific section, and in particular, counts the period of the MB1 gaming state performed during the specific section as the continuation period of the specific section, and the MB2 gaming state performed during the specific section. The main control board 71 functions as a counting means because the period of the above is not counted as the continuation period of the specific section.

Further, the main control board 71 grants the transition right to the specific section when the lottery for transition to the specific section is won, and when the start condition of the specific section is satisfied while the transition right is granted, the transition right is granted. In order to clear and start a specific section, the main control board 71 functions as a right granting means and a notification game starting means.
At this time, since the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted or not, the main control board 71 functions as a reel stop control means. do.

In addition, during the ART game state, the main control board 71 has all the push order combinations (“F_3 choice 1-sheet combination _1st” to “F_3 selection 1-sheet combination_3rd” and “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd”. ”) Is notified of the correct push order, and during the single-card combination ART game state, the correct push order is not notified for“ F_3 choice bell_1st ”to“ F_3 choice bell_3rd ”of the push order combinations. , The main control board 71 functions as a first notification game control means and a second notification game control means in order to notify the correct push order for "F_3 selection 1-sheet combination _1st" to "F_3 selection 1-sheet combination_3rd". ..
Then, since the main control board 71 lights the state display 147b regardless of whether the game state is the ART game state or the single-card combination ART game state, the main control board 71 and the state display 147b notify. Functions as a means.

Further, when the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery to the short ART, it performs the short ART for the first period, and when it wins the transition lottery to the long ART, it performs the long period for the second period exceeding the first period. In order to perform ART, the main control board 71 functions as a first notification game control means and a second notification game control means.
At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the display unit 100 to notify whether or not the lottery for transition to the long ART has been won during the first period in which the durations of the short ART and the long ART overlap. The sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as effect executing means.

Further, when the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery, the main control board 71 starts a specific section at the start of the bonus state. Then, in this bonus state, the main control board 71 determines the winning combination to be notified as the internal winning combination with a higher probability than in the states other than the bonus state, so that the main control board 71 starts the specific game. It functions as a means, a transition lottery means, a notification game start means, and an internal winning combination determination means.
Then, when the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 use the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 to determine the combination to be notified as the internal winning combination during a specific section, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. In order to notify the pressing order of the correct answer, the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.

Further, when the sub-control board 72 uses the display unit 100 to determine the push order combination as the internal winning combination in addition to the combination related to the bonus during the flag period, for example, the effect of "white 7 navigation_123" is produced. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as effect executing means.

Further, in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 maintains the gaming state in the RT2 gaming state when the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed, while the game is displayed when the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed. In order to shift the state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 functions as a gaming state control means.
Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the main control board 71 does not give a notification for increasing medals during the RT2 gaming state, but only gives a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high rip state. When the AT is performed and the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 functions as a first notification state control means and a second notification state control means in order to perform a bell navigation AT for notifying to increase the number of medals. At this time, since the main control board 71 performs the transition lottery to the Bell Navi AT more frequently during the RT2 gaming state than during the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 functions as a transition lottery means.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with a predetermined counter in the main RAM 33, and the number of games in all game states, the number of games in a game state advantageous to the player, the number of medals given in all game states, and the player. In order to count the number of medals paid out in an advantageous gaming state and calculate the specific section ratio and the bonus ratio from these counting results, the main control board 71 has the first counter, the second counter, and the like. It functions as a third counter, a fourth counter, and a calculation means.

Further, when the specific section ratio or the accessory ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio, the main control board 71 notifies an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer to that effect via the external centralized terminal board 73. The main control board 71 and the external centralized terminal board 73 function as notification means.
Further, since the main control board 71 displays the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio on the ratio display 422 provided inside the housing 60, the main control board 71 and the ratio display 422 function as display means. ..

Further, when the specific section is managed by the number of games, the main control board 71 counts the number of continuations indicating the number of unit games since the start of the specific section. Therefore, the main control board 71 is a counting means. Functions as. At this time, even if the counted number of continuations reaches a predetermined number of times, the main control board 71 is subsequently notified for the guaranteed number of times if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet. The main control board 71 functions as a notification game ending means in order to continue the specific section until.

Further, if the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery to the ART gaming state before reaching the end period of the CZ, the game state shifts from the CZ to the ART gaming state, and the end period of the CZ without winning the transition lottery. When the above is exceeded, the CZ is terminated and the game state is shifted to the normal section, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game state control means. Further, the main control board 71 counts the number of advantageous sections, which is the sum of the number of unit games in the CZ and the number of unit games in the ART game state, when the ART game state is continuously performed from the CZ. When the number of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined number of times (1500 times), the ART game state is terminated (limit processing) even before the end condition is satisfied, so that the main control board 71 functions as a counting means and a notification game ending means. do.

Further, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to CZ during a normal section, and if the transition lottery is won, a transition right to CZ is granted, and in a state where this transition right is granted, a plurality of types are granted. In order to accept the selection of one CZ from the CZs of the above, the main control board 71 functions as a right granting means and a selection receiving means.
At this time, the main control board 71 starts the selected one CZ when one CZ is selected, and ends the game when the game is started without selecting the CZ. In order to start the shortest CZ, the main control board 71 functions as a lottery state start means.

Further, when the setting is changed during the specific section, the main control board 71 does not end the specific section, maintains the specific section even after the setting change, and performs a RAM clear operation (initially) during the specific section. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means because the specific section is terminated when the conversion operation is performed.

Further, the specific section is a gaming state in which the unit specific section of one set of 30 games is performed for the number of sets (that is, one or more sets), and the main control board 71 is permitted to execute the unit specific section of the next set. If so, the next set of unit-specific sections is started after the end of one set of unit-specific sections. Further, when the bonus state is started during the specific section, the main control board 71 restarts the specific section after the end of the bonus state, and in particular, a predetermined condition (for example, at the start of the bonus state during the specific section). If the number of remaining games in the set is less than the specified value), the unit identification of another set different from the unit identification section set that was executed when the bonus state started at the end of the bonus state is established. If the section is restarted and the predetermined conditions are not met at the start of the bonus state during the specific section, it is the same as the unit specific section that was executed when the bonus state started with the end of the bonus state. The main control board 71 functions as a game state control means in order to restart the unit specific section of the set.
Further, the main control board 71 outputs a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won at the first hit of the transition lottery to the outside, and when the unit identification section of the next set is started, a new unit specification section is started. A signal indicating that the signal has been passed is output to the outside. In particular, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the outside indicating that a new unit specific section has been passed when another set of unit specific sections is restarted after the end of the bonus state, while the bonus state starts. The main control board 71 functions as an output means because the signal is not output to the outside when the unit specific section of the same set as the unit specific section that was executed at the time of the operation is restarted.

[Appendix 1]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having sex.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The reel is rotated based on the display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A stop operation when determined as an internal winning combination based on the detection of a symbol changing means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) that changes the symbol by causing the symbol and a start operation by the start operation detecting means. A push order combination (for example, F_ push order bell 1 to) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including 6) and a plurality of reels are provided to stop each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting the stop operation for causing the reeling, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stopping operation detecting means. With the reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the determined timing. , Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. When a predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining means, the winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. The reel stop control means includes a predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, a main control board 71) that carries over the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination until it is determined that a prize has been won, and the reel stop control means is the predetermined combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game in which is not carried over as the internal winning combination (for example, between MB non-flags), the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means. While stopping the fluctuation, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the front is also stopped. When the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the symbol is determined according to the order of the stop operation. It is characterized in that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the display means can display the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the predetermined combination has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachi-slot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, it becomes possible to win a rare role by winning the push order role during the flag interval. , The appearance frequency of rare roles can be increased without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub control board 72) for notifying the order of the stop operations and the predetermined combination carry-over means are used. If a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined number of precursory games is completed) is satisfied in a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, a predetermined lottery (for example, F_ push order bell is displayed at the time of winning) for a predetermined period. The lottery state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the lottery state (for example, CT) for performing the flag conversion lottery for whether or not to make the lottery, and the push order combination in the lottery state are determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the conversion lottery means for performing the predetermined lottery is further provided, and the notification means is a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means until the predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, in the precursory game of CT), when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means is notified of the order of the stop operations necessary for displaying the first symbol combination. In the lottery state, when the conversion lottery means wins the predetermined lottery, the symbol display means is notified of the order of stop operations necessary for displaying the second symbol combination, while the conversion is performed. It is characterized in that when the predetermined lottery of the lottery means is not won, the symbol display means is notified of the order of stop operations necessary for displaying the first symbol combination.

According to such a gaming machine, a lottery state for performing a predetermined lottery is provided between the flags, and a stop operation for notifying the state before the lottery state between the flags starts and the lottery state between the flags is performed. Make the content different. Specifically, before the lottery state starts, a notification for displaying the first symbol combination is always performed, and during the lottery state, when the lottery is won, the second symbol that is not displayed between the non-flags is displayed. Notification for displaying the combination is performed, and conversely, when the lottery is not won, notification for displaying the first symbol combination is performed. When the second symbol combination (rare role) is continuous, the player knows that it is between the flags. Therefore, even between the flags, the first symbol combination is intentionally notified to play the game. It is suitable because it can make it difficult for a person to understand the current state. Further, by controlling the notification content by a predetermined lottery, the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) during the flags can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery. A period having a predetermined playability can be provided, and the playability between the flags can be diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the conversion lottery means wins the predetermined lottery, or when the second symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means based on the notification of the notification means, it is a privilege. It is further provided with a privilege granting means (for example, a main control board 71) for granting (for example, a privilege of maintaining the duration of CT).

When a predetermined lottery is won, a notification for displaying the second symbol combination is performed. Therefore, according to such a gaming machine, the second symbol combination (rare role) is displayed, and a privilege is given. Will be done. As a result, during the time between the flags, not only the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare role) but also the privilege to be given can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery. Can be diversified.

[Appendix 2]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having sex.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The reel is rotated based on the display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol by causing the symbol, and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. First combination (for example, F_pushing order combination 1 to) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including 6) and a plurality of reels are provided to stop each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting the stop operation for causing the stop operation, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stopping operation detecting means. With a reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the determined timing. Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. When a predetermined combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining means, the winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. It is specified that the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means (for example, the main control board 71) and the predetermined combination carrying-over means until it is determined that the prize has been won. The specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the state (for example, CT) and the numerical information (for example, the difference number in CT) indicating the duration of the specific state in the specific state are counted. When the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) and the counting result of the counting means reach a predetermined threshold value, the specific state When the specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for terminating the state and the first combination are determined as the internal winning combination during the specific state, a predetermined lottery (for example, F_pushing order bell winning cactus at the time of winning) One of a plurality of lottery stages having different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means and the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the flag conversion lottery for displaying. The lottery stage setting means (for example, the main control board 71) for setting the lottery stage (for example, CT meter) and the notification means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board) for notifying the information of the stop operation. 71, the sub-control board 72), and the reel stop control means is the first in a game (for example, between MB non-flags) in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol variation is stopped so that the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination, while the symbol variation is made impossible to display the second symbol combination. When the predetermined combination is stopped and the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the order of the stop operations is When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination, and the counting means wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. In the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, the predetermined value is added to the numerical information to be counted by the player and the predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold value. A predetermined value is added to the numerical information, and in the specific state, the second winning combination (for example, F_single chili lip 1 to F_3 consecutive chili lip 4) is used as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. In response to the determination, the currently set lottery stage is updated to a lottery stage that is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage, and the notification means is changed to the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. In the case of winning, the symbol display means is notified of the order of the stop operations necessary for displaying the second symbol combination, while the conversion lottery means is not selected for the predetermined lottery. It is characterized in that the symbol display means is notified of the order of stop operations necessary for displaying the first symbol combination.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the predetermined combination has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachi-slot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, it becomes possible to win a rare role by winning the first role during the flag interval. , The appearance frequency of rare roles can be increased without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period between the flags, and if the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during this specific state, a predetermined lottery is performed. The content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of the lottery is different. Specifically, when the lottery is won, a notification is given to display the second symbol combination which is not displayed between the non-flags, and conversely, when the lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is notified to display. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing the stop operation according to the notification.

Further, the specific state ends when the numerical information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold value, and the threshold value increases when the predetermined lottery result performed at the time of winning the first winning combination is won, and the numerical information increases when the numerical information is not won. Since the predetermined lottery is also related to the above-mentioned notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (winning the predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is extended, and the first When the symbol combination is displayed (non-winning in a predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state will be exhausted.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the duration of a specific state is controlled according to the combination of displayed symbols (specifically, according to a predetermined lottery result) while changing the stop control between the flags. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability between the flags (specific state).

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, so that the second symbol combination (rare combination) in the specific state is used. The frequency of can be adjusted according to the lottery probability (lottery stage) of a predetermined lottery. In addition, this lottery stage is updated (promoted) to a lottery stage in which it is easy to win a predetermined lottery if the second winning combination wins during the specific state. As a result, the player becomes strongly interested in the winning combination in the specific state (that is, the more the second role is won, the easier it is to win the predetermined lottery, and as a result, the specific state is changed. It will continue for a long time), and the playability between the flags can be diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as a state for playing a game, in addition to a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and the specific state (for example, CT), information on a stop operation is notified to the normal state. When the player further has an advantageous state (for example, usually ART) which is advantageous to the player, and the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific state, the advantageous state continues. It is characterized by further including an additional control means (for example, a main control board 71) for extending the period.

According to such a gaming machine, the winning of the second role in the specific state leads not only to the promotion of the lottery stage but also to the extension of the duration of the advantageous state. From the player's point of view, he / she will be more interested in the winning role in the specific state, so that the playability between the flags can be diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second combination is the number of specific symbols (for example, Chilean symbols) displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. The additional control means includes a plurality of different types of second roles (for example, F_single chili lip 1 to 4 and F_2 consecutive chili lip 1 to 4 and triple chili lip 1 to 4), and the additional control means is described when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The second role, in which the number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means is large, is characterized in that the duration of the advantageous state is extended longer.

According to such a gaming machine, the amount of addition for the duration of the advantageous state differs depending on the number of specific symbols displayed at the time of winning the second role, so that the playability between the flags can be diversified. ..

[Appendix 3]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having sex.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The reel is rotated based on the display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol by causing the symbol, and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. First combination (for example, F_pushing order combination 1 to) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including 6) and a plurality of reels are provided to stop each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting the stop operation for causing the stop operation, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stopping operation detecting means. With a reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the determined timing. Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. When a predetermined combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining means, the winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. When the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means (for example, the main control board 71) and the predetermined combination carrying-over means until it is determined that the prize has been won, the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination. A specific state start means (for example, a main control board 71) for starting a specific state, and a counting means (for example, a difference number during CT) for counting the numerical information (for example, the difference number in CT) indicating the duration of the specific state in the specific state. , Main control board 71) and the specific state are terminated when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value. When the specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) and the first combination are determined as the internal winning combination during the specific state, whether to display the cactus at the time of a predetermined lottery (for example, F_pushing order bell winning). One lottery stage (for example, one lottery stage from a plurality of lottery stages having different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means and the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the flag conversion lottery). For example, a lottery stage setting means (for example, main control board 71) for setting a CT meter) and a notification means (for example, information display 14, display unit 100, main control board 71, sub-control) for notifying information of a stop operation. In a game (for example, between MB non-flags) in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the reel stop control means includes a board 72) and the first combination is an internal winning combination. When determined as a combination, the symbol display means stops the fluctuation of the symbol so that the first symbol combination can be displayed, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. When the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the predetermined combination is determined according to the order of the stop operation. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination, and the counting means itself wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. A predetermined value is added to the numerical information to be counted, and a predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold, and in the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, the numerical information to be counted by itself is added. On the other hand, a predetermined value is added, and when the notification means wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means, the order of stop operations necessary for causing the symbol display means to display the second symbol combination. On the other hand, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is not won, the order of the stop operations necessary for causing the symbol display means to display the first symbol combination is notified, and the conversion is performed. When the lottery stage setting means sets a specific lottery stage (for example, CT meter “MAX”), the lottery means always wins the predetermined lottery during a predetermined number of unit games, and the lottery stage setting means. Is characterized in that when a predetermined lottery stage is set, the predetermined lottery is won with a predetermined probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the predetermined combination has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachi-slot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, it becomes possible to win a rare role by winning the first role during the flag interval. , The appearance frequency of rare roles can be increased without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period between the flags, and if the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during this specific state, a predetermined lottery is performed. The content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of the lottery is different. Specifically, when the lottery is won, a notification is given to display the second symbol combination which is not displayed between the non-flags, and conversely, when the lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is notified to display. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing the stop operation according to the notification.

Further, the specific state ends when the numerical information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold value, and the threshold value increases when the predetermined lottery result performed at the time of winning the first winning combination is won, and the numerical information increases when the numerical information is not won. Since the predetermined lottery is also related to the above-mentioned notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (winning the predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is extended, and the first When the symbol combination is displayed (non-winning in a predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state will be exhausted.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the duration of a specific state is controlled according to the combination of displayed symbols (specifically, according to a predetermined lottery result) while changing the stop control between the flags. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability between the flags (specific state).

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination (rare combination) between the flags is controlled. The frequency of can be adjusted according to the lottery probability (lottery stage) of a predetermined lottery. In particular, when a specific lottery stage is set as the lottery stage, the player will always win the predetermined lottery during the predetermined number of unit games, so that he / she can expect the subsequent games. The fun of the game is improved.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the specific state, the lottery stage setting means has a probability corresponding to the currently set lottery stage. It is characterized in that the stage is updated to a lottery stage in which it is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage.

According to such a gaming machine, promotion of the lottery stage based on the second role will be performed with a probability according to the currently set lottery stage, so that the promotion of the lottery stage has a new playability. It can be made to improve the fun of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second combination is the number of specific symbols (for example, Chilean symbols) displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. The lottery stage setting means includes when a plurality of different types of second roles (for example, F_single chili lip 1 to 4 and F_2 consecutive chili lip 1 to 4 and triple chili lip 1 to 4) are stopped, and the lottery stage setting means is stopped. The second role, which has a larger number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means, has a higher probability of updating the currently set lottery stage to a lottery stage in which it is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability of promoting the lottery stage differs depending on the number of specific symbols displayed at the time of winning the second winning combination, so that the playability between the flags can be diversified.

[Appendix 4]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), for the player, information for establishing the internal winning combination so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. A gaming machine that notifies a player of advantageous information is known. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profit of the player (so-called ball ejection). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. Here, when navigating on the main side, the navigator has a strong meaning of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current game situation.

However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the mode of the navigation becomes monotonous and the variety of games is impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of various navigations while appropriately performing navigations that affect profits on the main side.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, CT) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state as a state for playing a game, and a plurality of symbols are displayed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reel (for example, a display window 4), and a main control for the progress of the game. A control unit (for example, a main control board 71) and a sub control unit (for example, a sub control board 72) for controlling an effect related to a game are provided, and the main control unit is a start operation for detecting a start operation by a player. A symbol changing means (for example, a motor drive circuit) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the detection means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the start operation by the start operation detecting means. 39, based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means with the main control board 71), the first symbol combination (for example, replay) or the first symbol combination (for example, replay) according to the order of the stop operation when determined as the internal winning combination. A combination of a plurality of symbols including a combination of 2 symbols (for example, a reach-eye lip) can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination, and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel). The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. As a result, the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. The winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the display means, and the advantageous state. If you win the advantageous state lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the first lottery (for example, CT lottery) and the first lottery that the advantageous state lottery means performs, you win. The advantageous state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the advantageous state after a predetermined number of unit games have been played, and the push order combination are internal reels. When determined as a lottery, if the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the second lottery (for example, the flag conversion lottery) and the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means are won, a special privilege is obtained. It has a privilege giving means (for example, a main control board 71) for giving (for example, a CT winning), and the reel stop control means has a stop operation when the pushing order combination is determined as an internal winning combination. The symbol display means is stopped to change the symbol so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed according to the order, and the sub-control unit executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation. In the unit game of a predetermined number of times from winning the first lottery performed by the effect executing means (for example, the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72) and the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means to the start of the advantageous state, the push. When the forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it has a notification lottery means (for example, a sub-control board 72) that performs a third lottery (for example, a navigation lottery in a CT precursor), and the sub-control unit said. When the effect executing means wins the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means of the main control unit or the third lottery performed by the notification lottery means of the sub control unit, the second lottery is displayed on the symbol display means. It is characterized by executing an effect according to the order of stop operations for displaying a symbol combination.

In such a gaming machine, if the second lottery performed on the main (main control unit) side is won, a special privilege is given, and the second symbol is given by the effect execution means on the sub (sub control unit) side. A notification is made to display the combination. Since the second symbol combination is displayed by performing the stop operation according to this notification, the second symbol combination means a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given (for example, reach eyes) from the player's point of view. It will be. Therefore, if the second symbol combination is displayed but no privilege is given, the player feels a strong dissatisfaction and loses his interest. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main side determines whether or not to grant the privilege, and the second symbol combination is notified according to this determination, so that the notification that affects the privilege (profit) is notified. It can be managed appropriately on the main side.

By the way, in a pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control is performed after a predetermined number of games, for example, ART, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. In the case of winning, ART may actually be started after several precursor games. During such a precursory game, it has already been decided to give a privilege (profit) to the player, so even if the second symbol combination is displayed and the privilege associated with this display is not given. , The player does not feel dissatisfied. That is, since advantageous control is performed when several precursory games are completed, the player feels that the second symbol combination displayed during the precursory game has brought benefits, which is a hobby. It won't hurt. On the other hand, increasing the chances of displaying the second symbol combination (for example, reach) that is displayed when a special privilege is granted increases the variation in how the symbol combination is displayed and improves the playability. do.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification lottery means on the sub (sub-control unit) side is the first during the precursory game (a predetermined number of unit games from the winning of the first lottery to the start of the advantageous state). 3 Lottery is performed, and the effect executing means notifies the second symbol combination based on the lottery result. Although this notification is not related to the granting of the privilege as described above, the second symbol combination displayed when the special privilege is granted can be displayed by performing the stop operation according to the notification. Sex improves. As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification that affects the profit (privilege) is managed on the main side, while the notification that does not affect the profit is diverse as a way of showing on the sub side. A certain notification can be made.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting means is characterized in that when the second lottery is won, the privilege of winning the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means is given.

Since the advantageous state starts when the first lottery is won, according to such a gaming machine, when the second lottery is won (as a result, the second symbol combination is displayed), the advantageous state starts. Also in this case, the second symbol combination is notified along with the third lottery during the precursory game until the advantageous state starts. From the player's point of view, is the display of the second symbol combination displayed because it is in the precursor game (that is, is it displayed as a result of the third lottery), or is it shifted to the precursor game with this display? Since it is not possible to know whether it was done (that is, whether it was displayed as a result of the second lottery), the player will be strongly interested in the flow of the game so far, and the interest will be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting means does not grant the special privilege when the third lottery performed by the notification lottery means of the sub control unit is won, and the main control unit. It is characterized in that the special privilege is given when the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means is won.

According to such a gaming machine, a special privilege is given only when the second lottery performed on the main side is won among the second lottery and the third lottery which are the conditions for notifying the second symbol combination. If you win the third lottery performed on the sub side, no special benefits will be given. As a result, the notification that affects the profit (privilege) can be managed on the main side, while the notification that does not affect the profit can be variously notified on the sub side as a way of showing in the production.

[Appendix 5]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having sex.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying information of a normal state and a stop operation as a state for playing a game. There are a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The symbol is rotated by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, when the internal winning combination is determined, according to the order of the stop operation. A first combination (for example, F_pushing order bells 1 to 6) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed, and a stop. A second role (for example, F_single reel 1 to) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, chili lip) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of operations. 4. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including F_2 reels 1 to 4, F_3 reels 1 to 4), and the above. It is provided corresponding to a plurality of reels, and is determined by a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determining means. A reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the internal winning based on the combination of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. A winning combination (for example, MB) is used as an internal winning combination by a winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means has won, and the internal winning combination determining means. Once determined, the predetermined combination will be used as an internal winning combination until it is determined by the winning determination means that the predetermined combination has won a prize. The predetermined combination carry-over means to be carried over (for example, the main control board 71), the notification means for notifying the information of the stop operation (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72), and the above-mentioned advantages. In the state, and when the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, if the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first lottery (for example, F_pushing order bell winning combination) is determined. A first conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) that performs a flag conversion lottery for whether or not to display a cactus at times, and the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination by the advantageous state and the predetermined combination carry-over means. If the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination when it is not carried over, a flag conversion of whether or not to display the chili lip at the time of winning the second lottery (for example, F_single chili lip, F_2 consecutive chili lip, F_3 consecutive chili lip) A second conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing lottery) is provided, and the reel stop control means is a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means (for example). , MB non-flag), when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination while stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, while stopping the fluctuation of the symbol. In a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the combination is made impossible to display and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped and the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of the stop operation, and the predetermined combination carry-over means is used to stop the fluctuation of the symbol. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game in which the combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means is combined with the third symbol or the fourth symbol according to the order of the stop operation. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means while the combination can be displayed and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the symbol is determined. The display means stops the fluctuation of the symbol so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed, while the display means stops the fluctuation of the symbol so that the third symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the notification means is the first conversion lottery. When the first lottery of the means is won, the order of the stop operations necessary for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified. On the other hand, when the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means is not won, the symbol display means is notified of the order of the stop operations necessary for displaying the first symbol combination, and also. When the second lottery of the second conversion lottery means is won, the second conversion lottery is notified while notifying the order of the stop operations necessary for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display means. When the second lottery of the means is not won, the symbol display means is notified of the order of stop operations necessary for displaying the third symbol combination.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the predetermined combination has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachi-slot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. Further, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the order of the stop operations between the flags, and between the flags. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, the rare role is won by the winning of the first role between the flags. In addition to being able to do this, the rare role will always win a prize in the winning of the second role, and the appearance frequency of the rare role can be increased without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag period, the first lottery is performed, and the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the non-flag interval. The second lottery is performed, and the content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of these lottery is different. Specifically, when the first lottery is won, a notification is given to display the second symbol combination which is not displayed between the non-flags, and conversely, when the first lottery is not won, the first Notify to display the symbol combination of 1. Further, when the second lottery is won, a notification is given to display the fourth symbol combination, and conversely, when the second lottery is not won, the third symbol combination is displayed. Notify.

In this way, between the flags, the combination of the symbols to be notified based on the first lottery is determined, and between the non-flags, the combination of the symbols to be notified based on the second lottery is determined, so that the combination between the flags and the non-flags is determined. In both cases, the combination of displayed symbols can be controlled, and the playability of both flags and non-flags can be enhanced.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, a privilege (for example, the first lottery) is obtained when the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means is won or when the second lottery of the second conversion lottery means is won. A privilege granting means (for example, a main control board 71) that grants a privilege to maintain the end difference number of CTs in the case of winning a lottery, and also grants a privilege to add the number of ART games when winning the second lottery. It is characterized by further preparation.

If the first lottery is won, the second symbol combination is displayed by following the notification, and if the second lottery is won, the fourth symbol combination is displayed by following the notification. It is possible to control the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols (rare role) to which the privilege is given between the flags and the non-flags, and enhance the playability of both the flags and the non-flags. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first conversion lottery means performs the first lottery so as to win with a probability corresponding to a set first lottery stage (for example, a CT meter), and the above-mentioned When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the currently set first lottery stage is changed from the first lottery stage. Also characterized by further comprising a first lottery stage setting means (for example, a main control board 71) for updating to the first lottery stage having a high probability of winning the first lottery.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag period, the first lottery stage is updated (promoted) to the first lottery stage with a higher probability of winning the first lottery. ). As a result, the player becomes strongly interested in the winning combination during the flags, and the playability during the flags can be diversified. Further, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag period, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the third symbol combination is displayed. It is preferable because it can be grasped that the first lottery stage has been promoted.

[Appendix 6]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having sex.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying information of a normal state and a stop operation as a state for playing a game. There are a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The symbol is rotated by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, when the internal winning combination is determined, according to the order of the stop operation. A first combination (for example, F_pushing order bells 1 to 6) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed, and a stop. A second role (for example, F_single reel 1 to) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, chili lip) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of operations. 4. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including F_2 reels 1 to 4, F_3 reels 1 to 4), and the above. It is provided corresponding to a plurality of reels, and is determined by a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determining means. A reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the internal winning based on the combination of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. A winning combination (for example, MB) is used as an internal winning combination by a winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means has won, and the internal winning combination determining means. Once determined, the predetermined combination will be used as an internal winning combination until it is determined by the winning determination means that the predetermined combination has won a prize. The internal winning combination is determined between the predetermined combination carrying-over means to be carried over (for example, the main control board 71) and the predetermined combination carrying-over means in the advantageous state not carrying over the predetermined combination (for example, between the non-flags of the normal ART). If the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination and then a predetermined number of unit games are played without winning the predetermined combination (for example, when the precursor is exhausted), the duration of the advantageous state is extended. The second combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) and the internal winning combination determining means during the additional game state. The first additional winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the first additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state and the internal winning combination determining means during the additional gaming state. Then, a conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) that performs a predetermined lottery (for example, a flag conversion lottery for whether or not to display a cactus when the F_pushing order bell is won) and the predetermined lottery means performed by the conversion lottery means. When the lottery is won, the second additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the additional game state and the notification means for notifying the stop operation information (for example, the information display 14, the display unit). 100, main control board 71, sub control board 72), and the reel stop control means is a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, between MB non-flags). ), When the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination and stops the fluctuation of the symbol, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of operations, and the predetermined combination is used as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game that has not been carried over, the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of the stop operation. In a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means while stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, the second When the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol variation is stopped so that the symbol display means can display the fourth symbol combination, while the symbol variation is made impossible to display the third symbol combination. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in a state where the predetermined winning combination carry-over means in the advantageous state is not carried over, the notification means determines the symbol. The first notification lottery (for example, F_single chili lip, F_2 consecutive chili lip, F_3 consecutive chili lip) that determines whether or not to notify the display means of the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination is displayed. The internal winning combination in a state where the first notification drawing means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing the flag conversion lottery for whether or not to make the predetermined combination and the predetermined combination carry-over means in the advantageous state do not carry over the predetermined combination. During the predetermined number of unit games (for example, during the precursory game of CT) from the determination means of determining the predetermined combination as the internal winning combination to the start of the additional game state by the additional game starting means. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the second notification lottery means for performing the second notification lottery to determine whether or not the order of the stop operation is notified by the notification means ( For example, the sub-control board 72) is further provided, and the notification means is based on the lottery results of the first notification lottery of the first notification lottery means and the second notification lottery of the second notification lottery means. It is characterized by notifying information of a stop operation.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the predetermined combination has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachi-slot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. Further, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the order of the stop operations between the flags, and between the flags. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, the rare role is won by the winning of the first role between the flags. In addition to being able to do this, the rare role will always win a prize in the winning of the second role, and the appearance frequency of the rare role can be increased without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability.

By the way, in a pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control is performed after performing a predetermined number of games (precursor game) instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. There is. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game machine is in an advantageous state and the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, when the flag is between the flags during the advantageous state, the additional gaming state is started. A predetermined number of precursor games are played before the start of.

Since the stop control is different between the flags as described above, the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) is performed when the precursory game is performed between the flags as in the gaming machine of the present invention. Therefore, the player may know that the game is in progress. For example, during the flag interval, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed for the winning of the second combination, and the third symbol combination is not displayed, while during the non-flag interval, the pressing order of the second combination is displayed. Since the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed, if the fourth symbol combination is frequently displayed regardless of the pressing order, the player may be in the middle of the flags (during the precursory game). Will be understood.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the period between the flags (during the precursory game), the pushing order (order of the stop operation) is intentionally notified. When the second combination is won between the flags, the fourth symbol combination is displayed regardless of the push order, so it is not necessary to notify the push order normally, but when the push order is notified, the push order is notified. The player recognizes that the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the notified push order (note that the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the push order between the non-flags, so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed in the notified game. When the symbol combination is displayed, the player can easily recognize that it is between non-flags), and it is difficult for the player to grasp that it is between flags (during precursory game). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game between the flags (during the precursory game) from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the playability during the flags.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main control unit (for example, the main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub control unit (for example, the sub control board 72) that controls the production related to the game. The second notification lottery means is characterized by having the sub-control unit.

In recent years, it has been required to appropriately manage the profit of the player on the main (main control unit) side, and the notification of the stop operation affects the profit. Therefore, the notification of the stop operation that affects the profit is the main. It needs to be controlled on the side. In this respect, the notification of the push order when the second winning combination is won during the flags does not affect the profit (that is, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed during the flags), so that the present invention has. In the game machine concerned, the notification is controlled on the sub (sub control unit) side. Since the capacity of the main control unit is larger than that of the sub control unit, the capacity and processing load of the main control unit can be reduced by controlling the notification when the profit is not affected on the sub side. Suitable.

[Appendix 7]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that informs a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so that the winning combination is not missed. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). Further, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) with a high probability that the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is also called an ART machine or the like.

According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will hope that the period of time will continue for a long time.

Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as internal winning roles. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game, which improves the interest of the game.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the playability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the number of AT games has been required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest in adding an advantageous state and allows a player to continue playing a game without getting bored.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) and stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The symbol display by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means and the reel stop control means, the symbol A winning determination means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining whether or not an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on a combination of symbols displayed on the display means, and predetermined conditions. When is satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the additional game state. According to the internal winning combination determined by the means, the additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state (for example, adding the number of ART games) and the additional game state, the above-mentioned The counting means (for example, CT game number counter, main control board 71) for counting the number of unit games whose duration is not extended by the additional control means, and the counting result of the counting means are set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times). When it reaches, the additional game ending means for ending the additional game state. (For example, the main control board 71).

In such a gaming machine, when the game shifts to the additional gaming state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games whose duration is not extended (the addition is not performed) during the addition game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the addition game state, the unit game Since the number of times is not counted, the additional game state will continue for a long time as the additional game is performed. For the player, the additional game state does not know how long the additional game state will continue, and as long as the additional game state is performed during the additional game state, the additional game state will not end. It is possible to continue the game without getting bored because it has a strong interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the additional game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination (for example, F_certain chili lip, F_1 certain chili lip) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the conversion lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery. (For example, the main control board 71) is further provided, and when the first winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means as the internal winning combination, the additional control means wins the predetermined lottery and the continuation period is set. When the second winning combination (for example, cactus, weak cherry, strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the duration is extended by the second additional amount. The counting means is characterized in that when the duration is extended in response to the determination of the first winning combination as an internal winning combination, the counting result is returned to the initial value.

In such a gaming machine, when the first combination or the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the additional gaming state, the addition is performed, and the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the addition is performed according to the above, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value. As a result, for example, even if the additional game state is just before the end (the counting result is close to a predetermined number of times), the additional game state is restarted from the beginning by performing the additional game according to the first combination. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the additional game state.

In addition, the addition based on the first combination (addition to return the counting result to the initial value) is performed only when the first combination wins a predetermined lottery when the internal winning combination is determined, so that the player can receive the addition. It is possible to prevent excessive profits from being given, and it is possible to balance the profits of the player and the game store.

[Appendix 8]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that informs a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so that the winning combination is not missed. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). Further, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) with a high probability that the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is also called an ART machine or the like.

According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will hope that the period of time will continue for a long time.

Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as internal winning roles. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game, which improves the interest of the game.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the playability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the number of AT games has been required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest in adding an advantageous state and allows a player to continue playing a game without getting bored.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The symbol is rotated by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) and stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The symbol display by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol is stopped. A winning determination means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining whether or not an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on a combination of symbols displayed on the display means, and predetermined conditions. When is satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the additional game state. An additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state and the additional gaming state according to the determination of the predetermined combination (for example, the triple chili lip) as the internal winning combination by the means. In the counting means (for example, CT game number counter, main control board 71) for counting the number of unit games whose duration is not extended by the additional control means, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) by the counting means. When the unit game is counted, the additional game state is terminated. The additional game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) is provided, and the additional control means has the predetermined combination when the number of extensions of the continuation period during the additional game state is a specific number or less. Is determined as an internal winning combination by extending the duration by the first additional amount (for example, 10 games), and when the number of extensions exceeds the specified number of times, the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. It is characterized in that the duration is extended by a second additional amount (for example, 20 games) larger than the first additional amount according to the fact that the game has been played.

In such a gaming machine, when the game shifts to the additional gaming state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games whose duration is not extended (the addition is not performed) during the addition game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the addition game state, the unit game Since the number of times is not counted, the additional game state will continue for a long time as the additional game is performed. For the player, the additional game state does not know how long the additional game state will continue, and as long as the additional game state is performed during the additional game state, the additional game state will not end. It is possible to continue the game without getting bored because it has a strong interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the additional game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the number of times of addition (the number of times of extension of the continuation period) performed by a predetermined combination exceeds a specific number of times, the amount to be added per time is calculated from the first addition amount. Increase to the second additional amount. As described above, since the addition is performed, the counting by the counting means is not performed and the addition game state continues. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the addition amount per time increases as the addition game state continues. It is possible to have expectations about the game, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the additional game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the counting means returns the counting result to the initial value when the duration is extended in response to the determination of the predetermined winning combination as the internal winning combination. And.

According to such a gaming machine, when the addition is performed triggered by a predetermined combination, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value. As a result, for example, even if the additional game state is just before the end (the counting result is close to the predetermined number of times), the additional game state is restarted from the beginning by performing the additional game with the predetermined combination as an opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to expect an increase in the amount of addition per time. Here, if the additional game state is not restarted, the winning probability of the predetermined combination must be set to a certain probability or higher in order to have the game property of increasing the additional amount per time, and the balance of the game is lost. However, by resuming the additional game state, even if the winning probability of the predetermined role is suppressed, it is possible to have the game property of increasing the additional amount per time, and the balance of the game can be balanced. It is possible to have high playability while trying.

[Appendix 9]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), for the player, information for establishing the internal winning combination so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. A gaming machine that notifies a player of advantageous information is known. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profit of the player (so-called ball ejection). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. As an example of such a navigation, a navigation for winning a bonus role at the time of winning the bonus role can be considered.

By the way, when navigating under the control of the sub side as in the past, the navigation has a meaning as a production, and a navigation like a production that suggests the game situation in order to realize various playability is used. Because it is possible, for example, even at the timing when the bonus role cannot be won, it was possible to navigate by aiming at the bonus symbol. On the other hand, when navigating on the main side that manages profits, the navigator has a strong meaning of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current game situation. For example, it is not possible to perform navigation for winning a bonus role at a timing when the bonus role cannot be won.

Here, in a pachislot machine, when a bonus role and another role are won in duplicate, the other role may be drawn in with priority over the bonus role, so the bonus role is won. However, the bonus role does not always win, and it is required to navigate at an appropriate timing.

The present invention has been made in view of such a request, and an object of the present invention is to perform navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The main control unit (for example, the main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game and the sub control unit (for example, the sub control board 72) for controlling the effect related to the game are provided, and the main control unit is a player. A symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) that detects the start operation by the start operation detecting means and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the variable means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Means (for example, main control board 71) and stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. By stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the reel is displayed on the symbol display means. A combination of a reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and a symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the above, the winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination has won. Once determined as a combination, the bonus carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over the bonus combination as an internal winning combination and the winning determination means until it is determined by the winning determination means that the bonus combination has won a prize. When it is determined that the bonus combination has been won, the bonus starting means for starting the bonus state (for example, the main control board 71) and the instruction information notifying means for notifying the instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation. (For example, information display 14, main control board 71), and the above-mentioned instruction. The information notification means is used when the first combination (for example, F_special combination 1 to 3) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination in the game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. , While notifying the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination, the second combination (for example, F_maintenance lip A) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. In this case, the reel stop control means does not notify the bonus instruction information, and when the bonus combination and the first combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is described. While the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that it can be displayed on the symbol display means, when the bonus combination and the second combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is combined with the symbol display means. It is characterized by stopping the fluctuation of the symbol so that it cannot be displayed.

In such a gaming machine, in order to notify the bonus instruction information that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination by the instruction information notification means possessed by the main control unit, it is under the control of the main side. You can navigate to win a bonus role. Here, the bonus instruction information is notified when the first combination that can display the combination of symbols according to the bonus combination on the symbol display means is won together with the bonus combination, and the combination of symbols according to the bonus combination is displayed as a symbol. If the second combination that cannot be displayed in the means is won together with the bonus combination, it will not be notified. Therefore, according to the navigation by the main control unit of the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform the navigation for winning the bonus combination at an appropriate timing.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the main control unit, after the internal winning combination determining means determines the bonus combination as the internal winning combination in a state where the bonus carry-over means does not carry over the bonus combination. When the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) for counting the number of unit games and the internal winning combination determining means determine the bonus combination as the internal winning combination in a state where the bonus carry-over means does not carry over the bonus combination. Further, a precursor game number determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining the precursor game count indicating the number of unit games until the bonus notification is performed to announce that the bonus combination has been carried over. The instruction information notifying means does not notify the bonus instruction information until the counting means counts the unit games for the number of precursor games, and the counting means has the unit games for the number of precursor games. When the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination after counting, the bonus instruction information is notified.

When the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination may be notified after the bonus combination has been won and the game has been played a predetermined number of times. For example, it is generally performed to enhance the effect of the effect by performing the effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over a plurality of games and notifying the presence or absence of the winning of the bonus role according to the result of the continuous effect. There is. In this case, if the bonus instruction information is notified on the main side during the continuous production, the meaning of the continuous production may be diminished and the interest may be impaired. Here, since the capacity of the main control unit is limited, it is preferable to control the production on the sub (sub control unit) side in order to perform various productions with a high production effect, while managing profits. The main control unit cannot receive a signal from the outside, and a device is required to appropriately grasp the timing at which the continuous effect controlled by the sub side ends.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main side determines the number of precursor games until the bonus is announced, and the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination for the unit game. Count the number of times. Then, when the counting result reaches the number of precursory games, the bonus instruction information is notified. Since the signal can be notified from the main side to the sub side, by controlling the production according to the number of games that will notify the bonus instruction information on the sub side, for example, a bonus on the main side during continuous production. It does not notify the instruction information. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side while ensuring a variety of productions.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. ), A main control unit (for example, the main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub control unit (for example, the sub control board 72) that controls the effect related to the game. The symbol is changed by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the first is according to the order of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination. A plurality of combinations including a push order combination (for example, F_3 selection bell_1st) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a bell spilled eye) can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from the inside, and a stop operation for stopping each reel provided corresponding to the plurality of reels are detected. Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol. Winning determination means (for example, main control board) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means. 71) And, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination until it is determined by the winning determination means that the bonus combination has won. The bonus combination is provided by the carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) and the winning determination means. When it is determined that the prize has been won, the bonus starting means for starting the bonus state (for example, the main control board 71) and the instruction information notifying means for notifying the instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation (for example, information display). The device 14, the main control board 71), and the instruction information notification means has a predetermined combination (for example, F_special combination) in addition to the bonus combination in a game in which the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination. When 1 to 3) are determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination is notified, while the pushing order combination is added to the bonus combination. When the internal winning combination is determined, the push order combination first instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means without notifying the bonus instruction information is provided. In a game in which the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, when the pushing order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified. The push order combination 2nd instruction information different from the push order combination 1 instruction information indicating the mode of operation is notified, and in the reel stop control means, the bonus combination and the predetermined combination are determined as internal winning combinations. If so, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, while the bonus combination and the push order combination are determined as the internal winning combination. The combination of symbols according to the bonus combination cannot be displayed on the symbol display means, and the variation of the symbols is stopped.

According to such a gaming machine, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notified by the instruction information notification means is the case where the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination together with the pushing order combination. Is the first instruction information for the push order combination, while it is the second instruction information for the push order combination when the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination together with the push order combination. Both the push order combination 1st instruction information and the push order combination 2nd instruction information indicate the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the instruction information notification From the type of notification of the push order combination by means, it is possible to grasp whether or not the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the push order combination.

[Appendix 10]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, as shown in Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075305), a gaming machine linked with a mobile phone or a smartphone owned by a player is also known. In such a gaming machine, by registering a player in cooperation with a mobile phone or the like, it is possible to manage the gaming history unique to the player and provide individual services that have never existed before. ..

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, it cannot be said that the conventional player registration type gaming machine is always highly convenient for the player, and there has been a demand for a device for further enhancing the convenience for the player.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to improve the convenience of a player registration type gaming machine.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that advances a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows according to the result of an internal lottery, and is an irradiation light device that irradiates irradiation light (for example, irradiation). The optical device B), a movable screen (for example, a screen device C) that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device, and a position where the movable screen is arranged can be adjusted. A drive device for driving the movable screen (for example, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2), a history management means for managing the game history indicating the result of the game (for example, the sub-control board 72), and the history management. A top screen (for example, top screen 211) that displays an outline game history that is a part of the game history managed by the means, and a detailed game including the outline game history of the game history managed by the history management means. A display device (for example, a first sub-display device 201) separate from the movable screen that displays a plurality of display screens including a game information screen (for example, game information screens 213, 214, 215) for displaying the history. An input receiving means (for example, a touch sensor 201a) for receiving input information for controlling the display of the display device, and a control means for controlling the display device based on the input information received by the input receiving means (for example, the touch sensor 201a). For example, the sub-control board 72) and the registration receiving means (for example, the sub-control board 72) that accepts the registration of the player who plays the game are provided, and the control means does not accept the registration by the registration receiving means. In this case, it is impossible to display the game information screen based on the input information, and when the registration receiving means accepts registration, the display device can display the game information screen based on the input information. It is characterized by switching the display of.

According to such a gaming machine, if the registration of the player is not accepted, the game information screen for displaying the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the display device, but if the registration of the player is accepted, the registration of the player is accepted. The game information screen can be displayed on the display device. Since the fact that a more detailed game history can be confirmed leads to an improvement in the convenience of the player, according to the game machine according to the present invention, the convenience can be improved in the player registration type game machine.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device for displaying a gaming information screen or the like is provided separately from a movable screen for displaying an image according to the effect. For example, a gaming machine that displays a game information screen or the like on a movable screen can be considered, but with such a gaming machine, it is difficult to display the gaming history during the production, and in fact, with a conventional gaming machine, It was possible to display various display screens on the movable screen only when the game was not played. However, the player may wish to confirm information other than the production during the game, and the conventional gaming machine that can display the display screen only when the game is not performed is inconvenient. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the display device is provided separately from the movable screen, various display screens can be displayed even while the effect is being executed on the movable screen, and the convenience is improved. do.

Further, when the image corresponding to the effect is displayed on the movable screen in which the position to be arranged is operated as in the gaming machine according to the present invention, various information other than the effect cannot be displayed correctly while the movable screen is in operation. There is a risk. In this regard, by displaying various display screens on a display device provided separately from the movable screen, various information other than the effect can be displayed even when the movable screen is operating and an effect with a high effect is being performed. It can be displayed properly and convenience is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the input receiving means is a touch sensor provided on the display unit of the display device.

According to such a gaming machine, since the player can input via the touch sensor, the display of the display device can be controlled by an intuitive operation.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided on the side of a pedestal portion (for example, a pedestal portion 10) having a substantially horizontal plane and the substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion, and is provided with a slot for inserting a game medium for playing a game. (For example, a medal insertion slot 22 provided on the right side of the pedestal portion 10) and a bet button (for example, a MAX bet button 11 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10) are further provided, and the display device is provided from the pedestal portion. It is characterized in that it is provided in the vicinity of the slot and / or the bet button on a surface that stands substantially vertically.

Generally, in a gaming machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side of the pedestal when viewed from the player, and a bet button and a start lever are provided on the left side when viewed from the player. , The player will operate the right side or the left side of the pedestal part. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device is provided on the side (right side or left side) of a surface that stands substantially vertically from the pedestal portion, and the display of the display device is controlled based on the touch input detected by the touch sensor. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device and an input device (touch sensor) for controlling the display are provided at a place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player is improved. .. In particular, since the display device with the touch sensor is provided on the surface that stands up from the pedestal portion (horizontal plane), the player can operate the display device while placing his / her hand on the pedestal portion. As a result, not only the operability is improved, but also the fatigue associated with the operation can be reduced, so that the operating rate can be expected to be improved.

[Appendix 11]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), for the player, information for establishing the internal winning combination so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. A gaming machine that notifies a player of advantageous information is known. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profit of the player (so-called ball ejection). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. Here, when navigating on the main side, the navigator has a strong meaning of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current game situation.

However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the mode of the navigation becomes monotonous and the variety of games is impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of various navigations while appropriately performing navigations that affect profits on the main side.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , A display window 4), a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of a game, and a sub control unit (for example, a sub control board 72) that controls an effect related to the game. The control unit rotates the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the order of the stop operations is determined when the internal winning combination is determined. Depending on the situation, the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes) is determined to be the first combination (for example, F_3 selection bell 1st) that can be stopped and displayed, and the internal winning combination. The third symbol combination (for example, triple reel lip) or the fourth symbol combination (for example, replay) includes a second combination (for example, F_certain reel) that can be stopped and displayed depending on the order of the stop operation. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability, and a stop provided corresponding to the plurality of reels to stop each reel. The stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting the operation, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Based on the above, the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the privilege according to the result of the game. Grant (for example, grant the privilege of paying out medals and shifting the RT game state according to the combination of displayed symbols, and granting rights to CZ, ART, CT according to the lottery based on the internal winning combination. (For example, the main control board 71) and the instruction information notifying means (for example, the information display 14, the main control board 71) for notifying the instruction information that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation. And, the sub-control unit has an effect executing means (for example, display unit 100, sub-control board 72) that executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation. ), And the privilege granting means is a case where the first symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means in a game in which the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the second symbol combination. The third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means in the game in which the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the fourth combination is displayed. When the same privilege is given and the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the case where the symbol combination of the above is displayed, the instruction information notification means causes the symbol display means to have the first symbol combination. In addition to notifying the instruction information that uniquely indicates the order of the stop operations for displaying, the effect executing means indicates the order of the stop operations for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notification means does not notify the instruction information, and the effect executing means combines the symbol display means with the third symbol. Alternatively, it is characterized in that an effect indicating the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination is executed.

In such a gaming machine, the navigation that affects the profit (privilege) is managed by the main (main control unit) side, while the navigation that does not affect the profit is managed by the sub (sub control unit) side. Specifically, the first combination that grants different benefits when the displayed combination of symbols is different (that is, the first combination is displayed when the first symbol combination is displayed and the second symbol combination is displayed. The navigation is performed by both the instruction information notification means controlled by the main side and the effect execution means controlled by the sub side, and the same privilege is given even if the combination of the displayed symbols is different. The navigation of the second role to be given (that is, the second role is given the same privilege when the third symbol combination is displayed and when the fourth symbol combination is displayed) is on the main side. It is not performed by the instruction information notification means of, but is performed only by the effect executing means on the sub side. Here, the navigation controlled on the sub side has a meaning as an effect, and it is possible to navigate in a variety of modes, and it is possible to realize various playability. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, navigation that affects profits is appropriately performed on the main side that manages profits, while navigation that does not affect profits is performed on the sub side with diversity. Can be done.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the fourth symbol combination is all on a predetermined line formed by connecting the unit symbol display areas for displaying one symbol of each reel in the symbol display means. It is a combination of symbols in which a specific symbol is displayed in the unit symbol display area, and the privilege granting means grants a privilege with a predetermined probability when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the effect executing means. Indicates the order of stop operations for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display means when the privilege granting means grants a privilege in a game in which the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination. While the effect is executed, the effect is not executed when the privilege granting means does not grant the privilege in the game in which the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second role is determined as the internal winning combination and it is decided to grant the privilege, the navigation (navigation) aiming at the fourth symbol combination in which the specific symbols are aligned on the line. On the other hand, even if the second role is decided as the internal winning role, if it is decided not to give the privilege, the navigation is not performed. Here, since it is decided before the combination of symbols is displayed whether or not to give the privilege, the profit obtained by the player does not change depending on the combination of the displayed symbols. By controlling such a navigation on the sub side, for example, it is possible to execute an effect such as "aim at a specific symbol" according to the type of privilege to be given, and it is possible to secure the diversity of the game. As a result, navigation that affects profits can be appropriately performed on the main side that manages profits, while navigation that does not affect profits can be performed on the sub side in a variety of ways.

[Appendix 12]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in AT machines and ART machines, it has been possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute AT on the sub control circuit side (sub side) according to the internal winning combination determined on the main control circuit side (main side). It was common. In an AT machine (ART machine), the medal payout rate differs depending on whether or not the AT is activated. Therefore, in a conventional gaming machine that performs AT lottery on the sub side, the medal payout rate is set only on the main side. It was supposed to be managed on the sub side as well.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, it is required to appropriately manage the medal payout rate, so it is not preferable to manage the medal payout rate on the sub side, and in recent years, AT has been executed. It is required that the main side also manages whether or not to do so. However, since the capacity of the storage means (ROM) is limited in the main control circuit, only a limited amount can be allocated to the management of the AT. On the other hand, if the capacity is suppressed and the AT management is monotonous, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is spoiled.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently securing the capacity of the main side while managing the AT on the main side.

[Means to solve problems]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification target combination (for example, the push order combination), which is the notification target combination, is determined as the winning combination, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, the correct push order). ) Is a notification game state (for example, a specific section) and a normal game state (for example, a normal section) that does not notify the advantageous stop operation mode, and controls the progress of the game. A first main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) and a sub control unit (for example, a sub control board 72) for controlling an effect are provided, and the main control unit is communicably connected to each other. It has a control unit (for example, a first main control board 71a) and a second main control unit (for example, a second main control board 71b), and the first main control unit has a plurality of notification target combinations. The winning combination is determined from the winning combination, and the second main control unit performs a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the notified gaming state.

In such a gaming machine, the main control unit has a plurality of control units, that is, a first main control unit and a second main control unit that are communicably connected, and the first main control unit determines the winning combination. Lottery (internal lottery) is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the notification gaming state (AT) is performed in the second main control unit. As a result, in the main control unit (main side) that controls the progress of the game, both the lottery of the winning combination and the lottery of the transition to the notification game state can be performed, and the lottery that affects the payout rate of medals can be performed. Can be properly managed on the main side. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since each of the first main control unit and the second main control unit performs the lottery, when the lottery is performed by only one control unit as in the conventional case. In comparison, a sufficient capacity for lottery can be secured, and as a result, the variation of lottery is increased, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous and the game is not spoiled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a setting means (for example, a setting key type switch 430, a main control board 71) for setting one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. ) Is further provided, and among the plurality of combinations, the set unquestioned combination determined as the winning combination with the same probability regardless of the set value set by the setting means, and the set value set by the setting means. The setting difference combination, which is determined as the winning combination with a certain probability, is included, and the second main control unit performs the transition lottery in response to the setting unquestioned combination being determined as the winning combination, while the setting is performed. It is characterized in that the transition lottery is not performed according to the fact that the difference combination is determined as the winning combination, and the transition lottery is performed in which the winning combination is won with the same probability regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to such a gaming machine, the transition lottery for whether or not to transition to the notified gaming state is performed with the same probability regardless of the set value when the set unquestioned combination is determined as the winning combination. .. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the notification gaming state can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in ball ejection performance can be set as the winning probability of the setting difference combination with the setting difference. Can be suppressed to. As a result, the difference in the payout performance for each set value can be given to the determination of the winning combination itself, not to the notified gaming state, so that the gambling is unnecessarily enhanced in the gaming machine having the notified gaming state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that a player can play with peace of mind.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second main control unit performs the transition lottery in which the combination determined by the first main control unit as the winning combination is won with a probability uniquely determined. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability of winning the transition lottery is uniquely determined for the winning combination and does not fluctuate. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, although the same winning combination is a winning combination, a state in which it is easy to win a transition lottery (so-called high probability state) or a state in which it is difficult to win a transition lottery (so-called low). It is possible to provide a gaming machine that a player can play with peace of mind without having a state such as (probability state) and without increasing gambling.

[Appendix 13]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

Further, in a game store where a game machine is actually installed, it is common to install an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer together with the game machine. For example, it is installed on the upper part of the game machine. The data counter receives the signal output from the gaming machine and displays the number of games, the number of bonuses, and the like.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in AT machines and ART machines, it has been possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute AT on the sub control circuit side (sub side) according to the internal winning combination determined on the main control circuit side (main side). It was common. Further, in the gaming machine, the signal output to the external device had to be performed from the main side. And, in the gaming machine, although the signal output from the main side to the sub side is allowed, the signal output from the sub side to the main side is not allowed, so the sub side like the conventional AT (ART machine). In a gaming machine that manages AT in, the lottery result on the sub side is estimated from the events that can be recognized on the main side (for example, the transition of the RT state or the stop operation is performed multiple times in a specific push order), and the lottery is performed. The result was output to an external device.

In such a conventional method, the timing of outputting the winning AT lottery to the external device is delayed by several games from the timing of the actual winning, and depending on the mode of the player's stop operation, the AT winning is accidentally won. Sometimes a signal was output. From the point of view of the game store, the accuracy of grasping the behavior of the game machine with the hall computer is reduced, and from the point of view of the player, the game history of the data counter is different from the actual history. There was a problem that it became difficult to select.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately outputting the result of AT lottery to an external device.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and a transition lottery for shifting the gaming state (for example, to a specific section). When the transition lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the transition lottery) and the transition lottery are won, the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (for example, a normal section) to the notified gaming state (for example, a specific section). It is advantageous for the player if the game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification target combination (for example, the push order combination), which is the combination of the notification target during the notification game state, are determined as the winning combination. When the notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100) for notifying the mode of the stop operation (for example, the pressing order of the correct answer) and the transition lottery are won, the transition lottery is performed. It is characterized by comprising an output means (for example, a main control board 71, an external centralized terminal board 73) for outputting a signal indicating that the winning is achieved to the outside.

In such a gaming machine, when the notification game state is entered, when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination, a so-called AT machine or ART machine is realized in order to notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. be able to. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the result (winning information) of the transition lottery to the notified gaming state is output, and the output of the winning information is performed on condition that the transition lottery is won. Therefore, unlike the conventional gaming machine, the information estimated from other events is not output, and the result of the transition lottery itself can be output as it is, so that the result of the transition lottery can be output with high accuracy. ..

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification game state is a gaming state in which one or a plurality of sets of unit notification games with a predetermined period as one set are performed, and the game state control means is a unit notification of the next set. When the execution of the game is permitted, the unit notification game of the next set is started after the end of one set of unit notification games, and when the output means wins the transition lottery, it indicates that the transition lottery has been won. A signal is output to the outside, and when the next set of unit notification games is started by the game state control means, a signal indicating that a new unit notification game has been started is output to the outside, and the bonus start condition is satisfied. Based on the above, a bonus starting means for starting a bonus state advantageous to the player (for example, the main control board 71) and a bonus ending means for ending the bonus state based on the establishment of the bonus ending condition (for example, the main control board 71). ), And when the bonus state is started during the notified game state, the game state control means restarts the notified game state after the end of the bonus state, and the output means is When the notification game state is resumed with the end of the bonus state, a signal is output to the outside if the first condition is satisfied, and a signal is sent to the outside if the first condition is not satisfied. It is characterized by not outputting.

In such a gaming machine, an external signal can be output not only when the transition lottery is won (so-called first hit) but also when the unit notification game of a new set is started, so that the exact number of sets can be grasped. be able to. Here, depending on the timing of winning the bonus, the bonus state may start in the middle of one set, and when the notification game state is restarted after the bonus ends, the count of the number of sets of the unit notification game shifts. It may end up. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the output of the signal to the outside is controlled based on the first condition, the count of the number of sets when the bonus state is sandwiched can be appropriately managed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first condition is that the unit notification game of the notification game state that resumes with the end of the bonus state is executed when the bonus state is started. The game is a unit notification game of a separate set, and the game state control means is the bonus state when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the bonus state is started during the notification game state. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the bonus state is started during the notification game state, the unit notification game of the separate set is restarted with the end of the bonus state. It is characterized in that the unit notification game that was being executed when the state is started is restarted.

More specifically, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the unit notification game restarted when a bonus state is sandwiched is a new set of unit notification games, a signal is output to the outside and the set is performed. While counting the number, if the unit notification game that resumes when the bonus state is sandwiched is the same set of unit notification game as the unit notification game at the start of the bonus, no signal is output to the outside. , Do not count the number of sets. As a result, it is possible to appropriately manage the count of the number of sets when the bonus state is sandwiched.

[Appendix 14]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a notification lamp for notifying when a player wins a favorable state such as a bonus. From the player's point of view, it is possible to know that the notification lamp is on / off to determine that the player is in an advantageous state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In this respect, since AT is in an advantageous state for the player as well as the bonus, it is required to devise a method of notifying the player of the result of the lottery for transition to AT.

However, with a lamp that simply turns on and off, although the presence or absence of a win can be immediately known, the player feels that the lamp only needs to be turned on, which makes it interesting, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device. There was a risk that the game would become monotonous due to the loss of interest in other productions such as.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having various variations in notification of the result of AT lottery.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations, and a transition lottery for shifting the gaming state (for example, to a specific section). When the transition lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the transition lottery) and the transition lottery are won, the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (for example, the normal section) to the notification gaming state (for example, the specific section). It is advantageous for the player if the game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification target combination (for example, the push order combination), which is the combination of the notification target during the notification game state, are determined as the winning combination. Notification means (for example, main control board 71, instruction monitor 147, sub control board 72, display unit 100) for notifying the mode of the stop operation (for example, the order of pressing the correct answer), and the notification means for notifying the result of the transition lottery. (For example, a main control board 71, a status display 147b), and the notification means has a plurality of light emitting units, each of which is turned on or off, and a light emitting unit that lights up among the plurality of light emitting units. It is characterized in that the result of the transition lottery is notified by a pattern of combination with a light emitting unit that turns off.

In such a gaming machine, when the notification game state is entered, when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination, a so-called AT machine or ART machine is realized in order to notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. be able to. Further, since the gaming machine according to the present invention has a notification means for notifying the result of the lottery for transition to the notification gaming state, it is possible to notify the player that the player is in an advantageous state. can. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to notify the player of the result of the transition lottery by the lighting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units, the transition lottery is performed by various variations of lighting patterns such as a winning pattern and a non-winning pattern. The result of can be reported. For the player, when the lighting patterns of the plurality of light emitting parts change, it is not possible to immediately grasp that the transition lottery has been won, but it is possible to grasp that the state is different from the normal state, and as a result, the subsequent game. It is possible to have a strong interest in the game, and to have a deep playability that has never been seen before.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification gaming state includes a plurality of types of notification gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the notification means is changed to one notification game state in the transition lottery. It is characterized in that the plurality of light emitting units are turned on or off in different combinations of patterns depending on whether the game is won or another notification game state is won.

According to such a gaming machine, since the lighting pattern differs depending on the type of the notification gaming state, it is possible to increase the variation of the lighting pattern. For the player, as the variation of the lighting pattern increases, it becomes difficult to accurately grasp the contents of each lighting pattern, so that the player has a strong interest in the subsequent game, and the game is deeper. It can have sex.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification gaming state includes a plurality of types of notification gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the notification means is changed to one notification game state in the transition lottery. It is characterized in that the plurality of light emitting units are turned on or off in the same combination pattern depending on whether the game is won or another notification game state is won.

According to such a gaming machine, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the notified gaming state, it is not possible to grasp the type of the winning notified gaming state from the lighting pattern. Depending on the skilled player, an advantageous lighting pattern among the lighting patterns of a plurality of light emitting units may be memorized, but a notification gaming state that is truly advantageous for the player (for example, a long AT such as 50 games) may be memorized. ) And the lighting pattern of the notification game state (for example, a short AT such as one game) that is not very advantageous for the player, so that the type of the winning notification game state cannot be grasped. It is possible to have a deeper playability.

[Appendix 15]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 15 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a game machine, in addition to the AT machine that manages the number of games that manages the duration of AT by the number of games, the so-called navigation number management AT machine that manages the duration of AT by the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified is known. Has been done. In the AT machine that manages the number of games, the duration of AT is guaranteed for the specified number of games, but in the AT machine that manages the number of navigations, if the navigation target roles are concentrated and won, it will end immediately. , It has caused the player to feel dissatisfied.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and in an AT machine (ART machine) for managing the number of navigations, a gaming machine that reduces the consumption speed of the number of navigations and does not spoil the interest during the AT period. The purpose is to provide.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal gaming state (for example, a low lip state) and a high probability replay state (for example, a high lip state) in which the probability that the replay combination is determined to be the winning combination is higher than that of the normal gaming state. A game machine having a state) and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the symbols by rotating the reels based on the establishment of a start condition. The first symbol combination (for example, the combination of the bell symbols) when the winning combination is determined based on the establishment of the start condition and the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71). ) Or a first combination (for example, combination "F_3 choice bell A") that allows stop display for a combination of a plurality of symbols including a second symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes), and when the winning combination is determined. A second role (eg, a combination of replay symbols) that allows stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a third symbol combination (for example, a combination of replay symbols) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, a combination of falling replay symbols). The combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining the winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the combination “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintenance lip_321”) and the plurality of reels. A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) that is provided correspondingly and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel, a winning combination determined by the combination determining means, and the stop operation. The stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol based on the detection of the stop operation by the detection means, and the first when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. When the symbol combination of 1 is displayed, the game value of the first quantity (for example, 9 medals) is given, while when the second symbol combination is displayed, the game value is smaller than the first quantity. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped in the high-probability re-gaming state with the game value-giving means (for example, the main control board 71) that gives value or does not give any game value, the third When the symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is maintained in the high-probability re-gaming state, while when the fourth symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state shifts from the high-probability re-gaming state to the normal gaming state. A transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift the gaming state to the gaming state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. The transition lottery means (for example, the main control board 71), the notification game start means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the notification game state when the transition lottery performed by the transition lottery means is won, and the notification. When the first combination is determined as the winning combination during the game state, the mode of the stop operation required to display the first symbol combination for the number of times indicated by the number of times of the first combination navigation (for example, the number of bell navigations). And, when the second combination is determined as the winning combination during the notification game state, the third symbol combination is displayed for the number of times indicated by the number of times of the second combination navigation (for example, the number of lip navigations). It is characterized by comprising a notification means (for example, a main control board 71, an instruction monitor 147, a sub control board 72, and a display unit 100) for notifying the mode of the stop operation necessary for the purpose.

In such a gaming machine, in the notification game state, notification is performed so that the first symbol combination having a high game value to be given is displayed at the time of winning the first combination, and high at the time of winning the second combination. Notify so that the combination of the third symbols that maintain the probability replay state is displayed. At this time, the notification to the first combination is performed as many times as the number of times of the first combination navigation, and the notification to the second combination is performed as many times as the number of times of the second combination navigation, so that the first combination and the second combination are performed. Notification for each of the roles can be performed based on the number of individual navigations. As a result, even if either the first combination or the second combination is concentrated and won during the notification game state, only one of the navigation times is consumed and the other navigation number is consumed. Therefore, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed, and as a result, the interest during the notification game state is not impaired.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a predetermined combination (for example, a combination related to a bonus) is determined as a winning combination by the combination determination means, the predetermined combination is displayed until a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. The predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71), the first addition means for increasing the number of times of the first combination navigation (for example, the main control board 71), and the number of times of the second combination navigation are increased. Further, the stop control means is further provided with a second addition means (for example, a main control board 71), and the first combination is a winning combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as a winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means. When the combination is determined, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed according to the mode of the stop operation, and the predetermined combination is carried over by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When the first combination is determined as the winning combination in the game carried over as the winning combination, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the first symbol combination can be displayed, while the second symbol combination is displayed. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so as not to be displayed, and the first combination is determined as the winning combination in the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means. In a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as a winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, the first addition means does not notify the mode of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination. The increase in the number of times of the first combination navigation is reduced as compared with the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the winning combination, and in the second addition means, the predetermined combination is carried over as the winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. The game is characterized in that the increase in the number of times of the second combination navigation is increased as compared with the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the winning combination.

According to such a gaming machine, in a state where a predetermined combination is carried over as a winning combination, only the first symbol combination having a high gaming value given at the time of winning the first combination is displayed. In this state, the first combination is not notified, and the consumption of the number of times of the first combination navigation can be suppressed. In addition, the number of 1st role navigation and the number of 2nd role navigation are individually increased (added), but in the state where the predetermined role is carried over, the consumption of the number of navigation is suppressed. On the contrary, the amount of increase in the number of times of the second role navigation of the second role, which consumes the number of times of navigation, is increased. As a result, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed, and as a result, the interest during the notification game state is not impaired.

[Appendix 16]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 16 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a game machine, in addition to the AT machine that manages the number of games that manages the duration of AT by the number of games, the so-called navigation number management AT machine that manages the duration of AT by the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified is known. Has been done. In the AT machine that manages the number of games, the duration of AT is guaranteed for the specified number of games, but in the AT machine that manages the number of navigations, if the navigation target roles are concentrated and won, it will end immediately. , It has caused the player to feel dissatisfied.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and in an AT machine (ART machine) for managing the number of navigations, a gaming machine that reduces the consumption speed of the number of navigations and does not spoil the interest during the AT period. The purpose is to provide.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that changes the symbols by rotating the reels based on the establishment of a start condition. A variable means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) and a combination determining means (for example, a winning combination) that determines a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of bonus combinations based on the establishment of the start condition. For example, a main control board 71), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. With the stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means. , When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped and the first symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination is displayed, the first specific gaming state (for example, MB1 gaming state) is started, and the second bonus. The specific game start means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the second specific game state (for example, the MB2 game state) when the second symbol combination corresponding to the combination is displayed, and the stop operation that is advantageous for the player. A transition lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) that performs a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the gaming state to a notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) for notifying the mode of the above, and the notification when the transition lottery is won. When the notification game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the game state and the notification target combination (for example, the push order combination) which is the combination of the notification target during the notification game state are determined as the winning combination, Notification means (for example, main control board 71, instruction monitor 147, sub control board 72, display unit 100) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, the pressing order of the correct answer) by the number of times indicated by the number of navigations. In the first specific gaming state, the notification target combination can be determined as the winning combination, while in the second specific gaming state, the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination. It is characterized by the fact that there is no such thing.

According to such a gaming machine, when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination during the notification game state, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified by the number of times indicated by the number of navigations. This notification target combination may be determined as a winning combination during the first specific gaming state that starts according to the first bonus combination, but the second specific gaming state that starts according to the second bonus combination. The inside is not decided as a winning role. Therefore, if the game shifts to the first specific gaming state during the notification game state, the game is performed while consuming the number of navigations, but if the second specific gaming state can be transitioned to during the notification game state, the navigation is performed. You can play the game without consuming the number of times. As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation can be relaxed by the game in the second specific gaming state, and as a result, the interest in the notified gaming state is not impaired.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) for counting the duration of the notified gaming state and the counting means count the predetermined period (for example, 1500 games), the navigation Further, the notification game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the notification game state regardless of the number of times is further provided, and the counting means is a period of the first specific gaming state performed during the notification game state. Is counted as the continuation period of the notified gaming state, while the period of the second specific gaming state performed during the notified gaming state is not counted as the continuation period of the notified gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the notified gaming state continues for a predetermined period, the notified gaming state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of navigations, so that the advantageous state for the player continues for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the game from being overwhelmed, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from increasing unnecessarily, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period of the second specific gaming state is not counted as the continuation period of the notified gaming state. If the second specific gaming state for suppressing the consumption of the number of navigations is counted as the continuation period of the notification gaming state, the period of the notification gaming state is shortened by the second specific gaming state, so that the player can use it. If you look at it, you can easily feel dissatisfaction. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the period of the second specific gaming state is not counted as the continuation period of the notified gaming state, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

[Appendix 17]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 17 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in such a gaming machine, a gaming machine that displays a specific symbol (AT start symbol) such as "7-7-7" at the start of AT (ART) is also known. However, the conventional gaming machine that displays such an AT start symbol only forcibly displays the AT start symbol by rotating the reel in a pseudo manner, and is performed regardless of the player's stop operation. Was there. In a pachi-slot machine that requires a push-and-pull operation, the control for forcibly displaying the AT start symbol does not have the enjoyment of the stop operation from the player, and is rather annoying and detracting.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying a specific symbol according to a player's stop operation at the start of AT.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that changes the symbols by rotating the reels based on the establishment of a start condition. A variable means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) and a combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations based on the establishment of the start condition. ), A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the combination determining means. It is advantageous for the player and the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means. With a transition lottery means (for example, main control board 71) that performs a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the gaming state to a notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) that informs the mode of the stop operation (for example, the push order of the correct answer). When the transition right is granted, the notification means for granting the transition right to the notification gaming state (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the transition right is granted. The stop control means includes a notification game start means (for example, a main control board 71) that shifts the game state to the game state, and the stop control means is when the shift right is granted and when the shift right is not granted. It is characterized in that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped in a different manner from the above.

According to such a gaming machine, the stop control means basically stops the rotation of the reels based on the winning combination and the stop operation, but in a state where the right to shift to the notification game state is granted, The rotation of the reel is stopped in a manner different from the state in which the transition right is not granted. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the reel stop control is different between the state in which the notification game state transition right is granted and the state in which the notification gaming state transition right is not granted, immediately before (at the start) of the transition of the notification gaming state. The rotation of the reel can be stopped so as to display a specific symbol according to the player's stop operation.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the bonus starting means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the bonus state when a specific symbol combination is derived as the result display of the stop control of the stop control means, and the above. With a carry-over means (for example, main control board 71) that carries over the permissible condition from which the specific symbol combination is derived when the specific symbol combination is not derived in the unit game in which the derivation of the specific symbol combination is permitted. , The combination determining means determines the winning combination with a probability different from other states during the bonus state, and the notified gaming state has a different degree of advantage for the player and the combination. The stop control means has a plurality of notified game states having the same probability that the determining means determines the winning combination, and the stop control means is granted the right to shift to one notified game state and the one notified game state. Is a case where the right to shift to another notification game state of a different type is granted, and is characterized in that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped in a different manner.

According to such a gaming machine, the reel stop control is different depending on the type of the notification game state of the transition destination. Therefore, for example, the notification game state that is more advantageous to the player and the notification game state that is not so are notified. The symbol displayed at the start of the game state can be changed. For the player, the degree of advantage of the subsequent game differs depending on the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the notified game state, so that the player has a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the notified game state. The fun of the game will improve.

[Appendix 18]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a notification lamp for notifying when a player wins a favorable state such as a bonus. From the player's point of view, it is possible to know that the notification lamp is on / off to determine that the player is in an advantageous state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In this respect, since AT is in an advantageous state for the player as well as the bonus, it is required to devise a method of notifying the player of the result of the lottery for transition to AT.

However, with a lamp that simply turns on / off, although the presence or absence of a win can be immediately known, the player feels that the lamp only needs to be turned on, which makes it interesting, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device. There was a risk that the game would become monotonous due to the loss of interest in other productions such as.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not impair the interest of the game with respect to the notification of the result of the AT lottery.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that plays a game using a gaming value, and has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a start condition is satisfied. Based on this, the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel, and the first winning combination when the start condition is satisfied. First role (for example, "F_3 selection") that allows stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a symbol combination (for example, a combination of bell symbols) or a second symbol combination (for example, a combination of bell spilled symbols). "Bell"), and a stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a third symbol combination (for example, a combination of the first symbol) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, a miss) when determined as a winning combination. A combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a second combination (for example, "F_3 alternative one-sheet combination") that allows A stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, a winning combination determined by the combination determining means, and the above. When the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the fluctuation of the symbol are stopped based on the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means. When the first symbol combination is displayed, a first quantity of game value (for example, nine medals) is given, and when the second symbol combination is displayed, the second quantity is smaller than the first quantity. When the third symbol combination is displayed without giving a quantity of game value or giving any game value, a third quantity of game value equal to or less than the game value used for the game (for example, 1). (One medal) is given, and when the fourth symbol combination is displayed, a fourth quantity of gaming value smaller than the third quantity is given, or no gaming value is given. For example, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the gaming state to the main control board 71) and the notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) that informs the player of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, the push order of the correct answer). (For example, the main control board 71) and the first notification that, when the transition lottery is won, informs the player of an advantageous stop operation mode when the first combination is determined as the winning combination. Perform a game state (for example, ART game state) The first notification game control means (for example, the main control board 71) and, according to a predetermined condition, without notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player when the first combination is determined as the winning combination. 2. For example, the main control board 71) and a notification means (for example, a state display 147b) for notifying that the current gaming state is the first notification gaming state or the second notification gaming state are provided. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, during the first notification game state, the first combination is notified of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, while during the second notification game state, the first combination is notified. The mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified only to the second combination without notifying. Here, the advantageous situation for the player at the time of winning the first winning combination is that the first symbol combination to which the first quantity of the game value is given, which exceeds the game value used for the game, is displayed. Therefore, the value for the game possessed by the player increases by following the notification to the first combination. On the other hand, an advantageous situation for the player at the time of winning the second role is that a third symbol combination to which a third quantity of game value equal to or less than the game value used for the game is given is displayed. , Even if the notification to the second role is followed, the value for the game possessed by the player does not increase. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention has two notified gaming states: a first notified gaming state in which notification is given that the gaming value increases, and a second notified gaming state in which notification is given that the gaming value does not increase. It will be.

Here, although the gaming machine according to the present invention has a notification means for notifying that the current gaming state is the notification gaming state, this notification means has the current gaming state as the first notification gaming state or the second notification. In order to notify that the player is in a gaming state, the notification by the notification means is performed regardless of whether the first notification game state is truly advantageous or the second notification game state is not necessarily advantageous. .. As a result, from the player's point of view, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the notification by the notification means will shift to a truly advantageous state (first notification game state), and the notification by the notification means is displayed on the liquid crystal display. You will not lose interest in other productions such as equipment. Thereby, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled when the result of the AT lottery is notified by the notification means.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second notified game control means performs the second notified game state when the second combination is determined as the winning combination in a game other than the first notified game state. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, the second notified game state is not performed over all the games other than the first notified game state, but is performed only for a part of the games other than the first notified game state. If the notification game state (AT) is performed for a long period of time in the pachislot machine, the gambling of the game may be unnecessarily increased, but the second notification is limited to some games other than the first notification game state. By performing the game state, the period of the notified game state (first notified game state and second notified game state) can be limited, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from being unnecessarily increased.

[Appendix 19]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Here, in such an AT machine (ART machine), when the transition lottery to the AT is performed, a continuous production (so-called precursory production) suggesting whether or not the transition lottery is successful may be performed. However, with conventional gaming machines, the number of medals basically decreases during this precursory production, so the player feels a sense of loss during the precursory production, which should increase the interest of the game. There was a problem that the interest of the game was reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not impair the interest during the precursory production that suggests the result of the AT lottery.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, the order of pressing the correct answer). Transition lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the gaming state to the first notified gaming state (for example, short ART) or the second notified gaming state (for example, long ART) to be notified. When the lottery for shifting to the first notified game state is won, the first notified game control means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the first notified game state during the first period (for example, between three games). And, when the lottery for shifting to the second notified game state is won, the second notified game control means (for example, between 53 games) that exceeds the first period, the second notified game control means that performs the second notified game state. For example, when the main control board 71) and the notification target combination (for example, the push order combination), which is the combination of the notification targets during the first notification game state or the second notification game state, are determined as the winning combination, the game is played. A notification means (for example, a main control board 71, an instruction monitor 147, a sub control board 72, a display unit 100) for notifying a mode of a stop operation (for example, the order in which correct answers are pressed) that is advantageous to the person, and an effect execution for executing the effect. Means (eg, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) and notification means (for example, main control board 71,) for notifying that the current gaming state is the first notification gaming state or the second notification gaming state. The state display 147b) is provided, and when the effect executing means wins the transition lottery to the first notification game state or the transition lottery to the second notification game state, the first period, the second The transition to the notification game state is characterized by executing an effect of notifying the player whether or not the lottery has been won.

According to such a gaming machine, as the notification gaming state for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, the first notification game state performed in the first period and the second period line exceeding the first period If the player has a second notified game state and wins a lottery for transition to the first notified game state or a second notified game state, whether or not the lottery for transitioning to the second notified game state is won during the first period. Executes the effect of notifying. Since the second notified gaming state is performed over a second period beyond the first period in which this effect is performed, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first period is a precursor to the second notified gaming state. It can be in a gaming state. That is, when the first notified game state is won, the notified game state ends in the first period (at the end of the production), while when the second notified game state is won, the second notified game state is won. Since the notified game state continues beyond the first period, the notified game state can be continued after the end of the effect. At this time, regardless of whether the first notification game state or the second notification game state is won, in order to notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, during the first period of performing this effect. The player can benefit. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the player can benefit during the so-called precursory effect, the loss feeling of the player during the precursory effect can be suppressed, and as a result, the interest of the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.
Further, in the case of the first notified game state or the second notified game state, the notification means is used to notify the player, but from the notification by the notification means, the player is in the first notified game state or the second notified game state. Since it is not possible to know which of these is the winning result, it is possible to prevent the production result from being known in advance during the precursory production.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a setting means (for example, a setting key type switch 430, a main control board 71) for setting one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. ) Is further provided, and among the plurality of combinations, the set unquestioned combination determined as the winning combination with the same probability regardless of the set value set by the setting means, and the set value set by the setting means. The transition lottery means includes the setting difference combination determined as the winning combination with a certain probability, and the transition lottery means performs the transition lottery in response to the setting unquestioned combination being determined as the winning combination, while the setting difference combination It is characterized in that the transition lottery is not performed according to the determination as the winning combination, and the transition lottery is performed with the same probability regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to such a gaming machine, the transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the notified gaming state (first notified game state or second notified game state) is won when the set unquestioned combination is determined as the winning combination. The probability is the same regardless of the set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the notification gaming state can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in ball ejection performance can be set as the winning probability of the setting difference combination with the setting difference. Can be suppressed to. As a result, the difference in the payout performance for each set value can be given to the determination of the winning combination itself, not to the notified gaming state, so that the gambling is unnecessarily enhanced in the gaming machine having the notified gaming state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that a player can play with peace of mind.

[Appendix 20]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 20 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
As a gaming machine having such an AT function, an AT machine for managing the number of games, which manages the duration of AT according to the number of games, is known. By the way, in such an AT machine for managing the number of games, if the number of winnings of the winning combination (for example, push order bell, etc.) to be notified during the AT period is small, the number of medals that can be obtained during the AT period is small, and the medals can be obtained during the AT period. Despite this, the player was sometimes dissatisfied.

Further, as a gaming machine having an AT function, an AT machine for managing the number of times of navigation, which manages the duration of AT by the number of times of notifying information advantageous to the player, is also known. Even in such an AT machine that manages the number of navigations, if the role to be notified is not easily established, the period of waiting for the occurrence of navigation becomes long, and the player is asked even though the AT period is in progress. On the other hand, it could give a boring impression.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of a game during an AT period.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that changes the symbols by rotating the reels based on the establishment of a start condition. A variable means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) and a combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations based on the establishment of the start condition. ), A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the combination determining means. The stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the fluctuation of the symbol are based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means. A specific game starting means (for example, a main control board 71) that starts a specific game state (for example, a bonus state) when a specific symbol combination is displayed when stopped, and a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous for the player. A transition lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the gaming state to a notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) for notifying (for example, the push order of correct answers), and the transition lottery. Based on the result of the transition lottery of the means, the notification game control means (for example, the main control board 71) that executes the notification game state and the notification target combination (for example, the notification target combination) that is the combination of the notification target during the notification game state. When the push order combination is determined as the winning combination, the notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub control board) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, the push order of the correct answer) is announced. 72, a display unit 100), and the combination determining means determines the notification target combination as a winning combination during the specific gaming state with a higher probability than in a state other than the specific gaming state, and the notification game. The control means is characterized in that when the specific game state is started by the specific game start means in a state of winning the transition lottery, the notified game state is started.

In such a gaming machine, when the notification game state is entered, when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination, a so-called AT machine or ART machine is realized in order to notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. be able to. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific gaming state is started in the state of winning the transition lottery, the notified gaming state is started, that is, when the notified gaming state is started, the specific gaming state is started. It's time. In this specific gaming state, the notification target combination wins with a higher probability than in a state other than the specific gaming state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification gaming state starts together with the specific gaming state, the notification is subsequently announced. It can be expected that the target role will win with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult for the notification target combination to win during the notification game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the notification game state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is characterized in that the notified game control means continuously executes the notified gaming state even after the specific gaming state ends.

In such a gaming machine, since the notified gaming state continues even after the specified gaming state in which the notification target combination is likely to win is completed, it is possible to aim for the specific gaming state (bonus) while receiving the notification thereafter.

[Appendix 21]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 21 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Here, as shown in Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-238924), when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, a gaming machine that carries over the winning bonus until the bonus is won is also known. ing. In addition, in a gaming machine that carries over such a bonus, if a specific small winning combination is won while the bonus is carried over, a notification may be given to encourage the winning of the specific small winning combination or bonus.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
For the player, by appropriately performing the stop operation according to this notification, it is possible to realize a prize of a specific small winning combination or bonus. However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the notification for prompting the winning of either a specific small winning combination or the bonus is performed. Therefore, for example, when the notification of the bonus is performed, the stop pattern of the symbol when the first reel is stopped is performed. Not only will it not be possible to win a bonus when it denies the winning of a bonus, but it will also not be possible to win a particular small role that has not been notified.

If neither a specific small role nor a bonus can be won, the player feels a sense of loss and may lose interest even though he is in a state of winning the bonus. In particular, a beginner with a low skill in the stop operation is likely to be unable to win the notified role (specific small role or bonus), and the beginner may not be able to play the game with peace of mind.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play with peace of mind.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The display window 4), the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the establishment of the start condition, and the establishment of the start condition. Based on this, a first symbol combination (for example, a combination of bell symbols) or a second symbol combination (for example, a combination of bell spilled symbols) is included depending on the order of the stop operations when the winning combination is determined. Corresponds to a combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) that determines a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a push order combination that allows stop display for a combination of a plurality of symbols, and the plurality of reels. A stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, a winning combination determined by the combination determining means, and the stop operation detection. The stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol based on the detection of the stop operation by the means, and the symbol display when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. A specific game start means for starting a specific game state (for example, a bonus state) when a specific symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols of "C_BB1") corresponding to a specific combination (for example, "F_BB1") is displayed in the means. (For example, when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination by the main control board 71) and the combination determining means, the specific combination is used as the winning combination until the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. When the carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) and the stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol display means displays the first symbol combination according to the push order combination. A profit-giving means (for example, the main control board 71) that gives a larger profit than when the second symbol combination is displayed, and an effect executing means (for example, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) that executes the effect. ), And the effect executing means is when all of the plurality of reels are rotating when the push order combination is determined as the winning combination in the game in which the carry-over means carries over the specific combination. In addition, an effect of notifying the order of the stop operation in which the first symbol combination is displayed is executed in the push order combination, and when one reel stops, the stop operation is performed. In the symbol display means for displaying the symbols of the reels, the push order combination constituent symbols constituting the first symbol combination are displayed, and the specific combination constituent symbols constituting the specific symbol combination are displayed in the symbol display means. If it is not displayed, the effect of notifying the order of the stop operation is continued, and if both the push order combination configuration symbol and the specific combination configuration symbol are displayed on the symbol display means, the effect is continued. , The effect of notifying that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop operation while avoiding the specific combination configuration symbol is executed, and the specific combination configuration symbol is displayed on the symbol display means and the symbol display means. When the push order combination configuration symbol is not displayed, the effect of notifying that the specific combination configuration symbol is stopped and displayed is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the push order combination is determined as the winning combination in the game in which the specific combination is carried over, the first symbol combination (that is, more) in the push order combination during the rotation of all reels. The effect of notifying the order of the stop operation (the order of pressing the correct answer) in which the profit is given) is executed. From the player's point of view, there is a possibility that the first symbol combination that can obtain more profit at the time of winning the push order combination can be displayed by performing the stop operation according to this notification.

Then, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when one reel is stopped, the content to be notified is switched based on the symbol displayed on the stopped reel. Specifically, when the push order configuration symbol is displayed on the stopped reels and the specific combination configuration symbol is not displayed, the specific symbol combination is not displayed when all reels are stopped (that is,). , No specific role will win), so we will continue to notify you of the correct push order. For the player, by performing the stop operation according to the content of this notification, there is a possibility that the first symbol combination that can obtain more profit at the time of winning the push order combination can be displayed.

On the other hand, if both the push order configuration symbol and the specific combination configuration symbol are displayed on the stopped reels, there is a possibility that both the first symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are displayed when all reels are stopped. Therefore, it is notified that the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer while avoiding the specific combination composition symbol. For the player, by performing the stop operation according to the content of this notification, there is a possibility that the first symbol combination that can obtain more profit at the time of winning the push order combination can be displayed, and the skill of the stop operation is assumed. Even if it is low and the specific combination composition pattern cannot be avoided, a prize for the specific role can be expected.

On the other hand, if the push order configuration symbol is not displayed on the stopped reel and only the specific combination configuration symbol is displayed, an effect of notifying that the specific combination configuration symbol is stopped and displayed is executed. do. As long as the push order configuration symbol is not displayed on the stopped reels, the first symbol combination is not displayed when all reels are stopped. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification performed during the rotation of all reels ( Stop the notification of the push order combination) and switch to the notification of the specific combination. For the player, it can be expected that a specific role will be won by following the switched notification.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by switching the content to be notified according to the progress of the game, the player can perform the notification without loss, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that variablely displays a plurality of symbols based on a player's start operation, stops the plurality of symbols based on a player's stop operation, and derives a result display. Therefore, when the first symbol combination (for example, the combination of bell symbols) is derived as the result display, a predetermined benefit is given, and the second symbol combination (for example, the symbol of the bell spilled eye) is given as the result display. A profit-giving means (for example, the main control board 71) that gives a profit less than the predetermined profit when the combination) is derived, and a specific symbol combination (for example, a combination of the symbols of "C_BB1") as a result display. The specific game start means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts a specific game state (for example, a bonus state) when derived, and the specific symbol combination in the unit game in which the derivation of the specific symbol combination is permitted. The carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over the allowable condition from which the combination of the specific symbols is derived when the above-mentioned specific symbol combination is not derived, and the effect execution means (for example, the sub-control board 72, display) that executes the effect. When the unit 100) is provided and derivation is permitted for any of the first symbol combination, the second symbol combination, and the specific symbol combination, the effect executing means is the first after the start operation. Until the stop operation of is accepted, the effect of notifying the mode of the stop operation from which the first symbol combination is derived is executed, and when the first stop operation is accepted, the first symbol combination is displayed as a result. When the derivation is possible and the specific symbol combination cannot be derived as the result display, the effect of notifying the mode of the stop operation is continued, and the first symbol combination and the specific symbol are displayed as the result display. When none of the combinations cannot be derived, an effect of notifying the mode of the stop operation for deriving the first symbol combination while avoiding the derivation of the specific symbol combination is executed, and the result display is described as described above. When the first symbol combination cannot be derived and the specific symbol combination can be derived as a result display, the effect of notifying the mode of the stop operation for deriving the specific symbol combination is executed. do.

Even in such a gaming machine, by switching the content to be notified according to the progress of the game, the player can perform the notification without loss, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

[Appendix 22]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 22 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an AT function, the role of the navigation during the AT period is simply to increase the number of medals, so that the navigation during the AT period becomes monotonous, and the player feels a rut. As a result, there was a risk that the interest of the game would decline even though it was during the AT period.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest during a period of notifying information advantageous to a player.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that changes the symbols by rotating the reels based on the establishment of a start condition. The first symbol combination (for example, the combination of the replay symbols) or the second symbol combination when the variable means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the winning combination are determined based on the establishment of the start condition. The first combination (for example, "F_maintenance lip") that allows stop display for a combination of a plurality of symbols including the symbol combination of (for example, the combination of symbols of the RT1 transition lip), and the first combination when determined as a winning combination. A second role (for example, "for example," A combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including "F_3 selection bell") and a combination corresponding to the plurality of reels are provided to stop each reel. Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting the stop operation for causing the combination, the winning combination determined by the combination determining means, and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped in the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the first gaming state (for example, the RT2 gaming state). When the first symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is maintained in the first gaming state, and when the second symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state ( For example, when the game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that shifts to the RT1 game state) and the third symbol combination are displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the first quantity of games is played. A game value (for example, 9 medals) is given, and when the fourth symbol combination is displayed, a game value less than the first quantity is given or no game value is given. When the means (for example, the main control board 71) and a predetermined condition are satisfied, when the first combination is determined as the winning combination, the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination is notified. The first notification state control means (for example, the first notification state control means (for example, Lipnavi AT) that performs the first notification game state (for example, Lipnavi AT) that does not notify any information even if the second combination is determined as the winning combination is performed during the first game state. For example, the Lord When the control board 71), the transition lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the transition lottery at a higher frequency than the second gaming state, and the transition lottery of the transition lottery means are won. , When the second combination is determined as the winning combination, the second notification game state (for example, Bell Navi AT) for notifying the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the third symbol combination is performed. 2. It is characterized by including a notification state control means (for example, a main control board 71).

According to such a gaming machine, in the first notification game state, information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination at the time of winning the first winning combination is notified. Here, among the symbol combinations according to the first combination, the first symbol combination maintains the first gaming state in which the transition lottery is frequently performed even if it is displayed, while the second symbol combination is displayed. If this is done, the gaming state is shifted (falls) to the second gaming state in which the frequency of the transition lottery is low. Therefore, it can be said that the first notification game state is a notification game state in which notification is performed to maintain the first game state in which the frequency of transition lottery is high.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a second notified gaming state other than the first notified gaming state, and in this second notified gaming state, the third symbol combination is displayed at the time of winning the second winning combination. Notify the information of the stop operation required for this. Here, among the symbol combinations corresponding to the second combination, the third symbol combination is a symbol combination to which a large number of game media (first quantity) are given when displayed, and the fourth symbol combination is. It is a symbol combination in which a small amount of game medium is given (or no game medium is given) when displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the second notification game state is a notification game state in which notification is given to receive the addition of the game medium.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a first notified gaming state and a second notified gaming state, which have different roles. For the player, the meaning of the notification differs depending on the type of the notification game state, so that the notification during the notification game state does not become monotonous and the interest during the notification game state is prevented from deteriorating. can.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the second winning combination is won during the first notification gaming state, no information is notified, so that the increase in the gaming medium can be suppressed during the first notification gaming state. Become. In a game machine, it is necessary to balance the profits of the player and the game store, but if the period in which the game medium increases is long, the profit gained by the player becomes excessive, so the period in which the game medium increases is set. It needs to be suppressed. In a normal gaming machine, the notified gaming state is a period during which the gaming medium increases, so that it is necessary to make it difficult to shift to the notified gaming state in order to balance profits, but for the player, the notification is given. If the period of the game state is suppressed, the interest will be reduced. In this respect, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a second notified game state in which the game medium increases and a first notified game state in which the increase in the game medium is suppressed. While maintaining a balance of profits, it is possible to realize a playability that makes it easy to shift to a notification game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a setting means (for example, a setting key type switch 430, a main control board 71) for setting one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. ) Is further provided, and among the plurality of combinations, a specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition lip") is determined as a winning combination with a probability according to the current gaming state regardless of the set value set by the setting means. ) Is included, and in the first gaming state, the specific combination is determined as a winning combination with a first probability, while in the second gaming state, the specific combination is determined from the first probability. It is determined as a winning combination with a low second probability, and the transition lottery means wins with the same probability regardless of the set value set by the setting means according to the determination of the specific combination as the winning combination. The transition lottery is performed, and the gaming state control means shifts the gaming state from the second gaming state to the first gaming state with a probability corresponding to the set value set by the setting means.

According to such a gaming machine, when a specific winning combination determined as a winning combination is won regardless of the set value, a lottery for shifting to the second notification gaming state is performed. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the second notification gaming state at the time of winning the specific combination can be made the same for each set value. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transition to the first gaming state, which is easy for a specific combination to win, is performed with a probability according to the set value. Therefore, for example, the setting value for easily transitioning to the first gaming state. And a set value that is difficult to shift can be provided, and the characteristics of each set value can be obtained with respect to the shift to the second notification gaming state.

[Appendix 23]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 23 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In such a gaming machine, various gaming states are realized by providing a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a gaming state that is relatively advantageous and controlling the transition between these gaming states. There is. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination so as not to miss the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Is disclosed to a gaming machine that provides a gaming state (AT) that is advantageous to the player by notifying the player.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In a gaming machine, in order to balance the profits of a player and a gaming store, it is required to appropriately manage the transition between an advantageous gaming state and an unfavorable gaming state. For example, a gaming machine that hardly shifts to an advantageous gaming state, but once transitions to an advantageous gaming state and then continues to have an advantageous gaming state for a long period of time, is highly gambling and unfavorable. It is necessary to properly balance the transition frequency of the game and the duration of the favorable gaming state.

From the standpoint of a pachinko parlor, it is desirable to grasp the gaming machine whose game state balance is significantly impaired, but in the past, only simple information such as the insertion and withdrawal of medals used for the game was accepted from the gaming machine. It was not always sufficient to grasp the gaming machine whose state balance was significantly impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping that the gaming balance is impaired.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A first counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the total number of games that indicate the number of games in all the game states, and a second counter (for example, the main control) that counts the number of specific games that indicate the number of games in the specific game state. The board 71), a calculation means (for example, the main control board 71) that calculates a specific section ratio indicating the ratio of the specific number of games to the total number of games, and the specific section ratio calculated by the calculation means. It is characterized by including a notification means (for example, an external centralized terminal board 73, a main control board 71) for notifying an external device of predetermined information when the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio.

According to such a gaming machine, when the ratio of the specific number of games to the total number of games becomes a predetermined ratio or more, the external device is notified to that effect. As a result, the gaming store side can easily grasp the gaming machine in which the ratio of the advantageous state (specific gaming state) for the player is remarkably high.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a third counter (for example, the main control board 71) for counting the total number of grants indicating the number of gaming values granted in all gaming states, and the specific gaming state. Further, a fourth counter (for example, a main control board 71) for counting the number of grants during the specific game indicating the number of values for the game is further provided, and the calculation means is in the specific game occupying the total number of grants. A ratio value indicating a ratio of the number of grants is calculated, and the notification means is characterized in that when the ratio value is equal to or more than a predetermined value, predetermined information is notified to an external device.

According to such a gaming machine, when the ratio of the number of grants during the specific game to the total number of grants exceeds a predetermined value, the external device is notified to that effect. Usually, in a gaming machine, not only a state that is advantageous to the player but also a state that is disadvantageous to the player is given a gaming value by winning a small role or the like. A state in which the ratio of the number of grants during a specific game to the total number of grants is high means that a large amount of game value is given in an advantageous state, and almost no game value is given in a disadvantageous state. It is shown and may increase gambling. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in such a case, a predetermined notification is given to the external device to notify the gaming store side. As a result, the gaming store can easily grasp the gaming machine in which the ratio of the advantageous state for the player is remarkably high.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification means transfers the predetermined information to the external device regardless of the calculation result of the calculation means until the total number of games counted by the first counter reaches the predetermined number of times. On the other hand, it is characterized by not outputting.

According to such a gaming machine, until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number of times, the predetermined information is not notified to the external device even if the ratio of the advantageous state for the player is extremely high. After installing the gaming machine, in a situation where the game is not played much, the ratio of the advantageous state moves greatly up and down, so there is a possibility that notification will be given even when it is not originally needed. In this respect, the gaming machine according to the present invention does not give notification until the total number of games has reached a predetermined number of times, so that unnecessary notification is not given.

[Appendix 24]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 24 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
As a gaming machine having such an AT function, an AT machine for managing the number of games, which manages the duration of AT according to the number of games, is known. By the way, in such an AT machine for managing the number of games, if the number of winnings of the winning combination (for example, push order bell, etc.) to be notified during the AT period is small, the number of medals that can be obtained during the AT period is small, and the medals can be obtained during the AT period. Despite this, the player was sometimes dissatisfied.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of a game during an AT period.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that changes the symbols by rotating the reels based on the establishment of a start condition. A variable means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) and a combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations based on the establishment of the start condition. ), A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the combination determining means. Based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and a predetermined start condition are set. When satisfied, the notification game start means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the notification game state (for example, a specific section) and the notification target combination (for example, the push order combination) that is the combination of the notification target during the notification game state. ) Is determined as the winning combination, the notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub control board 72, and the display) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, the pressing order of the correct answer). After the unit 100), the notification game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the notification game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the notification game start means start the notification game state. A counting means (for example, main control board 71) that counts the number of continuations indicating the number of unit games, and a notification means (for example, main control board 71, state) for notifying that the current game state is the notified game state. The notification game ending means includes a display 147b), and the number of continuations counted by the counting means is a predetermined number of times in a situation where the notification by the notification means is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state. When the number reaches a predetermined number, the notification gaming state is terminated on condition that the number of continuations reaches a predetermined number, and the counting means is in a situation where the notification by the notification means is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state. When the number of continuations to be counted reaches a predetermined number of times, the notification gaming state is then terminated on condition that the notification by the notification means has reached the guaranteed number of times, and the notification means is terminated from the notification gaming state. At that time, the notification that the current gaming state is the notified gaming state is terminated.

According to such a gaming machine, the notification game state is basically terminated when the number of continuations during the notification game state reaches a predetermined number of times, but the notification of the notification target combination is not performed for the guaranteed number of times. Does not end even if the number of continuations reaches a predetermined number of times, and then continues until the notification of the notification target combination is performed for the guaranteed number of times. Become. For the player, even if the number of winnings of the notification target role is small, the notification is performed for the guaranteed number of times, so that the game can be played with peace of mind, and the interest of the game is enjoyed during the notification game state. It is possible to prevent it from being lowered.
In addition, since the notification game state is notified by the notification means, if the notification game state is not completed even if the number of continuations reaches a predetermined number, the player continues the notification game state from the notification content of the notification means. I can understand what I am doing. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being accidentally ended during the notification game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of combinations allow stop display for a combination of a plurality of symbols including the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination when the winning combination is determined. A second combination that allows stop display for one combination (for example, a push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations) and a combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination or a fourth symbol combination when determined as a winning combination. When a combination (for example, a push order combination that does not guarantee the number of navigations) is included and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, when the first symbol combination is displayed, the first quantity of game value is given. Then, when the second symbol combination is displayed, less game value than the first quantity is given or no game value is given, and when the third symbol combination is displayed, the first quantity is given. A game value that is less than the second quantity is given, while a game value that is less than the second quantity is given or no game value is given when the fourth symbol combination is displayed. A value-imparting means (for example, a main control board 71) is further provided, and the notification means is stopped necessary for displaying the first symbol combination when the first combination is determined as the winning combination. The mode of operation is notified, and when the second combination is determined as the winning combination, the mode of the stop operation necessary for displaying the third symbol combination is notified, and the notification game ending means is described. When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times in a situation where the notification to the first combination by the notification means is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state, the second combination is played. Regardless of the number of times of the notification, the notification game state is terminated on condition that the number of continuations reaches a predetermined number of times, and the notification to the first combination by the notification means is guaranteed the number of times during the notification game state. When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times in the situation where the above is not performed, the notification by the notification means is subsequently performed regardless of the number of notifications made to the second combination. It is characterized in that the notification game state is terminated on condition that the guaranteed number of times has been reached.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, at least the guaranteed number of notifications are given during the notification gaming state, but in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first combination is guaranteed to be notified for the guaranteed number of times. We do not guarantee the number of guaranteed notifications for the second role. Here, according to the notification to the first combination, the first quantity of the gaming medium is given, and according to the notification to the second combination, the second quantity of the gaming medium smaller than the first quantity is given. In the game machine concerned, the first combination to which many game media are given is guaranteed to be notified for the guaranteed number of times, and the second combination to which a small number of game media are given is guaranteed to be notified for the guaranteed number of times. Not.

In recent game machines, in order to balance profits, a role in which medals do not increase or decrease, a role in which medals decrease, or a role in which the increase in medals is extremely small (for example, a three-card role in which the number of bets and the number of payouts match) , 1-card combination with a smaller number of bets than the number of payouts, 4-card combination with a slightly larger number of payouts than the number of bets, etc.) may be provided, and notification for this combination may be performed during the notification game state. Since such a combination does not increase or decrease (or has a small number) of medals even if the notification is followed, it is not necessary for the player to guarantee the number of notifications during the notification game state. On the other hand, for a combination in which the number of medals increases (for example, a combination of 9 cards in which the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets), the total number of medals (game media) given during the notification game state is affected. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is preferable that the number of notifications is guaranteed during the notification game state.

In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of notifications is guaranteed for the first combination to which a large number of game media are given, and the number of notifications is not guaranteed to the second combination to which a small number of game media are given. For example, even if the notification to the second combination has been sufficiently performed by the time the number of continuations in the notification game state reaches a predetermined number, the notification to the first combination has not been performed for the guaranteed number of times. , Continue without ending the notification game state. For the player, since the number of notifications of the first role is guaranteed to affect the total number of game media given during the notification game state, the game can be played with peace of mind, and the game can be played during the notification game state. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

[Appendix 25]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 25 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Among gaming machines equipped with such an AT function, a gaming machine having a chance zone (CZ) that makes it easy to shift to an AT is also known. There is also a known gaming machine that can be selected by. However, the method of selecting CZ is monotonous, and it is not always a method that is kind to the player, and there is room for further improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that realizes a method of selecting a CZ that is kind to a player.

[Means to solve problems]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification target combination (for example, the push order combination), which is the notification target combination, is determined as the winning combination, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, the correct push order). ) Is a notification game state (for example, a specific section) and a normal game state (for example, a normal section) that does not notify the advantageous stop operation mode. A combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a combination, and a right granting a right to a lottery state in which a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the notified game state is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A means (for example, the main control board 71), a selection receiving means (for example, the main control board 71) that accepts the selection of one lottery state from a plurality of lottery states while the transition right is granted. When the selection of one lottery state is accepted by the selection receiving means, or when a predetermined operation is performed without accepting the selection of one lottery state, the lottery state starting means (for example, the main control board) that starts the lottery state. 71) When the transition lottery is won in the lottery state, the gaming state shifts from the lottery state to the notified gaming state, and when the duration of the lottery state exceeds the end period, the lottery state is changed to the normal gaming state. The game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that shifts the game state to, the number of unit games in the lottery state, and the number of unit games in the notified game state that are continuously performed from the lottery state. A counting means (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the number of advantageous sections that is the sum, and a notification game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the notified game state when the number of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined number of times. ), And the plurality of lottery states include a plurality of lottery states having different end periods, and the lottery state start means is when the selection of one lottery state is accepted by the selection reception means. Starts the accepted one lottery state, and when a predetermined operation is performed without accepting the selection of the one lottery state, the shortest lottery state having the shortest end period among the plurality of lottery states is selected. It is characterized by starting.

When such a gaming machine shifts to the lottery state, it shifts to a notification gaming state that informs the player of an advantageous stop operation mode. Therefore, an AT (notification game state) having a so-called CZ (lottery state) It is possible to realize a machine or an ART machine. Here, if the advantageous state for the player is continuously performed for a long period of time, the gambling of the game may be unnecessarily increased. Therefore, in recent pachislot machines, the advantageous state for the player. It is required to keep the duration of the game to a certain period. In a so-called AT machine (ART machine), it can be said that the AT period is in an advantageous state, but the CZ period is also a period in which it is easy to shift to an advantageous AT, and it is preferable to include it in the advantageous state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of advantageous sections, which is the sum of the number of unit games in the lottery state (CZ) and the number of unit games in the notified game state (AT) continuously performed from the lottery state (AT). However, when the predetermined number of times is reached, the notification game state is terminated, and the period during which the advantageous state continues is suppressed to a certain period.

In such a gaming machine, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player can select one lottery state from a plurality of lottery states having different end periods. For the player, since the lottery state (CZ) having different playability can be freely selected, the player can enjoy the playability preferred by the player, but as described above, the period of this lottery state is also an advantageous period. In a gaming machine that is handled, it is preferable that a shorter lottery state is easy to select. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the player makes a selection by his / her own will, the selected lottery state is started, but when the game proceeds without the player making a selection. , The shortest lottery state with the shortest end period, which is considered to be more preferable for the player, is started. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since it is easy to start the shortest lottery state considered to be preferable for the player, it is possible to realize a method of selecting the lottery state (CZ) which is kind to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the selection receiving means selects the lottery state pointed to by the instruction information indicating one of the lottery states among the plurality of lottery states when the selection is accepted. The selection of the lottery state is accepted, and the instruction information is characterized in that it points to the shortest lottery state in the initial state.

According to such a gaming machine, the lottery state is selected based on the lottery state pointed to by the instruction information (cursor), but the instruction information sets the shortest lottery state considered to be preferable for the player to the initial state. Is selected in. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the shortest lottery state considered to be preferable for the player can be easily selected, so that a method for selecting the lottery state (CZ) that is kind to the player can be realized.

[Appendix 26]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 26 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, if the setting is changed during the AT period, the AT will be cleared. Therefore, from the game store side, the AT should be maintained only when the setting is maintained (deferred) without being changed. I couldn't do it, and the options for store management were limited.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of various choices regarding maintenance / clearing of AT.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and a notified gaming state (for example, a specific section) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. When the notification game start means (for example, the main control board 71) to be started and the notification target combination, which is the combination of the notification target during the notification game state, are determined as the winning combination, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player (for example). For example, when the notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100) for notifying the correct answer pressing order) and a predetermined end condition are satisfied, the notification game state is terminated. A setting means (for example, a setting key type switch 430) for setting one of a set value from a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player and the notification game ending means (for example, the main control board 71). When a new set value is set by the setting means of the main control board 71) and the notified game state, the game state is maintained in the notified game state, and a predetermined initialization is performed during the notified game state. It is characterized by including a game control means (for example, a main control board 71) that terminates the notified game state when an operation is performed.

According to such a gaming machine, during the notification game state, when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, so that the so-called AT machine or ART machine is used. It can be realized. Then, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the initialization operation is performed during the notified gaming state, the notified gaming state is terminated (cleared), but a new set value is set during the notified gaming state. Also keeps the gaming state in the notification gaming state. From the game store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear the notification game state while changing the set value. Therefore, according to the game machine according to the present invention, there are various options for the game store side regarding the operation of the game machine. Can be given.

[Appendix 27]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 27 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In such a gaming machine, various gaming states are realized by providing a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a gaming state that is relatively advantageous and controlling the transition between these gaming states. There is. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination so as not to miss the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Is disclosed to a gaming machine that provides a gaming state (AT) that is advantageous to the player by notifying the player.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In a gaming machine, in order to balance the profits of a player and a gaming store, it is required to appropriately manage the transition between an advantageous gaming state and an unfavorable gaming state. For example, a gaming machine that hardly shifts to an advantageous gaming state, but once transitions to an advantageous gaming state and then continues to have an advantageous gaming state for a long period of time, is highly gambling and unfavorable. It is necessary to properly balance the transition frequency of the game and the duration of the favorable gaming state.

From the standpoint of a pachinko parlor, it is desirable to grasp the gaming machine whose game state balance is significantly impaired, but in the past, only simple information such as the insertion and withdrawal of medals used for the game was accepted from the gaming machine. It was not always sufficient to grasp the gaming machine whose state balance was significantly impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping that the gaming balance is impaired.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A first counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the total number of games that indicate the number of games in all the game states, and a second counter (for example, the main control) that counts the number of specific games that indicate the number of games in the specific game state. The board 71), a calculation means for calculating a specific section ratio indicating the ratio of the specific number of games to the total number of games (for example, the main control board 71), and a position that is difficult for the player to see are provided. It is characterized by comprising a display means (for example, a ratio display 422, a main control board 71) for displaying the specific section ratio.

According to such a game machine, the clerk of the game store checks the ratio of the specific section displayed on the display means, so that the ratio of the state advantageous to the player (specific game state) is out of balance. It can be easily grasped. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to easily grasp that the balance of the game is impaired on the gaming store side. Further, since this display means is provided at a position that is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the display means from being seen by the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display means displays the specific section ratio in the first display mode when the specific section ratio is equal to or more than a predetermined value, and the specific section ratio is less than the predetermined value. In some cases, the specific section ratio is displayed in the second display mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the specific section ratio becomes a predetermined ratio or more, the specific section ratio is displayed in different display modes, so that the game store can grasp at a glance that the game is out of balance. can.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a third counter (for example, the main control board 71) for counting the total number of grants indicating the number of gaming values granted in all gaming states, and the specific gaming state. The fourth counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the number of grants during the specific game, which indicates the number of values for the game, and the calculation means are the ratio of the number of grants during the specific game to the total number of grants. The display means is characterized in that the specific section ratio and the ratio value are switched and displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, the display means also displays the ratio of the number of grants during the specific game (ratio of bonuses) to the total number of grants. Usually, in a gaming machine, a gaming medium is given by a prize such as a small winning combination, not only in a state advantageous to the player but also in a state disadvantageous to the player. A state in which the ratio of the number of grants during a specific game to the total number of grants is high indicates that a large number of game media are granted in an advantageous state and almost no game medium is granted in a disadvantageous state. There is a risk of increasing gambling. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by displaying the accessory ratio on the display means, the clerk of the gaming store can grasp the gaming machine in which the ratio of the state advantageous to the player is remarkably high.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio are switched and displayed by the display means, it is not necessary to individually provide the display means for displaying each ratio. As a result, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that already has a display means inside the gaming machine, the display means may be able to switch and display the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio, which is minor from the software aspect. It is sufficient to make changes, and even in the case of a gaming machine that does not currently have a display means inside the gaming machine, only one display means needs to be newly added, and the minimum change is sufficient.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display means displays the ratio value in the first display mode when the ratio value is equal to or more than the specific value, and when the ratio value is less than the specific value. It is characterized in that the ratio value is displayed in the second display mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the ratio of the number of grants during a specific game to the total number of grants exceeds a predetermined ratio, the ratio value is displayed in a different display mode, so that the game is out of balance. It can be grasped at a glance on the game store side.

[Appendix 28]
The pachi-slot machine 1 in Appendix 28 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

Further, in a game store where a game machine is actually installed, it is common to install an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer together with the game machine. For example, it is installed on the upper part of the game machine. The data counter receives the signal output from the gaming machine and displays the number of games, the number of bonuses, and the like.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the information that the hall side (data counter or hall computer) can grasp based on the external signal output from the gaming machine is limited to the number of games, the number of bonuses, and the like. In recent years, further improvement of the external signal output has been required because it is not possible to accurately grasp the situation of the gaming machine by itself.

The present invention has been made based on such a request, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping more accurate information on the hall side.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that changes the symbols by rotating the reels based on the establishment of a start condition. A variable means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) and a combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations based on the establishment of the start condition. ), A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the combination determining means. A stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, and the notification game start condition. Notification game starting means (for example, main The control board 71), the notification game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the notification game state based on the establishment of the notification game end conditions (for example, the number of games, the number of differences, the number of navigations), and the notification. The notification game ending means includes a counting means (for example, a main control board 71) for counting the duration of the game state and an output means (for example, the main control board 71) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside. When the counting means counts a predetermined period (for example, 1500 games), the notified game state is terminated regardless of whether or not the notified game end condition is satisfied, and the output means is the counting result of the counting means. When the notification game state is terminated, a predetermined signal is output to the outside.

According to such a gaming machine, the notified game state basically ends when the notified game end condition is satisfied, but when the duration reaches a predetermined period, the notified game end condition is waited for. Finish without. If the notified game state continues for a long period of time, the gambling property is unnecessarily increased. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for a mechanism that prevents the notified game state from continuing for a long period of time. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the duration of the notified gaming state reaches a predetermined period, the notified game state is forcibly terminated without waiting for the establishment of the notified game end condition (limit processing). , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming unnecessary.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when such a limit processing is performed, the fact is output to the outside, so that the hall side understands that the limit processing has been performed in the gaming machine. It is possible to grasp new information that could not be grasped in the past.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, based on the establishment of the bonus start condition, the bonus start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the bonus state advantageous to the player, and the above-mentioned Further provided with a bonus ending means (for example, a main control board 71) for terminating the bonus state, the counting means is a period during the bonus state when the bonus state is started during the notified gaming state. Also counts as the continuation period of the announced gaming state, and when the counting means counts the predetermined period during the bonus state during the notified gaming state, the output means is directed to the outside at the end of the bonus state. It is characterized by outputting a predetermined signal.

According to such a gaming machine, the hall side can grasp the fact when the limit processing is performed during the bonus state, so that the situation of the gaming machine can be grasped more accurately.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the notification game ending means, the counting means is the predetermined number in a situation where the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state. When the period is counted, the notification game state is terminated, and the counting means counts the predetermined period in a situation where the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state. Then, the announced game state is terminated on condition that the number of times the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed reaches the guaranteed number of times.

According to such a gaming machine, the limit processing is basically performed when the notification game state continues for a predetermined period, but when advantageous notification is not performed for the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state, it is predetermined. Even if the period is continued, it does not end, and after that, it continues until the advantageous notification is performed for the guaranteed number of times. Therefore, in the notification game state, the notification is performed for at least the guaranteed number of times. For the player, since the notification is performed for the guaranteed number of times, the game can be played with peace of mind, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered during the notification game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the number of times the counting means counts the predetermined period reaches a predetermined number of times within a specific period (for example, from turning on the power to turning off the power), the output means is external. It is characterized by outputting a specific signal to the signal.

According to such a gaming machine, when the limit processing is performed a predetermined number of times within a specific period, a specific signal (for example, an error signal) is externally combined with a signal indicating that the limit processing has been performed. Output to the device. As a result, for example, when the limit processing is performed an unthinkable number of times in a day, the hall side can grasp that fact.

1 ... Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R ... Stop button, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 100 ... Display unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that plays games using the value for gaming.
Multiple variable display units displaying multiple symbols, and
A symbol changing means for changing the symbol of the plurality of variable display units based on the establishment of the start condition, and a symbol changing means.
Based on the establishment of the start condition, when the winning combination is determined, the first combination and the winning combination that allow stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination are determined. A combination determining means for determining a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a second combination that allows stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a third symbol combination or a fourth symbol combination.
A stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of variable display units and detecting a stop operation for stopping each variable display unit, and a stop operation detecting means.
A stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means.
A game value-adding means capable of adding a game value according to the symbol combination displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and
Equipped with
The first symbol combination is a symbol combination to which a first quantity of game value is given when the symbol is displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped.
The second symbol combination is a symbol combination or any gaming value that is given a second quantity of gaming value that is smaller than the first quantity when displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. At least one of the symbol combinations that is not
The third symbol combination is a symbol combination to which a third quantity of gaming value equal to or less than the gaming value used for the game is given when the symbol combination is displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped.
The fourth symbol combination is a symbol combination or any gaming value that is given a fourth quantity of gaming value that is smaller than the third quantity when displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. At least one of the symbol combinations that is not
The game state in which the game is performed includes a predetermined game state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified and a specific game state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player cannot be notified, and the predetermined game. As a state, a first notification game state for notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player when the first combination is determined as the winning combination, and a player when the first combination is determined as the winning combination. It has a second notification gaming state that notifies the player of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the second combination is determined as the winning combination without notifying the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player.
Moreover,
A right-giving means capable of granting the right to shift the gaming state to the first notified gaming state,
When the right is granted, the first notification game control means that starts the first notification game state after a predetermined number of precursor games have elapsed, and the first notification game control means.
A second notification game control means for starting the second notification game state according to a predetermined condition, and a second notification game control means.
A notification means for notifying in the same manner that the current gaming state is the first notification gaming state, the current gaming state is the second notification gaming state, and the precursory game. ,
Further prepare
The second notified game control means controls a game other than the game controlled by the first notified game state among the predetermined game states as the second notified game state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images